还剩122页未读,
继续阅读
人教新目标(Go for it)版八年级上册教案
展开
这是一份人教新目标(Go for it)版八年级上册教案,共125页。
Section A(1a-1c)Unit 1Where did you go on vacation?1.重点单词:stay at home,go to the mountains,go to summer camp2.重点句式:—Where did Tina go on vacation?—She went to the mountains.1.重点短语和句型2.一般过去时态的特殊疑问句和陈述句一般过去时态的特殊疑问句和陈述句认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.待在家里stay__at__home2.去登山go__to__the__mountains3.去海滩go__to__the__beach4.去纽约市go__to__New__York__City5.参观博物馆visit__museums6.去夏令营go__to__summer__campStep 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone.Glad to see you again.Did you have a good time during the vacation?Did you go anywhere interesting with your parents?Did you do anything special there?Can you tell us where you went on vacation?环节说明:以学生假期旅行为话题开始本节课的教学,引起了学生的学习兴趣和用英语表达的欲望。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词和词组,学生识记单词和词组并且将活动和图片中的人物匹配。(3分钟)2.认真观察1a图片中的人物活动,然后认真听录音,将1b中的人物序号写在相应的图片旁边,完成课本上1b的听力任务。(3分钟)3.再听一遍录音,并跟读对话。(2分钟)4.结对练习1c中的对话,并请一些学生表演出他们的对话。(3分钟)5.模仿1c中的对话,利用1a中的短语和1b的听力答案与同伴编练新对话,请邀请一些小组表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Where did Tina go on vacation?B:She went to the mountains.小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.—When ________ a sports meeting?—Last Monday.A.had you B.do you haveC.did you have D.will you have(C)2.—________?—He did some reading at home.A.What does your father do yesterday eveningB.What does your brother do in the schoolC.What did your brother do over the weekendD.Where did your brother go last Sunday(B)3.—Did you go shopping yesterday?—________.A.Yes,I do B.Yes,I didC.Yes,I am D.No,I don't(A)4.—Where did you go ________ vacation?—I went to the mountains.A.on B.to C.at D.with环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.你去哪儿度假?Where__did__you__go__on__vacation?go__on__vacation意为“去度假”。2.我去了夏令营。I__went__to__summer__camp.go__to__summer__camp意为“去夏令营”。类似的短语有:去爬山go__to__the__mountains去海滩go__to__the__beach去看电影go__to__the__movies( )3.—Where ________ he go on vacation?—He went to the mountains.A.is B.does C.has D.did答案选择D,根据答语中went可知问句是一般过去时态的句子,因此选择助动词did。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:anyone,anywhere,wonderful,few,most2.重点短语:quite a few3.重点句式:—Did you buy anything special?—Yes,I did.—Did you meet anyone interesting?—No,I didn't.—Did you go with anyone?—Yes,I went with my mother.Long time no see.I was on vacation last month.We took quite a few photos.I just stayed at home most of the time to read and relax.1.一般过去时态的一般疑问句及回答2.会用一般过去时态来谈论过去发生的事情1.一般过去时态的一般疑问句及回答2.会用一般过去时态来谈论过去发生的事情一、预习课本P2新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.任何人__anyone__2.任何地方__anywhere__3.精彩的__wonderful__4.不多__few__5.大多数__most__二、认真预习2a-2d找出下列短语和句型。1.学习备考study__for__tests2.买特别的东西buy__something__special3.好久不见Long__time__no__see4.去有趣的地方go__somewhere__interesting5.拍相当多的照片take__quite__a__few__photos6.大多数时间most__of__the__time7.当然,自然of__course8.你去哪里度假了?Where__did__you__go__on__vacation?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Did you have a good summer vacation?Student 1:Yes,I did.Teacher:Where did you go on vacation?Student 1:I went to the mountains.Teacher:Who did you go with?Student 1:I went there with my family.Teacher:Did you buy anything special?Student 1:No,I didn't.……环节说明:通过本环节的师生对话,不仅复习了Where did you go on vacation?这一句型及答语,而且引出了本节课的重点——一般过去时态的一般疑问句及不定代词。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.听录音,在2a相对应的方框中写出Grace,Kevin和Julie度假的地方,集体核对答案。(3分钟)2.认真阅读2b中的句子,再听一遍录音,为每一个问题选择正确的答案Yes,I did或No,I didn't,完成后集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.听第三遍录音,学生跟读。(3分钟)4.让学生利用2b中的信息仿照2c的形式练习对话,并要求多组同学表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Grace,where did you go on vacation?B:I went to New York City.A:Oh,really?Did you go with anyone?B:Yes,I went with my mother.小结训练。(2分钟)(A)1.I hope I can go ________ to have my holiday.A.somewhere excitingB.exciting somewhereC.anywhere excitingD.exciting anywhere(A)2.There are ________ new English words(单词) in this book.I can't read it.A.quite a few B.quite a littleC.few D.little(B)3.Did you see ________ in the classroom?A.someone B.anyoneC.no one D.some one(B)4.—Did Tom see anything special on the beach?—No,he saw ________.A.something B.nothingC.anything D.no one环节说明:通过听说读写训练让学生掌握了一般过去时态的一般疑问句及不定代词,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.让学生自读对话,回答下面的问题。(5分钟)(1)When was Helen on vacation?(2)Where did Helen go?(3)Is Huangguoshu Waterfall in Guizhou?(4)Did Rick do anything special last month?What did he do?2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.I ________ on vacation last month.A.did B.was C.were D.do(B)2.I am very busy these days,so I can't go ________ with you.A.somewhere B.anywhereC.everywhere3.好长时间不见了。Long__time__no__see.4.我们在那里照了很多照片。We__took__quite__a__few__photos__there.5.上个月你做了一些特殊的事情吗?Did__you__do__anything__special__last__month?环节说明:将对话问题化,既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。小结训练又对对话中的重要知识点进行了巩固加深。Step 4 问题探究1.anyone的用法(1)有谁去过山区吗?Did__anyone__go__to__the__mountains?(2)我不想告诉任何人这件事。I__don't__want__to__tell__anyone__about__the__thing.(3)任何人可以做这件事。Anyone__can__do__the__thing.(4)你见过有趣的人吗?Did__you__meet__anyone__interesting?anyone表示“某人”时,常用于否定句和疑问句,意为“什么人,谁”;表示“任何人”,可用于肯定句。被形容词修饰时,形容词应置于其后。2.anywhere的用法(1)我在什么地方都不能找到它。I__can't__find__it__anywhere.(2)昨晚你去什么地方了吗?Did__you__go__anywhere__last__night?(3)你去过有趣的地方吗?Did__you__go__anywhere__interesting?(4)随便坐。Sit__anywhere.anywhere表示“某地”时,用于否定句和疑问句中,意为“在(往)什么地方,在(往)任何地方”;被形容词修饰时,形容词应置于其后;意为“在任何地方”时,用于肯定句中。3.few的用法(1)他在这里几乎没有朋友。He__has__few__friends__here.(2)篮子里有几个鸡蛋。There__are__a__few__eggs__in__the__basket.few用来修饰可数名词的复数,表示否(肯或否)定意思,“没有,几乎没有”;常用词组为a few,表示肯定意思,意为“有几个”。与few和a few相对应的是little和a little,用来修饰不可数名词,little表示否定意思,意为“没有,几乎没有”。a little表示肯定意思,意为“有一点儿”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:something,nothing,everyone,myself,yourself,hen,pig,seem,bored,someone,diary2.重点短语:of course,in the countryside,keep a diary3.重点句式:No one was here.Everyone was on vacation.I bought something for my father.I bought nothing.Everything tasted really good!Did everyone have a good time?The only problem was that there was nothing much to do in the evening but read.1.一般过去时态的用法2.不定代词的用法不定代词的用法一、预习课本P3新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.某物__something__2.没有什么__nothing__3.你自己__yourself__4.母鸡__hen__5.猪__pig__6.好像__seem__7.郁闷的__bored__8.某人__someone__9.日记__diary__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.为某人买某物buy__sb__sth=buy__sth__for__sb2.喂母鸡feed__some__hens3.去一个朋友的农场go__to__a__friend's__farm4.唯一的问题the__only__problem5.记日记keep__a__diary6.似乎感到疲劳seem__to__be__tired7.读一些有趣的东西read__something__interesting8.这是我第一次在这儿。It__was__my__first__time__here.9.在晚上除了读书没有事情可做。There__was__nothing__to__do__in__the__evening__but__read.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Now,please listen to me carefully and answer my questions.I went to Qingdao last vacation.I went there with my family.It was my first time to go there,so everything was really interesting.And I bought something for my friends,but I didn't buy anything for myself.(1)Where did I go last vacation?(2)Did I go there with anyone?(3)Did I buy anything for myself?环节说明:本环节既练习了学生的听力又复习了所学的知识。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a对话,从方框中选择合适的不定代词补全对话,完成集体核对答案,然后两人一组练习对话,并让几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)2.认真阅读3b的电子邮件,用方框中的不定代词来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案。然后让学生大声朗读短文。(5分钟)3.以小组为单位,询问小组其他成员3c中的问题,然后根据调查结果向其他同学汇报结果。参考案例In our group,everyone ate something at a restaurant.And everyone read something interesting.Tim and Mary visited someone in their family.Everyone bought something.And no one kept a diary.小结训练。(4分钟)(C)1.—Who teaches ________ music?—No body,I teach ________.A.your;mine B.your;myselfC.you;myself D.you;me(B)2.Suzhou is a beautiful city,There are many people here ________ vacation every year.A.to B.on C.for D.in(D)3.I never feel ________ when I stay with him because he is such a ________ man.A.boring;bored B.boring;funnyC.bored;boring D.bored;funny(C)4.My father seems ________ busy today,so I must help him.A.be B.to C.to be D.being(A)5.—Can I help you,boy?—Yes,There is ________ wrong with my bike.A.something B.anythingC.everything D.nothing(A)6.—Would you like ________ to eat?—Thanks,please.A.something B.anythingC.some things D.any things(D)7.On weekends,I have nothing to do but ________ TV.A.watches B.to watchC.watching D.watch环节说明:通过本环节的学习,让学生掌握了不定代词的用法,同时小结训练更是加深了对重要知识点的巩固深化。Step 4 问题探究1.由some,any,no,every构成的不定代词的用法(1)有人认识他。Someone__knows__him.(2)有什么有趣的事吗?Is__there__anything__interesting?(3)你能给我一些吃的东西吗?Can__you__give__me__something__to__eat?(4)今天的报纸上没有什么新内容。There__is__nothing__new__on__today's__newspaper.复合不定代词做主语时都看做单数,其谓语动词用单数形式;复合不定代词被定语所修饰时,定语必须放在它们的后面,由some构成的合成代词一般用于肯定句,由any构成的合成代词一般用于否定句和疑问句。如果要在疑问句中表示请求、建议等肯定的意思或者盼望得到肯定的答复,须用somebody,someone或something。2.seem的用法(1)一切似乎很容易。Everything__seems__easy.(2)这道数学题似乎很难。The__math__problem__seems__to__be__difficult.(3)似乎她很高兴。She__seems__to__be__very__happy.seem意为“看起来像……,似乎……,好像……”,经常用到的句型是:(1)seem+形容词;(2)seem+to do sth;(3)It seems that+句子。3.boring与bored的用法区别(1)这部电视剧很无聊。The__TV__play__is__very__boring.(2)我很无聊。I__am__very__bored.bored和boring是动词bore的两个形容词。bored表示“感到厌烦的”,用来指人;boring表示“令人厌烦的”,指物。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Where__did__you__go__on__vacation?(你去哪度假了?)I went to New York City.Did__you__go__out__with__anyone?(你和某人一起出去的吗?)No.No__one(没有人) was here.Everyone(每一个人) was on vacation.Did__you__buy__anything__special?(你买了一些特殊的东西吗?)Yes,I bought something(某物) for my father.How__was__the__food?(食物怎么样呢?)Everything__tasted__really__good!(每一样东西品尝起来都很好。)Did__everyone__have__a__good__time?(每一个人都玩得很高兴吗?)Oh,yes.Everything__was__excellent.(噢,是的。每一样东西都很棒。)Section B(1a-1e)1.学习掌握有关评价事物的形容词2.能运用be+形容词来评价事物3.熟练地谈论表示过去发生的事件1.能运用be+形容词来评价事物2.熟练地谈论表示过去发生的事件1.能运用be+形容词来评价事物2.熟练地谈论表示过去发生的事件认真预习1a-1e,找出下列句型。丽莎对她的假期是怎么评价的?________________________________________________________________________Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Now let's have a dictation.I will give you the Chinese meanings,please write them in English.1.一本有趣的书2.这本书很有趣。3.这个女孩很漂亮。4.我弟弟很聪明。……Now please check the answers in groups.Then write some sentences like them.环节说明:由听写短语或句型过渡到自己写短语或句型,让学生尽可能多地写出学过的形容词,为学习形容词描述事物打下基础。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1.学生领读1a中的形容词,然后两人一组互相提问背诵单词。(3分钟)2.仔细观察1a图片,将图片和形容词匹配,集体核对答案。(2分钟)3.再认真地读1a中的单词,然后将这些单词分成两类,将表示积极意义的形容词写在左边的横线上,将表示消极意义的形容词写在右边的横线上,小组内核对答案,完成1b。(2分钟)4.让学生用这些形容词来写句子,写完后小组内相互交流。(3分钟)小结训练。(2分钟)1.I like Chinese food because it's delicious.2.My computer isn't cheap.It's expensive.3.The movie is very boring,I don't like it at all.4.He tells us something exciting.环节说明:通过本环节的学习让学生记住了这些形容词,用形容词造句更是让学生掌握了这类词的用法。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.认真阅读1c中的句子,带着问题听第一遍录音,将问题的答案写在横线上,集体核对答案。(3分钟)2.再认真听一遍录音,完成1d,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.听第三遍录音,并跟读,整体感知对话。(3分钟)4.利用1c、1d中的信息,用1e中的问题提示两人一组来练习对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:How was her vacation?B:It was very great.小结训练。(3分钟)(D)1.—________ were the cake?—They were very delicious.A.Why B.What C.Where D.How(D)2.He had a good time ________ in the river yesterday.A.swim B.swimingC.swims D.swimming(C)3.I am so bored for a long time.I hope to have ________ to do.A.exciting anything B.nothing excitingC.something interesting D.good something(B)4.When ________ your brother Jack ________ to school every morning?A.did;get B.does;getC.is;getting D.are;getting(A)5.Where did Kate ________ vacation?A.go on B.go inC.go to D.went onStep 4 问题探究( )1.What did they say ________ the Great Wall?A.about B.to C.on D.at答案选择A,say about发表对……的看法。( )2.Tomorrow is my mother's birthday.And I want to buy a gift ________ her.A.about B.to C.for D.with答案选择C,buy sth.for sb.=buy sb.sth.给某人买某物。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:activity,decide,try,bird,bicycle,building,trader,wonder,difference,top,wait,umbrella,wet,below,enough,hungry,as2.重点短语:arrive in,feel like,a lot of new buildings,in the past,over an hour ,because of,along the way,about an hour later,another two hours,the top of the hill3.重点句式:We decided to go to the beach near our hotel.I felt like I was a bird.I wonder what life was like here in the past.I really enjoyed walking around the town.What a difference a day makes!It started raining a little.And because of the bad weather,we couldn't see anything below.My father didn't bring enough money.That's not all.1.重点短语和句型2.会用一般过去时态叙述过去发生的事情1.重点短语和句型2.会用一般过去时态叙述过去发生的事情一、预习课本P5-6新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.活动__activity__ 2.决定__decide__3.尝试__try__ 4.鸟__bird__5.自行车__bicycle__ 6.建筑物__building__7.商人__trader__ 8.想知道__wonder__9.差别__difference__ 10.顶部__top__11.等待__wait__ 12.雨伞__umbrella__13.潮湿的__wet__14.在……下面__below__15.足够的__enough__ 16.饥饿__hungry__17.如同__as__二、认真预习2a-2e,找出下列短语和句型。1.到达arrive__in/at/get__to2.尝试滑翔伞运动try__paragliding3.感觉像feel__like4.许多旧建筑many__of__the__old__buildings5.因为because__of6.带足够的钱bring__enough__money7.忘了带雨伞forget__to__bring__an__umbrella8.又两个小时another__two__hours9.一个小时以后one__hour__later10.山顶the__top__of__the__hill11.我们决定去我们旅馆附近的海滩。We__decided__to__go__to__the__beach__near__our__hotel.12.我感觉我就像一只小鸟。I__felt__like__I__was__a__bird.13.我想知道过去的生活是什么样子的。I__wonder__what__life__was__like__here__in__the__past.14.我真的很喜欢围绕着小镇散步。I__really__enjoyed__walking__around__the__town.15.多么与众不同的一天呀!What__a__difference__a__day__makes!16.天开始下小雨。It__started__raining__a__little.17.因为糟糕的天气,我们看不到下面的任何东西。And__because__of__the__bad__weather,we__couldn't__see__anything__below.18.我爸爸没有带足够的钱。My__father__didn't__bring__enough__money.19.那还不是全部。That's__not__all.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone!Do you like travelling?Have you ever been to Malaysia?Do you know Penang Hill?Jane went to Malaysia with her family.They had a good time on the first day,but the next day is terrible for them.Do you want to know what happened to them?OK,let's read Jane's diary entries to see what happened to them on earth.环节说明:以Jane的旅游经历为话题,设置悬念,引起学生的好奇心,引出本节课的学习。Step 2 完成教材2a-2b的任务1.认真思考2a中的两个问题并在小组内讨论,发表自己的观点。比一比谁说得好。(3分钟)2.快速的阅读2b中Jane的日记,回答教材中所提出来的两个问题,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.认真朗读日记,了解日记内容,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)4.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(10分钟)5.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(D)1.I ________ you yesterday morning,but you ________ at home.A.call;aren't B.am calling;areC.called;were D.called;weren't(B)2.—Why were you late for the sports meeting?—________ the bad weather.A.Because B.Because ofC.In front of D.Before(A)3.The girl in purple is new here,so________ students know here.A.few B.a fewC.little D.a little(B)4.—What do you think of this math problem?—It's too easy.________ in our class can work it out.A.Someone B.AnyoneC.Anywhere D.No one(C)5.When I swim in the river,I ________ I'm a fish.A.look like B.sound likeC.feel like D.taste like环节说明:通过本环节的学习使学生不仅了解旅游日记的写法,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2c-2e的任务1.再次认真阅读日记,根据日记所记录的内容来完成2c表格,集体核对答案。(5分钟)2.根据Jane去马来西亚旅行的信息来完成2d中Anna和Jane的对话。完成后集体核对答案。然后两人一组练习对话,并邀请两组学生表演对话。(5分钟)3.认真阅读Jane再次去槟城山的旅行日记,用所给词的正确形式来补全日记,完成后集体核对答案。(5分钟)4.大声朗读2e日记,体会日记的写法及一般过去时态的用法。(3分钟)环节说明:这一环节的训练,有助于学生的阅读水平的提高,巩固所学的知识。小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.There are ten students,but we have only five books,so we still need ________ books.A.five another B.more fiveC.another five(B)2.We don't have ________ money for a taxi,so we have to walk home.A.some B.any C.few D.anything(C)3.Two hours ________,we got home.A.after B.late C.laterStep 4 问题探究1.decide的用法(1)你决定去买一些特殊的东西吗?Do__yo__decide__to__buy__anything__special?(2)我决定明天不去打篮球了。I__decide__not__to__play__basketball__tomorrow.decide意为“决定”,经常用到的句型:(1)决定做某事decide__to__do__sth.;(2)决定不做某事decide__not__to__do__sth.。它的名词是decision,常用句型为make__a__decision__to__do__sth.。2.try的用法(1)试一试have__a__try(2)为什么不试着骑车去学校呢?Why__not__try__riding__a__bike__to__school?(4)我要尽我最大的努力来帮助你。I__will__try__my__best__to__help__you.try意为“尝试,努力”,既可以作为动词,也可以作为名词。常用到的句型:(1)努力做某事try__to__do__sth.(2)尝试做某事try__doing__sth.(3)尽某人最大的努力做某事try__one's__best__to__do__sth.。3.feel like的用法(1)好像马上就要下雨了。It__feels__like__rain__soon.(2)我现在什么都不想吃。I__feel__like__eating__nothing__now.(3)我感觉我就像一只鸟。I__felt__like__I__was__a__bird.feel like+名词意为“觉得好像……”。fell like+doing意为“想做……”,其同义句为want__to__do和would__like__to__do。feel like+从句,意为“觉得好像是……”。4.because与because of的区别(1)我没有买是因为它太贵了。I__didn't__buy__it__because__it__was__too__expensive.(2)由于年龄关系他失去了工作。He__lost__his__job__because__of__his__age__.(3)他为你而来这里。He__comes__here__because__of__you.because和because of的意思都是“因为”,但是because是连词,其后接句子;because of是复合介词,其后接名词、动名词等。5.enough的用法(1)我有足够的时间来写作业。I__have__enough__time__to__do__homework.(2)我们有足够的苹果给每一个人。We__have__enough__apples__to__give__everyone.(3)这孩子到上学的年龄了。The__child__is__old__enough__to__go__to__school.enough用作形容词时,意思是“足够的”,通常用来修饰名词。既可以修饰可数名词也可修饰不可数名词,可放在该名词之前,也可放在该名词之后;但在enough用作副词时,意为“足够地,充分地,相当地”及“很”等意思,修饰形容词、副词或动词时,应放在这些词之后。6.another与more的区别我需要另外两本书。I__need__another__two__books.或I__need__two__more__books.another和more都表示“额外又……个”,常用到的结构为:another+数词+复数名词=数词+more+复数名词。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:duck,dislike2.重点短语:learn something important,in the shopping center,find out,go on,come up3.重点句式:How did you feel about the trip?Did you dislike anything?I didn't bring back anything from Malaysia.My classmates told me to keep going.So I went on.Everyone jumped up and down in excitement.It was so beautiful that we forgot about the last five hours.1.不定代词的用法2.用一般过去时态叙述过去发生的事情1.不定代词的用法2.用一般过去时态叙述过去发生的事情一、预习课本P7新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.鸭子__duck__2.不喜欢__dislike__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.在购物中心in__the__shopping__center2.在我们的学校旅行中on__our__school__trip3.带一个装有食物和水的包take__a__bag__with__some__food__and__water4.兴奋地跳起来jump__up__and__down__in__excitement5.升起来come__up6.你感觉这次旅行怎么样?How__did__you__feel__about__the__trip?__7.你不喜欢某些东西吗?Did__you__dislike__anything?__8.我没有从马来西亚带回来一些东西。I__didn't__bring__back__anything__from__Malaysia.__9.我的同学告诉我要坚持,所以我继续走下去。My__classmates__told__me__to__keep__going.__So__I__went__on.__10.每一个人都激动地跳了起来。Everyone__jumped__up__and__down__in__excitement.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Have you ever been to Beijing?There are many famous places,such as Tian'anmen Square,the Great Wall,Beijing Hutong and so on.Now please tell us something about your trip to visit the famous places in Beijing.环节说明:以旅行为话题,既复习了本单元所学的语言目标又锻炼了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.两人一组大声朗读3a的单词和短语,然后选择合适的单词或短语来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,并大声地朗读短文。(3分钟)2.两人一组互相提问3b中的问题,把自己的答案记下来,然后仿照第5页上Jane的日记来写自己的旅行日记,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,教师抽查点评短文 ,完成3c。(10分钟)参考案例 Tuesday,July 28thToday the weather was very sunny.I went to Qingdao with my family.I went to the beach.There were many people there.Some people swam in the sea,some lay on the beach to enjoy the sunshine.I found many beautiful shells on the beach with my sister.I liked them very much.I ate some sea food.I think it was awful.But my father said it was very delicious.We stayed there for a week.I was happy to stay here.3.假如你和你的搭档是在中国度假的外国人,你们在机场相见,然后用我们学过的句型互相询问对方在中国的度假情况。(3分钟)环节说明:通过这个教学环节让学生复习了日记的写法,完成了本单元的写作,提高了学生的写作水平。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.请同学们认真阅读1中的对话,然后从左边方框中选择合适的不定代词来补全对话。完成后小组核对答案,然后两人一组练习对话。(5分钟)2.认真阅读2中的短文,用所给词的正确形式来完成短文,然后集体核对答案,学生大声地朗读短文,弄懂每一句话的意思。(5分钟)3.教师点拨短文中的知识要点。(3分钟)环节说明:这一环节通过训练,让学生对本单元的语法——不定代词和一般过去时态有了更深刻的理解。小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.You are ________ now,Bill.So you should wash your clothes by yourself.A.young enough B.enough oldC.old enough D.enough young(C)2.Now most families have only one child ________ our country's one child policy(计划生育政策).A.so B becauseC.because of D.so that(D)3.Did you decide ________ a bicycle to school?A.by B.ridingC.to by D.to ride4.The students stood up and clapped in excitement(excited).Step 4 问题探究1.look for,find和find out的区别(1)他在找他的鞋子。He__is__looking__for__his__shoes.(2)他没找到他的自行车。He__didn't__find__his__bike.(3)读这篇短文,找出这个问题的答案。Read__this__passage,and__find__out__the__answer__to__the__question.look for,find和find out都含有“寻找、找到”的意思,但其含义和用法却不同。look for意为“寻找”,是有目的地找,强调“寻找”这一动作。find意为“找到,发现”,通常指找到或发现具体的东西,也可指偶然发现某物或某种情况,强调的是找的结果。find out意为“找出,发现,查明”,多指通过调查、询问、打听、研究之后“搞清楚、弄明白”,通常含有“经过困难曲折”的含义,指找出较难找到的、无形的、抽象的东西。2.so…that…的用法(1)天气如此晴朗以至于我想去游泳。It's__so__sunny__that__I__want__to__swim.(2)他跑得如此快以至于我不能追上他。He__runs__so__quickly__that__I__can't__catch__up__with__him.so+形容词或副词+that引导的肯定的结果状语从句,意思是“如此……以至于……”。so+形容词或副词+that引导的否定的结果状语从句,意思是“如此……以至于不能……”。当that引导的结果状语从句为肯定句时,so…that…可以与be…enough to do转换;当从句为否定句时,可以与too…to…或be not…enough to do转换。3.keep的用法(1)保暖keep__warm(2)保持教室的整洁keep__the__classroom__tidy(3)他整天都在不停地工作,因为他想准时完成工作。He__keeps__working__all__day,because__he__wants__to__finish__the__work__on__time.keep意为“保持”,经常用到的句型为:(1)保持某种状态keep+形容词;(2)使……保持某种(状态、位置或动作等)keep…+形容词;(3)继续干某事,表示不间断地持续干某事keep__doing。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 2How often do you exercise?1.重点单词:housework,hardly,ever2.重点短语:hardly ever,go shopping3.重点句式:—What do you do on weekends?—I usually watch TV.—Do you go shopping?—No,I never go shopping.能描述课余时间的活动安排能描述课余时间的活动安排一、预习课本P9新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.家务__housework__2.几乎不__hardly__3.从来__ever__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.多久一次how__often2.在周末on__weekends3.周末活动weekend__activities4.去看电影go__to__the__movies5.帮忙做家务help__with__housework6.几乎从不hardly__everStep 1 情景导入Teacher:I like Saturday and Sunday.Because I can do many things that I like.I always watch TV. I sometimes help with the housework.I often go shopping.I usually play with my friends.What do you usually do on weekends?Can you tell us what you do on weekends?Please say something to your partner about your weekends.环节说明:由自己的周末活动为导线让学生说出自己周末的活动,引出本课时的学习,同时也锻炼了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.认真观察1a图片中人物的活动,然后利用适当的短语来描述人物的活动,完成后小组内互相交流答案。(3分)2.邀请几组学生把所写的短语板书到黑板上,要求学生识记并互相提问所写的短语。(5分钟)3.两人一组互相练习1a图片中的对话,然后用黑板上的语言来替换练习对话并邀请几组学生表演对话。(3分钟)4.学生领读1b中的频率副词,教师纠正读音,然后互相背诵单词,为听力打好基础。(3分钟)5.认真听录音,把1a图片中的字母写在横线上,集体核对答案,完成1b。(3分钟)6.再听一遍录音,并跟读。(2分钟)7.仿照1c中的对话,利用1a图片中的人物活动与同伴练习新对话,并邀请几组学生来表演对话。(5分)8.通过对话练习,学生总结1b中频率副词的用法,教师点拨。(5分钟)参考案例A:What do you do on weekends?B:I usually watch TV.A:Do you go shopping?B:No,I never go shopping.小结训练。(5分钟)(D)1.—How often do you go skating?—________.I can't skate at all.A.Always B.SometimesC.Hardly D.Never(D)2.I ________ watch TV on weekends.I have too much homework to do.A.often B.sometimesC.always D.hardly ever(C)3.—What ________ you usually do on weekends?—I usually play ________ soccer.A.are;the B.will;aC.do;/ D.can;an(B)4.Tome ________ goes to the park with his parents.A.sometime B.sometimesC.some time D.some times环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.exercise的用法(1)我每天都锻炼。I__exercise__every__day.(2)我爸爸总是做运动。My__father__always__does__exercise.(3)我们每天都做早操。We__do__morning__exercises__every__day.exercise可以作动词,意为“锻炼”;也可以作名词,意为“运动,锻炼”时为不可数名词,意为“习题,体操”时为可数名词,常和动词do搭配使用,且作“体操”讲时多用复数形式。常用词组:take/do exercise做运动,do morning exercises做早操,do eye exercises做眼保健操。2.hardly的用法他非常的累,几乎不能走路了。He__is__very__tired,he__hardly__walks.hardly“几乎不”,是个否定副词,表示否定意义,通常位于实际动词之前,系动词、助动词、情态动词之后。特别提示:hardly不是hard添加后缀构成的副词。3.频率副词的用法常见的频率副词有always,usually,often,sometimes,hardly__ever,never与疑问词how often对应。表示的频率由always向never递减。在句中位于实意动词之前,情态动词(can等)、助动词(do等)、连系动词(be等)之后。但sometimes也可在句首。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:once,twice,Internet,program,full,swing2.重点短语:once a week,twice a week,three times a week,use the Internet,swing dance3.重点句式:—How often do you watch TV?—Twice a week.—What's your favorite program?—Animal world.Next week is quite full for me.What kind of dance are you learning?I have to play tennis with my friends.1.重点单词,词组及句型2.How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语一、预习课本P10新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.一次__once__ 2.两次__twice__3.因特网__Internet__ 4.节目__program__5.忙的__full__ 6.秋千__swing__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.一周二次twice__a__week2.使用互联网use__the__Internet3.上钢琴课have__piano__lessons4.有空be__free5.怎么会呢?How__come?6.和朋友们一起打网球play__tennis__with__friends7.—你最喜欢的电视节目是什么?—动物世界。—What's__your__favorite__program?—Animal__world.8.对于我来说下周相当的忙。Next__week__is__quite__full__for__me.__9.你正在学什么种类的舞蹈?What__kind__of__dance__are__you__learning?10.我必须要和我的朋友去打网球。I__have__to__play__tennis__with__my__friends.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you like shopping?Student 1:Yes,I do.Teacher:How often do you go shopping?Student 1:I go shopping once a week.The student may not answer the question.The teacher may help answer the question.Then go on asking another student.……环节说明:通过师生互相问答,直接引出本节课要学习的语言目标,简洁明了。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.学生领读2a中的单词和短语,教师纠正读音。然后两人一组互相背诵提问单词或短语。(3分钟)2.认真听程涛做不同事情的频率的对话,把听到的活动按顺序排列,集体核对答案,完成2a。(3分钟)3.再听一遍录音,将他的活动和做这些活动的频率匹配。(3分钟)4.听第三遍录音,学生跟读。(3分钟)5.你多久做一次这些活动?根据自己的实际情况来完成2c表格,然后利用所填内容,两人一组仿照右边方框中的对话来编练新的对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:How often do you watch TV?B:I watch TV every day.A:What's your favorite program?B:Animal World.A:How often do you watch it?B:Twice a week.小结训练。(2分钟)(B)1.—________ do you visit your uncle?—Once a week,at least.A.How long B.How oftenC.How much D.How many(C)2.—What was the weather like?—It rained ________ and people could ________ go out.A.hardly;hard B.hard;hardC.hard;hardly D.hardly;hardly(A)3.—________ does your sister practice playing the piano?—She plays the piano every day.A.How often B.How longC.How many D.How far(D)4.—Do you know the famous player Kobe has said goodbye to NBA?—Yes,I'm afraid I will ________ see him on screen.A.sometimes B.oftenC.always D.seldom(C)5.—________ do you visit your grandfather?—Once a month.A.How many B.How soonC.How often D.How long环节说明:通过听说读写学习训练让学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,回答下面的问题:(1)判断正误,正确T,错误F;(2)回答问题;(3)英译汉。(5分钟)①Claire has piano lessons only on Wednesday.②What kind of dance is Claire learning?③How often does Claire have swing dance lessons?④How often do you have piano lessons?2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(3分钟)小结训练。(4分钟)(A)1.—________ do you go to the movies?—Twice a month.A.How often B.How soonC.How long D.How far(A)2.Ten days ________ too long for me.I don't want to wait for so long.A.is B.are C.was D.were(B)3.They are all ________,so they have no time to watch TV.A.free B.fullC.excited D.relaxing4.My parents often go to the movies with me twice a week.(two)5.Tom often goes shopping(shop) with his mother.6.How many times does your sister read the book?(time)环节说明:将对话以任务型阅读的形式呈现,既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解,而且还能让学生提早感受中考题型。Step 4 问题探究1.How often与How many times的用法区别(1)你多久上一次钢琴课?How__often__do__you__have__a__piano__lesson?(2)你一周上几次钢琴课?How__many__times__do__you__have__piano__lessons?How__often+助动词do(does或did)+主语+do sth.?是对频率(多久一次)进行提问。疑问词how often(在这里助动词do,does或did是起疑问的作用)与一般现在时或一般过去时连用,回答一般是用表示频率的副词always,usually,often,sometimes,never等或者是“次数+一段时间”,如once/twice a month,three times a month,three or four times a month等。也可以用every day,every year,every week等短语来回答。How__many__times对次数进行提问,其答语为once,twice,three times等表示次数的单词或短语。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:maybe,least2.重点短语:at least3.重点句式:—How often does he play soccer?—He plays at least twice a week.—How often do you go to the movies?—I go to the movies maybe once a month.1.频率副词的用法2.How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语3.一般现在时态1.频率副词的用法2.How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语一、预习课本P11新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.也许__maybe__ 2.最少__least__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.熬夜stay__up__late2.吃健康的早餐eat__a__healthy__breakfast3.至少at__least4.做运动play__sports5.早睡go__to__bed__early6.—你多久去看一次电影?—我大概一个月看一次电影。 —How often do you go to the movies? —I go to the movies maybe once a month. Step 1 情景导入Teacher:How often do you watch TV?Student 1:I watch TV every day.Teacher:How often do you exercise?Student 2:I exercise twice a week.Teacher:How often does he exercise?Student 3:She exercises twice a week.Now please practice the conversations like this with your partner.环节说明:通过对话练习复习了所学的知识点——How often引导的特殊疑问句及答语。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(3分钟) 环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好的来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a中1-6的句子,选用do或does来补全句子,小组内核对答案。(2分钟)2.认真读3a中的句子,将1-6句的问题和a-f的答语匹配,完成后集体核对答案,然后两人一组大声地熟读这些句子。(3分钟)3.认真观察3b中给出的单词,并且用这些单词来组成完整的句子,然后结对练习对话。参考案例A:How often do you help with housework?B:I help with housework twice a week.4.为了提高你的英语,你能做些什么呢?在表格中添加你学习英语的方法,然后就这些问题在小组内向你的同学提问,找出学英语的最好方法。(3分钟)A:How often do you read English books?B:I read English books about twice a week.小结训练。(5分钟)(C)1.He studies ________.He ________ plays with his friends after school.A.hard;hard B.hardly;hardlyC.hard;hardly D.hardly;hard(C)2.—How often do you exercise?—________.A.A time a weekB.Two time a weekC.Three times a weekD.One times a week(D)3.She goes to the movies ________ a month.A.three and four timesB.three times and fourC.three or four timeD.three or four times4.usually,soccer,play,I(.)I__usually__play__soccer.5.often,Katrina,does,TV,watch,How(?)How__often__does__Katrina__watch__TV?6.do,you,What,usually,weekends,on,do(?)What__do__you__usually__do__on__weekends?环节说明:通过本环节的学习,让学生掌握了频率副词及How often的用法,同时小结训练更是加深了对重要知识点的巩固深化。Step 4 问题探究( )1.—Where is Mike?—________ he is in the classroom.A.may be B.maybeC.May D.Maybe答案选择D,maybe是副词,意思是“也许,可能”,在句中作状语,相当于perhaps,常位于句首。在may be中,may是情态动词,be是动词原形,两者构成完整的谓语形式,与主语形成系表结构,意为“也许是,可能是”。( )2.—How many children do they have?—I think they have ________ two children.A.at little B.at lessC.at last D.at least答案选择D,根据句意知道至少是两个孩子。at least意为“至少”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。What__do__you__usually__do__on__weekends?(你周末通常干什么?)I always(总是)exercise(锻炼).What do they do__on__weekends(在周末)?They__often__help__with__housework.(他们经常帮着做家务。)What does she do on weekends?She__sometimes__goes__shopping.(她有时去购物。)How__often__do__you__go__to__the__movies?(你多久看一次电影?)I__go__to__the__movies__maybe__once__a__month.(我大概一个月看一次电影。)Do__you__go__shopping?(你去购物吗?)No,I__never__go__shopping.(不,我从来不去购物。)Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:junk,coffee,health2.重点短语:junk food,drink coffee3.重点句式:My mother wants me to drink it.She says it is good for my health.How often do you eat junk food?How many hours do you sleep every night?How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语一、预习课本P12新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.无用的东西__junk__2.咖啡__coffee__3.健康__health__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列短语和句型。1.垃圾食品junk__food2.喝牛奶drink__milk3.对……有好处be__good__for4.有好的习惯have__good__habits5.你多久吃一次垃圾食品?How__often__do__you__eat__junk__food?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you like junk food?Student 1:Yes,I do.Teacher:How often do you eat it?Student 1:I eat it three times a week.Teacher:I think it's a bad eating habit to eat junk food.You should eat less.Teacher:Do you like junk food?student 2:Yes,I do.Teacher:How often do you drink it?student 2:Every day.Teacher:Great,it is good for your health.…环节说明:通过这个环节的师生互动问题,既复习了所学的知识,又让学生明白了要养成健康的饮食习惯。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词和短语,教师纠正读音,然后两人一组互相提问单词和短语。(5分钟)2.认真观察图片中的食物,将单词和食物匹配,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.小组内结对练习1b中的对话,然后仿照该形式用1a中的物品来编练新的对话,并邀请几组学生展示对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:How often do you drink milk? Liu Fang?B:I drink milk every day.A:Do you like it?B:No.But my mother wants me to drink it.She says it's good for my health.小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.—What ________ do you like best?—Football.A.food B.subjectC.sport D.music(A)2.Eating more fruit is good ________ our health.A.for B.atC.with D.to(C)3.My mother wants me ________ the whole day.A.study B.studyingC.to study D.studied(C)4.________ eye exercises ________ good for your eyes.A.Doing;are B.Do;isC.Doing;is D.Do;are(A)5.________ people are there in your family?A.How many B.How muchC.How often D.How long环节说明:对话练习,习题精练相结合,使学生熟练掌握了本环节的知识点。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.认真听关于饮食习惯的采访录音,圈出每个问题的答案。(3分钟)2.认真阅读1d中的6个句子,然后听录音,写出Tina和Bill关于这些问题的答案,集体核对答案完成1c。(3分钟)3.再听一遍录音,并跟读,整体感知对话。(3分钟)4.一人扮演记者,另外一人扮演Tina或Bill,根据1d的听力结果仿照1e的形式来练习对话。然后转换角色再练习,邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:How often do you exercise?B:I exercise every day.A:And how often do you…?……小结训练。(对画线部分提问)(1分钟)1.I hardly__ever drink milk for breakfast.How__often__do__you__drink__milk__for__breakfast?2.They sleep nine hours every night.How__many__hours__do__they__sleep__every__night?3.I went to Beijing twice last year.How__many__times__did__you__go__to__Beijing__last__year?4.He watches TV for__two__hours every day.How__long__does__he__watch__TV__every__day?Step 4 问题探究( )1.—________ apples do you need?—Three.A.How much B.How manyC.How long D.How often答案选择B,how many对可数名词的数量进行提问。由答语Three可知是对数量进行提问,又因为apple是可数名词的复数,因此答案选择B。( )2.My sister is six years old.My father wants ________.A.she to go to schoolB.her go to schoolC.her to go schoolD.her to go to school答案选择D,想要某人做某事的句型是:want sb.to do sth.,其中want是动词,后面要用人称代词的宾格;去上学go to school是固定词组。( )3.The old man likes walking after supper.It's good ________ his health.A.for B.of C.at D.with答案选择A,由句意可知是“对他的健康有好处”,be good for对……有益。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:percent,online,television,through,although,mind,body,such,together,die,writer2.重点短语:in their free time,one to three times,go online,three or four times a week,the answers to our questions,such as3.重点句式:Last month we asked our students about their free time activities.Fortyfive percent exercise four to six times a week.And twenty percent do not exercise at all.Although many students like to watch sports,game shows are the most popular.It's good to relax by using the Internet or watching game shows,but we think the best way to relax is through exercise.Old habits die hard.1.重点短语和句型2.会用表示频率的词组来描述做事情的频率1.重点短语和句型2.会用表示频率的词组来描述做事情的频率一、预习课本P13-14新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.百分之……__percent__2.在线的__online__3.电视节目__television__4.尽管__although__5.凭借__through__6.头脑__mind__7.身体__body__8.这样的__such__9.在一起__together__10.消失__die__11.作家__writer__二、认真预习2a-2e,找出下列短语和句型。1.去乡下野营go__camping__in__the__country2.在他们的空闲时间in__their__free__time3.互联网的使用use__of__the__Internet4.百分之十五fifteen__percent5.一周四到六次four__to__six__times__a__week6.我们问题的答案the__answer__to__our__question7.例如such__as8.虽然许多学生喜欢看运动节目,但是游戏类节目是最受欢迎的。Although__many__students__like__to__watch__sports,game__shows__are__the__most__popular.9.通过上网或观看游戏类节目来放松是很好的,但是我们认为放松的最好的方式是通过锻炼。It's__good__to__relax__by__using__the__Internet__or__watching__game__shows,but__we__think__the__best__way__to__relax__is__through__exercise.10.身心健康be__healthy__for__the__mind__and__the__body11.旧习难改Old__habits__die__hard.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone!What do you do in your free time?(Let some students tell the other students about their activities)We did a survey about what No.5 High School students do in their free time.Do you want to know the result of the student activity survey?Now let's learn together.环节说明:由学生闲暇时间的活动延伸本节课的学习内容,自然过渡,顺理成章。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.大声的朗读2a中的短语,然后根据你认为学生做这些事情的频率的高低来对这些活动进行排序。(3分)2.认真阅读2b文章,然后完成14页上的圆形分格统计图表,完成后集体核对答案。(5分钟)3.再认真阅读一遍短文,然后回答2c中的5个问题,完成后让几位学生分别回答问题,教师点拨。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(A)1.—________ will you stay in Australia?—For two weeks.A.How long B.How soonC.How often D.How(A)2.He usually ________ newspapers in the morning.A.reads B.seesC.watches D.looks(D)3.His father left without ________ a word.A.say B.to sayC.said D.saying(C)4.My mother wants me ________ the whole day.A.study B.studyingC.to study D.studied(B)5.If you wants to be healthier,you must eat ________ junk food,I think.A.more B.lessC.fewer D.few(C)6.She often ________ TV in the morning.A.sees B.worksC.watches D.looks at(A)7.—Are you ________ tomorrow?—No,tomorrow is quite full for me.A.free B.fullC.busy D.tired环节说明:通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.再次认真阅读短文,根据短文内容和圆形分格统计图表用百分比和频率副词always,usually或者sometimes仿照2d中例句的形式来写句子。完成后小组内核对答案,教师邀请几位学生到黑板上书写答案。(5分钟)2.以小组为单位,每人轮流从2e左边方框中选择其中的一项课余活动,利用How often do you…句型向小组内其他成员提问,把询问的结果制成圆形分格统计图表展示给全班同学。(5分钟)Step 4 问题探究1.surprised的用法(1)我们对这个消息感到很意外。We__are__surprised__at__the__news.(2)我在这里见到你很意外。I__am__very__surprised__to__meet__you__here.surprised意为“惊奇的,意外的”,是形容词,经常用到的句型为:be__surprised__at…(对……感到惊奇),后面可以跟somebody,something或doing something;be__surprised__to__do__sth.(做某事感到惊讶);还有句型be surprised that+从句。( )2.China has many big cities,________ Beijing,Shanghai,Shenzhen and so on.A.such for B.asC.such as D.less than答案选择C,such as常用来列举同类人或物中的几个例子,不能穷尽,可与and so on连用。( )3.It's boring to watch TV.I don't like it ________.A.at least B.at mostC.at all D.at last答案选择C,根据句意可知看电视很无聊,我一点都不喜欢它。not…at all意为“根本不,一点也不”。( )4.Do you know the answer ________ the question?A.of B.at C.for D.to答案选择D,这是个固定用语,“回答”与“问题”是对应关系,要用介词to。( )5.I like listening to the music,but I can not spend much time ________ it.A.at B.in C.on D.to答案选择C,spend意为“花费”,其考查句型为:spend some time on sth./in doing sth.某人花费时间在某事上(做某事)。( )6.The old man makes a living by ________ vegetables.A.sells B.sellC.to sell D.selling答案选择D,by意为“通过……”,是介词,其后要跟动名词。( )7.The best way ________ English is using it.A.learn B.to learnC.learning D.learns答案选择B,the best way to do sth.做某事最好的方法,动词不定式作后置定语。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:dentist,magazine,however,than,almost,less,point2.重点短语:a 16yearold high school student,more than two hours a day,less than3.重点句式:She never goes to the dentist for teeth cleaning.Don't worry.1.How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及用频率副词作答2.能用频率副词和表示频率的词组来表述自己的习惯能用频率副词和表示频率的词组来表述自己的习惯一、预习课本P15-16新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.牙医__dentist__ 2.杂志__magazine__3.然而__however__ 4.比__than__5.几乎__almost__ 6.较少__less__7.得分__point__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.去看牙医go__to__the__dentist2.一个16岁的高中生a__16yearold__high__school__student3.有许多好的习惯have__a__lot__of__good__habits4.一天两个多小时more__than__two__hours__a__day5.她从来不去看牙医清洗牙齿She__never__goes__to__the__dentist__for__teeth__cleaningStep 1 情景导入Teacher:We all have some habits.Some of them are good,but some of them are bad habits.The good habits can help us to be healthy and get more what we want to get.But the bad habits are bad for us.We should keep away from the bad habits.But do you know what good and bad habits Jane has?Let's begin our new class to find out the answers.环节说明:以习惯为话题引出了本节课要学习的内容,过渡自然,导入与课文内容衔接紧密。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.两人一组互相大声朗读3a表格中的词组,然后根据表格中的数字信息用表示频率的单词或词组来完成报告,完成后集体核对答案,并大声的朗读报告。(3分钟)2.用自己的信息来完成3b的表格,在最后一栏中用always,every day,twice a week和never等词来填写,完成后小组内互相交流。(3分钟)3.写一篇关于你自己的好习惯和坏习惯的报告,说明你自己多久做一次这些事情,可以参考3a的报告,写完后小组内互相交流纠错,教师抽查点评。完成3c。(10分钟)参考案例Hello,everyone.I am Tony.I have a lot of good habits.I always exercise and I read books for one hour every day.I usually help my mother with the housework and clean my room by myself.I eat fruit and vegetables every day.I hardly ever stay up late and get up too late.But I also have some bad habits.I like playing computer games.I play them for two hours a day.I like eating hamburgers,too.I eat hamburgers three to five times a week.It's bad for my health.But I can't get rid of it.4.以小组为单位,做健康小测试。根据自己的实际情况来选择问题的答案,选择完毕后,对照结果算出自己的得分,由此判断自己是否健康,然后将自己的结果和组内其他成员比较,比一比谁更健康。(3分)环节说明:通过这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力,同时也使学生对自己的日常习惯有了正常的认识。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.让学生根据自己和父(母)亲日常活动频率的高低来完成1的表格。然后根据自己所填的内容来写5句话,写完后小组内互相交流纠错,并请几位学生读出自己写的句子。(5分钟)2.认真阅读2中的对话,然后用本单元所学的知识来补全对话,完成后核对答案,学生大声地朗读对话。(5分钟)环节说明:这一环节训练,让学生对本单元的频率副词有了更深刻的理解。Step 4 问题探究( )1.My sister always goes to work on time and she is ________ late.A.sometimes B.usuallyC.hardly ever D.ever答案选择C,本题考查频率副词的运用,句首已经指明“我姐姐总是按时上班”,因此需选hardly ever相承接,其他频率副词与always相矛盾。( )2.—________does Amy go to the music club?—Three or four times a month.A.How many times B.How oftenC.How long D.How soon答案选择B,根据答语可以看出提问的是频率,而How often对频率进行提问,其它都不是对频率提问。( )3.The teacher is very kind to the students.He is ________ a father.A.likes B.like C.liking答案选择B,由句意可知“他像一位父亲”,be+like像……一样,like在此为介词。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 3I'm more outgoing than my sister.1.重点单词:outgoing,better,loudly,quietly2.重点句式:Sam has longer hair than Tom.Sam and Tom can play the drums,but Sam plays them better than Tom.That's Tara,isn't it?Tina is taller than Tara.And she also sings more loudly than Tara.1.形容词比较级的构成及用法2.能用比较级的基本句型来比较两人之间的不同1.形容词比较级的构成及用法2.能用比较级的基本句型来比较两人之间的不同一、预习课本P17新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.外向__outgoing__ 2.较好的__better__3.大声地__loudly__ 4.轻声的__quietly__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列句型。1.更加外向more__outgoing2.长/短发long/short__hair3.更大声more__loudly4.萨姆的头发比汤姆的头发长。Sam__has__longer__hair__than__Tom./Sam's__hair__is__longer__than__Tom's.5.我比我的妹妹更外向I'm__more__outgoing__than__my__sister.Step 1 情景导入Teacher shows some pictures of famous people,then compare the persons with Comparative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.环节说明:通过比较直接引入本节课的学习重点——形容词和副词的比较级。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词或词组,学生识记单词并用这些单词来写几个描写人物的句子,完成后小组内互相交流。(3分钟)2.大声朗读图片中的小对话,找出含有比较级的句子,通过例句小组讨论比较级的句子的构成及用法,然后根据教师所给例子总结形容词和副词比较级的变化规则,教师点拨。然后让学生把写的句子改写成比较级的句子。(3分钟)3.认真观察课本1a中的图片,然后听录音,把1a图片中的几对双胞胎按听到的顺序排序,完成课本上1b的听力任务。(3分钟)4.结对练习1a图片中的对话,然后根据其他双胞胎的情况来编练新的对话,并请几组同学表演出他们的对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:That's Tara,isn't it?B:No,it isn't.It's Tina.Tina is taller than Tara.And she also sings more loudly than Tara.小结训练。(3分钟)写出下列单词的比较级。high higher hungry hungrierthirsty thirstier beautiful more__beautifulbig bigger hot hotterthin thinner late laterwet wetter funny funnierlittle less good/well better用所给词的适当形式填空。My father has shorter(short) hair than my mother.My mother has longer(long) hair than my father.But my father is heavier(heavy) than my mother and more__outgoing(outgoing) than her.环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.形容词和副词比较级的构成(1)hard harder great greater(2)late later nice nicer(3)big bigger fat fatter(4)easy easier happy happier(5)beautiful more__beautifulinteresting more__interesting(6)good better many more一般情况在词尾直接加er;以字母e结尾的只加r;重读闭音节词尾只有一个辅音字母时,先双写该辅音字母,再加er;以辅音字母+y结尾的先变y为i再加er;在多音节和部分双音节词的词前加more(更多)或less(较少);此外还有一些不规则变化的单词,需要我们特殊背诵。2.比较级的用法(1)我比Lily瘦。I'm__thinner__than__Lily.(2)我跑得比Tom快。I__run__faster__than__Tom.当两种物体之间相互比较时我们要用形容词或副词的比较级,“A+be+形容词比较级+than+B”意为“A比B更……”。( )3.Lily is a good student,________ she?A.is B.doesn't C.isn't D.does答案选择C,本题考查反义疑问句,本题前面部分是肯定陈述句,所以后面要用否定简略疑问,并且前面是be动词,前后要保持一致,因此选择C。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:hardworking,competition,fantastic,which,clearly,win2.重点短语:run fast,jump high,work hard,the singing competition3.重点句式:Tara works as hard as Tina.—Which one was Lisa?—The one with shorter hair,I think she sang more clearly than Nelly.Everyone wants to win.But the most important thing is to learn something new and have fun.1.熟悉形容词和副词比较级的规则变法及用法2.“as…as”用于比较的使用方法,灵活交叉使用“as…as”等词及比较级来进行比较1.熟悉形容词和副词比较级的规则变法及用法2.“as…as”用于比较的使用方法,灵活交叉使用“as…as”等词及比较级来进行比较一、预习课本P18新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.工作努力的__hardworking__2.比赛__competition__3.极好的__fantastic__4.哪一个__which__5.清楚的__clearly__6.获胜__win__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.努力学习work__hard2.早起get__up__early3.歌唱比赛the__sing__competition4.学一些新的东西learn__something__new5.蒂娜和塔拉工作一样努力。Tina__works__as__hard__as__Tara.6.短头发的那个女孩是他的妹妹。The__girl__with__short__hair__is__his__sister.7.每一个人都想获胜,但是最重要的事情是学到一些新东西而且找到乐趣。Everyone__wants__to__win.__But__the__most__important__thing__is__to__learn__something__new__and__have__fun.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Good morning,everyone.I have a friend.We have the same age.But I have longer hair than him.He is taller than me.I am thinner than him,he is more outgoing than me.Do you know what I said?Now please say something about you friend like this to your partner.环节说明:通过生生互助既复习了上节课的内容,又锻炼了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.大声地朗读2a中的单词,然后在练习本上写出这些单词的比较级。(3分钟)2.听录音,核对你写的比较级的答案并大声朗读,然后将单词写在相对应的方框中。(3分钟)3.听第二遍录音,找出Tina和Tara的不同点,写在横线上。(5分钟)4.听第三遍录音,跟读并从整体上感知对话内容。(3分钟)5.两人结对练习2c对话,一人看18页2c右面的表格,另外一名学生看81页上的表格,两人仿照2c的形式来练习对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Is Tom smarter than Sam?B:No,he isn't.Sam is smarter than Tom.小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.My schoolbag is more beautiful than ________.A.your B.here C.his D.their(A)2.I think my sister is as ________ as Tina.A.popular B.more popularC.most popular D.the most popular(B)3.Tom sings well,________?A.does he B.doesn't heC.is he D.isn't he(C)4.Jack is much ________ than his brother.A.fun B.funningC.funnier D.funniest(D)5.—________ girl is your little sister?—The taller girl.She is very lovely.A.What B.Who C.Whose D.Which环节说明:通过听、说训练让学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,根据对话内容完成下列句子。(5分钟)(1)There was a singing__competition yesterday.(2)Julie thinks Lisa sang better than Nelly.(3)Anna thinks Nelly danced__better than Lisa.(4)The girl with__shorter__hair is Lisa.2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(D)1.I went to school on foot,________ it rained hard yesterday morning.A.but B.andC.because D.though(C)2.—What do you think of your English lessons?—They are very ________.I like them very much.A.boring B.difficultC.fantastic D.terrible(B)3.—Which subject do you like ________,math or Chinese?—Chinese.A.well B.betterC.best D.the best(D)4.Tom draws ________ better than his brother.A.more B.mostC.many D.much(C)5.He ________ the first prize in the singing competition.A.win B.beatC.won D.wins环节说明:将对话转化成填空题,这样能对所学的比较级起到复习巩固的作用。Step 4 问题探究1.as…as的用法(1)我和内莉一样高。I'm__as__tall__as__Nelly.(2)汤姆和萨姆跑得一样快。Tom__runs__as__fast__as__Sam.(3)莉莉不如露茜外向。Lily__is__less__outgoing__than__Lucy.as…as的含义为“和……一样”,用于形容词、副词的同级比较。两个as的词性和用法不一样,第一个as是副词,后面接形容词或副词的原级,第二个as多为连词。as…as的否定式为not as/so+adj./adv.+as,表示“不如……”,其中,第一个as可以用副词so替换,但第二个as则不能。2.win的用法(1)他是那个获胜者。He__is__the__winner.(2)他赢得了比赛。He__won__the__match.win意为“赢得、获胜”,充当win的宾语的是比赛、战争、奖品、金钱等名词,即match,war,prize,money等。( )3.The red bag is ________ than that blue one.A.much beautifulB.beautifulerC.a lot more beautifulD.beautiful答案选择C,本题中有than,因为可以判定要用形容词beautiful的比较级,又因为beautiful的比较级是加more来构成,所以排除A、B和D,C选项中的a lot是用来修饰比较级more beautiful的。除了a lot之外,much,a little,even,still等也可以修饰比较级,但是very,quite只能修饰原级。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点句式:Are you as friendly as your sister?Does Tara work as hard as Tina?—Who's more hardworking at school?—Tina thinks she works harder than me.—Who is smarter,your mother or your father?—I think my mother is smarter than my father.2.巩固练习形容词和副词的比较级1.复习本单元学过的单词和句型2.巩固练习形容词和副词的比较级1.复习本单元学过的单词和句型2.巩固练习形容词和副词的比较级认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列句型。1.你和你妹妹一样友好吗?Are__you__as__friendly__as__your__sister?2.Sam踢足球比Tom好。Sam__plays__football__better__than__Tom.3.Jack不如Tina跑得快。Jack__doesn't__run__as__fast__as__Tina.4.我现在比两年前更高了。I'm__taller__now__than__I__was__two__years__ago.5.在学校谁更勤奋?Who's__more__hardworking__at__school?6.你学习英语更努力吗?Do__you__study__English__harder?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to compare two things with Comparative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.Today we will go on learning it.环节说明:开门见山地提出本节课的学习目标——形容词和副词的比较级。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(3分钟)环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a例句,然后仿照其形式来完成剩余句子,完成后小组内核对答案,并大声地朗读句子,注意体会as…as的用法。(3分钟)2.对比现在的自己和两年前的自己,然后根据问题提示写出自己现在和两年前的不同,完成后小组内互相交流,熟练掌握比较级的用法。(3分钟)3.对比自己的父亲,完成3c表格内容,然后用who is…,your mother or your father?来询问你搭档父母的情况。A:Who is more outgoing,your mother or your father?B:I think my mother is more outgoing than my father.小结训练。(2分钟)(B)1.Bob never does his homework ________Mary.He makes lots of mistakes.A.so careful as B.as carefully asC.carefully as D.as careful as(C)2.Tina sings ________ than Tara.A.loud B.loudlyC.more loudly D.more loud(A)3.Which one is ________,soccer or basketball?A.more popular B.popularC.much popular D.most popular(A)4.—Is that Tina?—No,________ isn't.Tina is much ________.A.it;taller B.she;tallerC.it;tall D.she;tall(A)5.He works as ________ as his father.A.hard B.harderC.hardly D.more hard环节说明:通过本环节的学习,让学生更熟练地掌握了比较级的用法,小结训练更是加深了对重要知识点的巩固深化。Step 4 问题探究( )Which do you like ________,apple or bananas?A.good B.well C.better D.best答案选择C,在含有or的选择疑问句中,如果有两者供选择,前面的形容词要用比较级形式。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Is Tom smarter(聪明) than Sam?No,he__isn't.Sam is smarter than Tom.Is Tara more__outgoing(外向) than Tina?No,she isn't.Tina__is__more__outgoing__than__Tara.(蒂娜比塔拉外向。)Are you as friendly(友好) as your sister?No,I'm not.I'm friendlier(友好) than her.Does__Tara__work__as__hard__as__Tina?(塔拉工作和蒂娜一样努力吗?)Yes,she__does.Who's__more__hardworking__at__school?(谁在学校学习比较努力?)Tina__thinks__she__works__harder__than__me.(蒂娜认为她比我努力。)Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:talented,truly,care2.重点短语:care about3.重点句式:A good friend is talented in music.A good friend likes to do the same things as me.A good friend truly cares about me.A good friend makes me laugh.A good friend is good at sports.They are both tall.1.识记描述好朋友的词语2.学会使用比较级作比较1.如何描绘最好的朋友2.学会使用比较级作比较一、预习课本P20新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.有才能的__talented__2.真正__truly__3.关心__care__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列短语和句型。1.有酷的衣服have__cool__clothes2.在……有天赋be__talented__in3.和某人做同样的事情do__the__same__things__as__me4.关心care__about5.一个好的听众a__good__listener6.让我大笑make__me__laughStep 1 情景导入Teacher:Friends are very important to us,they can make us feel happy.They can also help us when we are in trouble.Do you have friends?Students:Yes,we do.Teacher:Do you think what kind of things is important in a friend?Please tell us your ideas.Student 1:I think a good friend can help me.Student 2:A good friend is very friendly.……环节说明:通过这个环节让学生各抒己见对朋友的不同标准,引起学生用英语表达的欲望,引出本节课的学习目标——描述好朋友。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1.什么是友谊中最重要的因素?让学生大声的朗读1a中的句子,然后把这些句子按照重要性的主次来排列顺序。完成后小组内互相交流,并且识记这些句子。(5分钟)2.以小组为单位互相谈论发表自己的观点:好朋友应该是什么样子的?然后邀请几位学生来发表自己的观点,说说好朋友的标准。(5分钟)参考案例A:A good friend is good at schoolwork.B:I think a good friend is very popular in school.C:For me,a good friend can help me with my study.D:A friend can let me learn something useful from him.小结训练。(4分钟)(D)1.His joke made all of us ________.A.laughing B.to laughC.laughed D.laugh(A)2.I think listening is just as ________as speaking in language learning.A.important B.more importantC.more difficult D.more interesting(C)3.My friend likes to do ________ thing ________ me.A.same;as B.the same;toC.the same;as D.same;to(B)4.Though,my friend Ruth and I have some differences,I don't ________ about them.A.like B.careC.believe D.know(B)5.Jack is ________ popular than his brother in our school.A.much B.moreC.many D.little(B)6.Are you better at ________ than your sister?A.play basketball B.playing basketballC.to play basketball D.plays basketball环节说明:学生通过这个环节的学习知道了好朋友是什么样子的,同时小结训练对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.Molly和Mary在哪些方面喜欢他们的好朋友呢?认真听录音,完成1c表格的第一栏,集体核对答案。(3分钟) 2.再听一遍录音,写出Molly和Mary在哪些方面和她们的好朋友是相同的,哪些方面是不同的,完成1c中表格中剩余的栏目,集体核对答案,完成1d。(5分钟)3.再听一遍录音,并跟读,整体感知对话。(3分钟)4.根据1c表格中听力信息内容,来谈论一下Molly和Mary以及她们朋友的情况。(5分钟)参考案例A:Molly studies harder than her best friend.B.Well,Mary and her best friend are both tall.…小结训练。(5分钟)1.我知道我的朋友真心地关心我。I know my__friend__really__cares__about__me.2.你必须要和我一样的衣服。You__must__have__the__same__clothes__as__me.3.他的话使我们很高兴。What he said makes__us__happy.4.这个男孩在舞蹈上有天赋。The boy is talented__in__dancing.5.我擅长游泳。I am__good__at__swimming.Step 4 问题探究make的用法(1)我无法使这匹马走动。I__can't__make__the__horse__walk.(2)他常常使我感到快乐。He__often__makes__me__feel__happy.make“使,促使”,在此是使役动词。当它作“使,让”讲时,常见结构是:(1)make+人(宾语)+动词原形(宾补);(2)make+宾语+形容词(宾补)。make构成的常用短语有:make faces做鬼脸;make mistakes犯错误;make friends with sb.和某人交朋友;make the bed整理床铺;make money赚钱;make a living谋生;make a telephone打电话;make up one's mind下决心。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:serious,mirror,kid,necessary,both,though,grade,should,saying,reach,hand,touch,heart,fat,break,arm,laugh,share,loud,similar2.重点短语:as long as,be different from,bring out,the same as,in fact,be similar to3.重点句式:That's why I like reading books and studying harder in class.It's not easy for me to make friends.Friends are like books—you don't need a lot of them as long as they are good.My best friend helps me bring out the best in me.Larry is much less hardworking.I don't really care if my friends are the same as me or different.A true friend reaches for your hand and touches your heart.My best friend is similar to Larry.1.重点短语和句型2.会运用比较级来描述朋友1.重点短语和句型2.会运用比较级来描述朋友一、预习课本P21-22新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.严肃的__serious__ 2.镜子__mirror__3.小孩__kid__ 4.必需的__necessary__5.两个都__both__ 6.然而__though__7.应该__should__ 8.成绩等级__grade__9.谚语__saying__ 10.伸手__reach__11.感动__touch__ 12.心脏__heart__13.现实__fact__ 14.损坏__break__15.手臂__arm__ 16.发笑__laugh__17.分享__share__ 18.响亮的__loud__19.相像的__similar__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.像一面镜子like__a__mirror2.那是……的原因That's__why……3.只要,既然as__long__as4.和……相同,与……一致be__the__same__as5.和……不同be__different__from6.使显现bring__out7.取得更好的成绩get__better__grades8.事实上in__fact9.对于我来说交朋友是不容易的。It's__not__easy__for__me__to__make__friends.10.朋友就像是书,你不需要有很多,只要他们是好的。Friends__are__like__books——you__don't__need__a__lot__of__them__as__long__as__they're__good.11.Larry帮助我展现出最好的一面。Larry__helps__to__bring__out__the__best__in__me.12.我真的不介意我的朋友和我相同还是不同。I__don't__really__care__if__my__friends__are__the__same__as__me__or__different.__13.一个真正的朋友是向你伸出手,触动你心灵的人。A__true__friend__reaches__for__your__hand__and__touches__your__heart.14.我最好的朋友和拉里很像。My__best__friend__is__similar__to__Larry.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We all have some friends. Should friends be the same or different?What about your ideas?Please say out your ideas in your group.Maybe different people have different ideas.Let's read three passages to know the writers' ideas about friends.环节说明:各抒己见对朋友的不同见解,引出本节课的学习重点。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.大声地朗读2a中的单词,然后写出这些单词的比较级,写完后小组内核对答案。(3分钟)2.用所写的形容词的比较级来写五个关于自己或朋友的句子,要求几位同学到黑板上板演句子,写完后小组内互相交流,教师点拨所写句子。(3分钟)3.认真阅读2b文章,在朋友之间不同的句子下面画横线,圈出朋友之间相同的句子,完成后集体核对答案。(5分钟)4.再认真阅读一遍短文,根据文章内容判断2c中的5个句子的正误,完成后分别让几位学生回答问题,教师点拨。(5分钟)5.再次仔细阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)6.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)7.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(A)1.________ our football team failed in the match,we did our best.A.Though B.But C.Because D.As(B)2.I'm more outgoing than ________,and my hair is longer than ________.A.her;her B.her;hersC.hers;her D.hers;hers(D)3.The actress is already 50,but she looks ________ than she really is.A.young B.more youngC.more younger D.much younger(A)4.—The dish is delicious!—Well,at least it's ________ the one I cooked yesterday.A.as good as B.worse thanC.as well as D.as bad as(A)5.—Have you seen the funny movie Let the Bullet Fly?—Yes,it made me ________ many times.A.laugh B.cryC.sleep D.sing(A)6.That book is not so ________ as this one.A.interestingB.more interestingC.most interestingD.the most interesting(A)7.I don't care about the price,________ the car is in good condition.A.as long as B.bring outC.in fact D.be similar to(C)8.He said he was sixteen years old.________,he is eighteen years old.A.On time B.At timesC.In fact D.In time环节说明:通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.你和你的朋友跟文章中的人物相比是什么样的?仿照给出的例句写出5个句子,完成后小组内交流答案,教师邀请几位学生读出所写的句子。(5分钟)2.熟读2e中的4句关于朋友的谚语,看看哪句谚语是你最喜欢的,当你读这句谚语时你会想起哪位朋友,为什么?告诉你的搭档,之后邀请几位学生发表自己的观点。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节的学习,既复习了本节课的重点句型又熟练巩固了比较级;通过2e环节让学生掌握了关于朋友的谚语,又锻炼了学生的口语。Step 4 问题探究1.both的用法(1)那两件裙子都很漂亮。Both__of__the__skirts__are__beautiful.(2)两个答案都对。Both__answers__are__right.(3)吉姆和萨姆都是学生。Both__Jim__and__Sam__are__students.both在(1)句中作名词使用,意为“双方,两者,二人”;在(2)句中both还可以用作形容词,意为“两者的,双方的”;在(3)句中构成both…and…意为“不仅……而且……”,可连接两个并列的成分,若连接两个并列的主语,谓语动词用复数形式。both经常用在情态动词、助动词或系动词be之后,实义动词之前。注意:both…and…的否定式为neither…nor…;both的反义词是neither,意为“两者都不”。2.as long as的用法(1)这条河与那条河一样长。This__river__is__as__long__as__that__one.(2)只要不下雨,我们就可以去。We__can__go__as__long__as__it__doesn't__rain.as long as有两个意思,一是用于本义,意为“与……一样长(久)”,在否定句中,也可说成(not) so long as;二是用于引申义,表示“只要,以……为条件”,用于此意时也可说成so long as(不管是肯定句、否定句还是疑问句)。( )3.My sister has the same skirt ________ me.A.like B.as C.at D.for答案选择B,根据句意“我妹妹和我有一样的裙子”,the same as...与……一样。( )4.________ he is badly ill,________ he always keeps working as usual.A.Though;but B.But;/C.Though;/ D.But;though答案选择C,though意为“虽然,即使”,相当于although,该词与but不能同时出现在一个句子中。( )5.I am similar ________ my father.We both like reading books.A.to B.with C.at D.at答案选择A,词组be similar to和……相像。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:primary,information2.重点短语:primary school,a friend who is similar to me,a friend who is different from me3.重点句式:Who do you think should get the job,Jenny or Jill?1.比较级的用法2.用比较级来描写人物用比较级来描写人物一、预习课本P23-24新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.最初的__primary__ 2.消息__information__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.长的直发long__straight__hair2.小学primary__school3.善于与……相处be__good__with4.拨打……的电话call__sb__at…5.你认为谁能得到这份工作,Jenny还是Jill?Who__do__you__think__should__get__the__job,Jenny__or__Jill?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned Comparative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.Today we will learn how to describe a person with Comparative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.环节说明:开门见山提出本节课的学习重点——用形容词和副词的比较级来描述人物,完成本单元的写作训练。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真朗读3a表格中的内容,根据Wang Lingling和Liu Lili的信息来写一篇关于二人对比的短文。完成后小组内互相交流,教师抽查点评。(7分钟 )参考案例Wang Lingling's best friend is Liu Lili.They are both tall.But Wang Lingling has longer hair than Liu Lili.Wang Lingling likes reading,but Liu Lili likes sports.They are both very popular at school.Because both of them are very outgoing.Wang Lingling is more serious than Liu Lili.So she is more hardworking than Liu Lili.But Liu Lili is funnier than Wang Lingling and she is smarter than Wang Lingling.2.在3b短文中记录你两个朋友的信息,一个朋友是与你相像的,另外一个朋友是与你不同的。然后根据所记录的信息写两段话分别来描述你的朋友,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查点拨。(7分钟)参考案例I have a good friend.Her name is Mary.She is a friend who is similar to me.We both have long straight hair.I am as quiet as her.She likes reading books in her free time.Me,too.We often read books together.Both of us are good at English.I have another friend.Her name is Tara.She is a friend who is different from me.She is more outgoing than me.She always makes me laugh.She has shorter hair than me.She is also better at math than me.But I am better at English.We often help each other.They are both my good friends.Though they are different,I love them very much.3.大声朗读4中的工作招聘,然后仿照右面方框中的对话讨论一下你的两个同学谁更适合这项工作。(3分钟)环节说明:通过这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力和口语表达能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.读1中的单词或短语,然后根据两栏要求分类,完成后集体核对答案。(2分钟)2.认真阅读2中的句子,用所给词的正确形式填空,完成后核对答案,学生大声地熟读句子。(5分钟)3.用比较级写出你和你的朋友两方面的相似之处和不同之处,完成后小组内交流纠错,借鉴好词好句。(5分钟)环节说明:这一环节通过训练,让学生对本单元的比较级有了更深刻的理解。Step 4 问题探究( )1.Don't worry.Your grandma will get ________.A.well and well B.better and betterC.well and better D.good and well答案选择B,表示“越来越……”可以采用“比较级+比较级”或“more and more+原级”的结构,如果是单音节的形容词或副词,采用前一结构;如果是多音节的词,则要用后一结构,因此本题的正确答案选择B。( )2.The ________ we eat,the fatter we'll get.A.many B.more C.much D.less答案选择B,本句的意思是“我们吃得越多就会越胖”。句式The+比较级,the+比较级表“越……,就越……”,因此选择B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 4What's the best movie theater?1.重点单词:theater,comfortable,seat,screen,close,ticket2.重点短语:comfortable seats,big screen,close to home,buy tickets quickly,short waiting time3.重点句式:What's the best movie theater?It has the most comfortable seats.It has the best sound.It's the closest to home.1.形容词最高级的构成及用法2.能用最高级的基本句型来描述人物能用最高级的基本句型来描述人物一、预习课本P25新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.戏院__theater__ 2.舒适的__comfortable__3.座位__seat__ 4.银幕__screen__5.接近__close__ 6.入场券__ticket__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.舒适的座位__comfortable__seats__2.大的银幕__big__screen__3.紧挨着家__close__to__home__4.买票快__buy__tickets__quickly__5.等候的时间短__short__waiting__time__6.最好的影院是哪一家?__What's__the__best__movie__theater?__7.它有最舒适的座位。__It__has__the__most__comfortable__seats.__8.它有最好的音效。__It__has__the__best__sound.__9.它离家最近。__It's__the__closest__to__home.__Step 1 情景导入(Ask three students to stand up.)Teacher:Jim is tall.Sam is taller than Jim.Peter is taller than Sam.So Peter is the tallest of the three.(Write “Peter is the tallest of the three”on the blackboard and let the students repeat.)Then go on saying:Sam runs fast.Peter runs faster than Sam.Jim runs faster than Peter.So Jim runs fastest of the three.(Write “Jim runs fastest of the three”on the blackboard and let the students repeat.)(Point at the two sentences on the blackboard).Teacher:Tallest and fastest are Superlative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.Today we will learn it.环节说明:由形容词和副词的比较级引出最高级,过渡自然,易于学生理解。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读单词或词组并且互相背诵,然后写出单词或词组中形容词和副词的比较级。(3分钟)2.你怎么选择去哪家影院?以重要性与不重要性为标准,把1a中的单词短语分类。(2分钟)3.大声朗读1b中的句子,总结形容词和副词最高级的变化规则,教师点拨。然后让学生把1a中的形容词的最高级写出来。(5分钟)4.听录音,把对影院的叙述和电影院匹配起来,在后面的空格中写上影院的名称。(3分钟)5.再听一遍录音,集体核对答案。然后熟读1b中的句子。(5分钟)6.练习1c中的对话。然后根据你所熟悉的影院编写新对话;小组内做对话练习并进行组与组之间的比赛,教师点评。(5分钟)参考案例A:What's the best movie theater?B.Sun Cinema.It's the cheapest.A:But I think Moon Theater has the most comfortable seats.小结训练。(5分钟)写出下面单词的最高级。high highest hungry hungriestthirsty thirstiest beautiful most__beautifulthin thinnest late latestwet wettest funny funniestlittle lest good/well best(D)1.—Lily has two sisters,doesn't she?—Yes.She's taller and older than her two sisters,but she is not ________ one of the three.A.the tallest B.youngestC.shortest D.the cleverest(C)2.—Which month has ________ days in a year?—February.A.few B.littleC.the fewest D.the least(D)3.—Who does homework ________,Tom,Jack or Bill?—Bill.A.more carefullyB.more carefulC.the most carefulD.the most carefully(A)4.I think you need to be close ________ your classmates.It's good for you.A.to B.from C.with D.about环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使学生熟练掌握最高级。Step 3 问题探究1.形容词和副词最高级的构成(1)hard hardest great greatest(2)late latest nice nicest(3)big biggest fat fattest(4)easy easiest happy happiest(5)beautiful most__beautifulinteresting most__interesting(6)good best many most一般情况在词尾直接加est;以字母e结尾的只加st;重读闭音节词尾只有一个辅音字母时,先双写该辅音字母,再加est;以辅音字母+y结尾的先变y为i再加est;在多音节和部分双音节词的词前加most或least;此外还有一些不规则变化的单词,需要我们特殊背诵。2.最高级的用法(1)我是我们班最高的。I'm__the__tallest__in__our__class.(2)他是三个人中跳得最高的。He__jumps__highest__of__the__three__people.表示三者或三者以上的人或事物的比较,其中一个在某方面超过其他几个时,我们要用形容词或副词的最高级,在句子的后面可以用of(in)短语来表示比较的范围,形容词的最高级前面一般要加定冠词the。副词最高级前面的the可以省去。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:worst,cheaply,song,DJ,choose,carefully,reporter,fresh,comfortably2.重点短语:so far,no problem3.重点句式:You can buy clothes the most cheaply there.They play the most boring songs.The DJs choose songs the most carefully.Why do you think so?How do you like it so far?1.熟记形容词和副词最高级的规则变法及用法2.会用形容词和副词的最高级进行事物的比较1.熟记形容词和副词最高级的规则变法及用法2.会用形容词和副词的最高级进行事物的比较一、预习课本P26新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.最差的__worst__ 2.便宜地__cheaply__3.小心地__carefully__ 4.记者__reporter__5.新鲜的__fresh__ 6.舒服地__comfortably__7.歌曲__song__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.迄今为止__so__far__2.没有问题__no__problem__3.你可以以最便宜的价钱买下衣服。You__can__buy__clothes__the__most__cheaply__there.__4.他们播放最无聊的音乐。They__play__the__most__boring__songs.__5.主持人最谨慎地选择音乐。The__DJs__choose__songs__the__most__carefully.__6.你为什么这么认为?Why__do__you__think__so?__7.迄今为止你认为它怎么样呢?How__do__you__like__it__so__far?__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Good morning,everyone.I have two friends.They are Jim and Sam.We have the same age.But I have the longest hair.Sam is the tallest of us.Jim is the thinnest.Do you know what I said?Now please say something about your friends like this to your partner.环节说明:通过这个环节既复习了上节课学习的内容,又练习了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.阅读2a中的问题和选项,然后听录音,圈出男孩关于两个问题的答案,集体核对答案。(3分钟)2.大声地朗读2b中的句子,然后再听一遍录音,将商店或电台的名字写在相对应的句子前面,小组内核对答案,教师展示答案。(3分钟)3.再听一遍录音,并且跟读体会最高级的用法。(3分钟)4.一人扮演记者,另外一人扮演2a、2b中的男孩,根据听力答案信息,仿照2c形式来编练对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Hello!I am a reporter.Can I ask you some questions?B:Sure.A:What's the best clothes store in town?B:I think Miller's is the best.A:Why do you think so?B:Well,Miller's has…小结训练。(4分钟)1.The theater has the__biggest(big) screens in town.2.It's the__most__popular(popular) here.3.His home is the closest(close) to our school in our class.4.Which is the__best(good) radio station in town?5.You can buy clothes the__most__cheaply(cheap) there.6.It has the__worst(bad) service in town.环节说明:通过听、说和小结训练让学生掌握了最高级的用法,同时学生的口语表达能力在对话练习中得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生快速阅读对话,了解对话大意,回答问题:What's the name of the newest cinema in town?2.学生认真自读对话,根据对话内容完成下列句子。(5分钟)(1)Greg is __new__ in town.(2)Greg thinks the neighborhood is __fantastic__.(3)The best supermarket is __on__center__street__.(4)Greg thanks Helen for __telling__ him something about the neighborhood.3.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟) 4.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.Mobile phones are very popular now and they are ________ than before.A.cheap B.cheaperC.cheapest D.the cheapest(C)2.Who jumped ________ of all?A.far B.fartherC.farthest D.the most far(D)3.Whose sweater is ________ of all?A.cheaper B.cheapC.cheapest D.the cheapest(C)4.—Which month has ________ days in a year?—February.A.fewer B.moreC.the fewest D.the most环节说明:将对话转化成填空题,这样能对所学的重要句型起到复习巩固的作用,同时也加深了对对话的理解。Step 4 问题探究1.How do you like…?的用法(1)你认为这本书怎么样?How__do__you__like__this__book?“How do you like…?”相当于What__do__you__think__of…?意思是“你觉得……怎么样?”,日常口语中用来询问对方对某一事物的看法或者判断。( )2.________ has the best clothes.A.The MillerB.Miller'sC.Miller clothes Shop答案选择B,Miller's是英语中常见的表示店铺或场所的说法,当名词所有格修饰的名词是商店、诊所、家时,名词所有格后面的名词通常省去。( )3.He is a ________ boy,and he can do it ________.A.careful;carefully B.carefully;carefulC.careful;careful D.carefully;carefully答案选择A,careful是形容词,carefully是副词。boy是名词,要用形容词修饰定语;do是动词,要用副词carefully来修饰。( )4.—It is fine weather tomorrow.—I think ________.A.it B.is C.not D.so答案选择D,so代词,代替上文已经出现过的整个分句或分句的一部分。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:worse,service,pretty,menu,act,meal2.重点短语:most cinemas3.重点句式:What's the best movie theater to go to?—What do you think of 970AM?—I think 970AM is pretty bad.It has the worst music.He is much better than other actors at finding the most interesting roles.形容词和副词的最高级的用法形容词和副词的最高级的用法一、预习课本P27新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.较差的__worse__ 2.服务__service__3.相当__pretty__ 4.菜单__menu__5.扮演__act__6.早(或午、晚)餐__meal__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.大多数的电影院__most__cinemas__2.能去的最好的影院是哪家?__What's__the__best__movie__theater__to__go__to?__3.—你认为调频970怎么样?—我认为调频970相当糟糕,它有最糟糕的音乐。—What__do__you__think__of__970__AM?__—I__think__970__AM__is__pretty__bad.__It__has__the__worst__music.4.他比其他的演员更擅长发现最有趣的角色。He__is__much__better__than__other__actors__at__finding__the__most__interesting__roles.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to compare things with Superlative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.Today we will do some practice to remember it well.环节说明:开门见山地提出本节课的学习目标——形容词和副词的最高级。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(3分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟) 环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a的句子,然后用括号内所给词的正确形式填空,请几位学生到黑板上写答案,完成后教师点拨核对答案,学生大声朗读句子,体会形容词和副词三个级别的用法。(2分钟)2.根据你们镇上的三个商店的实际情况来完成表格,并且根据表格中的信息仿照3b格式来写六个句子,让几个学生到黑板上写句子,完成后小组内互相交流,教师点评所写句子。(3分钟)3.考虑一下你们镇上的三个饭店,根据实际情况来完成表格填空,然后向搭档分别叙述三个饭店的情况,让搭档选择出最好的饭店。小结训练。(4分钟)1.Tina sings the__best(well) in her class.2.This book is more__interesting than any other one,It's the most__interesting(interesting).3.Of all the theaters,Town Cinema is the__closest(close) to home.4.Town Cinema has the__shortest__waiting(short,wait) time.5.Movie World has the__most__comfortable(comfortable) seats.环节说明:通过本环节的学习,使学生对前一阶段所学的知识起到了复习的作用。Step 4 问题探究( )1.Which city is ________,Beijing,Shanghai or Fuzhou?A.beautiful B.more beautifulC.most beautiful D.the most beautiful答案选择D,Beijing,Shanghai or Fuzhou提问的对象是三者,应该选择最高级。这里面包含了最高级经常用到的句型:特殊疑问句+be+the+最高级,A,B or C?( )2.The Yellow River is the second ________ in China.A.long B.longerC.longest D.the longest答案选择C,这个句型包含了最高级经常用到的句型:主语+be+the+序数词+最高级+名词单数+表示范围的短语。( )3.She is one of ________ girls in her class.A.tall B.tallerC.tallest D.the tallest答案选择D,这个句型包含了最高级经常用到的句型:主语+be+one of+the+最高级+复数名词+表示范围的短语。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。What's__the__best__movie__theater__to__go__to?(可以去的最好的影院是哪家?)Town Cinema.It's__the__closest__to__home.And__you__can__buy__tickets__the__most__quickly__there.(它离家最近,并且你能最快地买到票。)Which__is__the__worst__store__in__town?(镇上最差的服装店是哪家?)Dream Clothes.It is worse(差) than Blue Moon.It has the__worst(最差的) service.What do you think__of(认为) 970AM?I think 970AM is pretty bad(差).It has the worst music.Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:creative,performer2.重点句式:My cousin Li Jing is the funniest person I know.—Who was the best performer?—Eliza was the best performer.形容词和副词的最高级的构成及用法形容词和副词的最高级的构成及用法一、预习课本P28新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.有创造力的__creative__2.表演者__performer__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列句型。1.我表弟李靖是我认识的最有趣的人。My__cousin__Li__Jing__is__the__funniest__person__I__know.2.—谁是最好的表演者?—伊莉莎是最好的表演者。—Who__was__the__best__performer?__—Eliza__was__the__best__performer.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We all know many famous performers,like Zhao Benshan,Pan Changjiang,Huang Bo…Do you think who is the best performer?And do you think who is the funniest performer?Now please tell your partner about your ideas.环节说明:由谈论演员导入新课,引起学生的学习兴趣,激起学生用英语表达的积极性。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1.大声朗读1a中的短语并熟记。然后写出表格中单词的反义词,小组内核对答案。(5分钟)2.以小组为单位,用1a中的单词,仿照1b中的形式告诉你的搭档你所熟悉的人。(4分钟)参考案例A:My cousin Li Jing is the funniest person I know.小结训练。(2分钟)选出能代替画线部分的选项。(B)1.The cinema is close__to my home.A.far B.near C.next.(A)2.The boring TV play made us want to sleep.A.dull B.interesting C.beautiful(B)3.This question is not__difficult to answer.A.important B.easy C.not easy环节说明:通过本环节的学习使学生熟练掌握了形容词的用法。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.认真听人们谈论学校才艺表演的对话,将图片和演出者匹配。(3分钟)2.再听一遍录音,听人们对表演者的评价,用形容词来填写表格,集体核对答案,完成1d。(5分钟)3.再听一遍录音,并跟读,整体感知对话。(3分钟)4.根据1d表格中的听力信息,仿照1e形式来编练新的对话,并邀请学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Who is the best performer?B.Eliza was the best performer.小结训练。(2分钟)根据首字母提示完成单词。A:What a great talent show!B:Yeah!A:__Who__ do you think was the best performer?B:I think Eliza was the best.A:Yeah,she was great.And I think Steve __and__ his dog was the __funniest__.B:Me too! I __couldn't__ stop laughing!And how __about__ Vera?A:Oh,she was the __most__ creative performer.She __played__ the guitar upside down.B:Who do you think was the __worst__?A:Oh,Dennis!He was terrible.He can't juggle at all!B:I know.A:__What__ do you think of the Math Teachers?B:Well,they __were__ definitely the loudest.Step 4 问题探究( )1.Liu Xiang is a great ________ as a player.A.succeed B.successC.successful D.successfully答案选择B,a和great修饰名词,故选择名词success。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:common,beautifully,role,winner,prize,everybody,example,poor,seriously,give2.重点短语:have…in common,all kinds of ,be up to…,play a role,make up,for example,take…seriously3.重点句式:Some people are truly talented.Talent shows are getting more and more popular.All these shows have one thing in common.That's up to you to decide.When people watch the show,they usually play a role in deciding the winner.Some think that the lives of the performers are made up.If you don't take these shows too seriously,they are fun to watch.They give people a way to make their dreams come true.1.重点短语和句型2.会用最高级来描述人物1.重点短语和句型2.会运用最高级来描述人物一、预习课本P29-30新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.与……相同__common__2.漂亮地__beautifully__3.作用__role__4.获胜者__winner__5.奖品__prize__6.每人__everybody__7.实例__example__8.贫穷的__poor__9.认真地__seriously__10.提供__give__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.最有天赋的人the__most__talented__person2.有相同特征have__one__thing__in__common3.最好的歌手the__best__singers4.各种各样的all__kinds__of5.是……的职责be__up__to6.发挥作用play__a__role__in7.编造make__up8.认真对待take…seriously9.才艺表演越来越受欢迎。Talent__shows__are__getting__more__and__more__popular.10.所有的节目都有一个相同点。All__these__shows__have__one__thing__in__common.11.那由你来决定。That's__up__to__you__to__decide.12.当人们观看表演的时候,他们在决定获胜者方面发挥着作用。When__people__watch__the__show,they__usually__play__a__role__in__deciding__the__winner.13.一些人认为表演者的生活是编造的。Some__think__that__the__lives__of__the__performers__are__made__up.14.如果你不是那么认真地对待这些节目,他们看起来是有趣的。If__you__don't__take__these__shows__too__seriously,they__are__fun__to__watch.15.他们为人们的梦想的实现提供了途径。They__give__people__a__way__to__make__their__dreams__come__true.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Have you ever heard of China's Got Talent?Do you know about the program?Do you know anything about such programs?Today we will learn a passage about talent shows.环节说明:由《中国达人秀》引出本节课的学习重点,引起学生的学习兴趣。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.谁是你知道的最有才艺的人,他会做什么呢?利用两人对话的形式向你的搭档介绍这个人。(3分钟)参考案例A:I think…is the most talented person.B:What can he/she do?A:He/She can…2.阅读2b文章,找出文章中涉及的三个才艺表演节目,完成后集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.再认真阅读一遍短文,根据文章内容回答2c中的5个问题,完成后分别让几位学生回答问题,教师点拨。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(7分钟)(B)1.These three bags all look nice.I can't decide which one to ________.A.make B.choose C.decide D.see(A)2.—Mom,could I play soccer with my friends?—That's up ________ you.A.to B.for C.with D.of(D)3.This ________ has the biggest screen,so people like to see movies here.A.restaurant B.radio stationC.clothes store D.theater(D)4.Today is one of ________ days of the year.A.hot B.hottestC.hotter D.the hottest(A)5.—Dad,would you please drive ________?—No hurry.We have enough time before the plane takes off.A.faster B.more slowlyC.more carefully D.more careful(A)6.An Indian or Chinese meal?It's up ________ you.A.to B.at C.for D.in(D)7.Telephones are playing an important role ________ our daily life.A.to B.at C.for D.in(A)8.Can you ________ a new conversation according to the picture?A.make up B.put upC.stand up D.look up(A)9.You should ________ your mistakes seriously,or you will make much bigger mistakes.A.take B.bringC.make D.correct(A)10.—Can you give the book ________ your sister?—No problem.A.to B.at C.for D.in环节说明:通过对本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.再次阅读文章,画出所有的最高级的词组,然后仿照给出的例句至少用其中的四个写句子,完成后小组内交流答案,然后让几位学生在全班展示写出的句子。(5分钟) 2.以小组为单位做调查,谁是班上最有才艺的人。在每项才艺的后面写出同学的名字,然后弄明白多少人同意你的观点。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节的学习,既巩固了2b短文,又复习了最高级的用法。Step 4 问题探究1.比较级+and+比较级(1)越来越大bigger__and__bigger(2)越来越重要more__and__more__important比较级+and+比较级,意为“越来越……”,当形容词的比较级是通过加more构成时,则表示为:more+and+more+形容词原级。2.be up to的用法(1)该由我来擦黑板了。It's__up__to__me__to__clean__the__blackboard.(2)我们是否去公园由你哥哥定。Whether__we__go__to__the__park__is__up__to__your__brother.be up to后面跟sb.to__do__sth.,表示“由某人做某事”,常用it作形式主语;be up to后面还可以跟人,表示“由某人决定,随某人。”3.play a role的用法(1)他在这部电影中扮演了一个重要的角色。He__plays__an__important__role__in__this__movie.(2)对于这次比赛的胜利,他发挥了重要的作用。He__played__an__important__role__in__the__success__of__the__game.play a role in有两种意思:一种意思是“在……中扮演角色”;另外一种意思是“在……中发挥作用”。play a role in后面经常跟名词,动名词或代词。4.take…seriously的用法我们要严肃对待这件事。We__should__take__this__thing__seriously.take sb./sth.seriously意为“严肃对待某人或某事”,其中seriously是副词,修饰词take。5.give的用法你能帮助我把这本书给玛丽吗?Can__you__help__me__give__this__book__to__Mary?或Can__you__help__me__give__Mary__this__book?give意为“提供,给”,经常用到的句型是:给某人某物give__sb.sth.或把某物给了某人give__sth.to__sb.。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:crowded2.重点句式:Greenwood Park is the best place to go to on weekends.There is something for everyone at Greenwood Park.Which is the best city?You can get a big plate of dumplings for only five yuan.1.最高级的用法2.用最高级来描写一个地方用最高级来描写一个地方一、预习课本P31-32新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。拥挤的__crowded__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找到下列句型。1.绿林公园是周末最好的去处。Greenwood__park__is__the__best__place__to__go__to__on__weekends.2.在绿林公园有适合每一个人可做的事情。There__is__something__for__everyone__at__Greenwood__Park.3.哪座城市是最好的?Which__is__the__best__city?4.仅仅五元钱就能买到一大盘饺子。You__can__get__a__big__plate__of__dumplings__for__only__five__yuan.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned Superlative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.Today we will learn how to describe a place with Superlative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.环节说明:开门见山提出本节课的学习重点,用形容词和副词的最高级来描述一个地方,完成本单元的写作训练。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真阅读3a中关于Greenwood Park的短文,用方框中形容词或副词的最高级形式来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,然后大声地朗读短文,体会形容词和副词最高级的用法。(7分钟)2.考虑一下你家乡最好的地方或东西,为什么它们是最好的,根据要求填写3b的表格,完成后小组内互相交流。(3分钟) 3.认真阅读3a短文,然后仿照3a的形式写一篇关于你的家乡最好的地方的一篇短文,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查点拨。(7分钟)参考案例The People's Library is the best place to go to on weekends.I always do my homework most quickly on Saturday.Because I want to go to the People's Library to read books as soon as I can.The library is the most relaxing place on weekends because many people read books quietly.Some people think they are boring.But I think they are the most relaxing.There you can read books that you like and spend time with books.There are some books for everyone.After reading books,you can go to the park near the library to relax.4.和你的搭档讨论一下中国的城市,然后告诉全班学生你认为最好的城市是哪个,在汇报过程中可以参考方框中的语句。(3分钟)环节说明:通过这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力和口语能力表达。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.读1中的5个句子,然后用方框中单词的最高级形式来补全句子,完成后集体核对答案。(2分钟)2.大声地朗读核对答案后的句子,体会最高级的用法。3.认真阅读2中信息,然后根据信息内容来改正1~5小题的错误,完成后核对答案。(5分钟)环节说明:这一环节通过训练,让学生对本单元的形容词和副词的最高级有了更深刻的理解。Step 4 问题探究( )1.School is a good place ________.A.study B.studiesC.studying D.to study答案选择D,动词不定式做后置定语。( )2.Everyone in the two schools ________ a dictionary.A.has B.have C.having D.had答案选择A,这句话的主语是不定代词everyone,不定代词做主语谓语动词用单三形式。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 5Do you want to watch a game show?1.重点单词:sitcom,news,soap2.重点短语:game show,talk show,soap opera,sports show3.重点句式:What do you want to watch?—What do you think of talk shows?—They're OK.I don't mind them.I can't stand them.1.询问他人对事物的观点2.学会正确表达自己的看法1.询问他人对事物的观点2.学会正确表达自己的看法一、预习课本P33新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.情景喜剧__sitcom__2.新闻节目__news__3.肥皂剧__soap__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.游戏节目__game__show__2.访谈节目__talk__show__3.连续剧__soap__opera__4.体育节目__sports__show__5.你想去看什么?What__do__you__want__to__watch?6.—你认为访谈节目怎么样?—它们很好,我不介意它们。—What do you think of talk shows?—They're OK. I don't mind them. 7.我无法忍受它们。I__can't__stand__them.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:There are many shows,such as talk shows,game shows,sports shows,soap operas and so on.What kind of shows do you want to watch?What do you think of them?Let's talk about the shows today.环节说明:由学生熟悉的电视节目入手,激起他们的学习欲望,有助于对学生学习兴趣的培养。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词或词组,教师纠正错误读音,然后两人一组互相提问单词或词组。(5分钟)2.认真观察图片的电视节目,将电视节目和相对应的图片匹配,集体核对答案。(2分钟)3.认真听录音,根据听到的节目顺序给他们标号,集体核对答案。(3分钟)4.再认真听一遍录音,并跟读,整体感知对话内容。(3分钟)5.练习1c中的对话,并请学生表演。(3分钟)6.利用1c左侧方框中的单词或词组,仿照右侧方框中的对话来编写新的对话,两人一组进行练习,并请几组学生表演对话。(3分钟)参考案例A:What do you want to watch?B:What do you think of talk shows?A:They're OK.I don't mind them.B:Then let's watch a talk show.小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.—What do you think of ________ and ________?—I love ________.A.sports show;sitcom,themB.sports shows;sitcoms,themC.sports shows;sitcom,itD.sports show;sitcom,it(C)2.What ________ he ________ of sports shows?A.do;think B.do;thinksC.does;think D.does;thinks(C)3.Her brother says he can't ________ the wallet.A.think B.like C.stand D.stands4.What do you think of Man and Nature?(改为同义句)How do you like Man and Nature?5.Her mother doesn't__mind action movies.(对画线部分提问)What does her mother think of action movies?环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.mind的用法(1)我不介意体育节目。I__don't__mind__sports__shows.(2)你介意打开门吗?Do__you__mind__opening__the__door?(3)你介意我帮助你吗?Do__you__mind__my__helping__you?mind表示“介意,反对”的意思时,通常用在否定句、疑问句中。经常用到的句型:介意做某事mind__doing__sth.;介意某人做某事mind__one's__doing__sth.。2.stand的用法(1)我不能忍受这部电影了,它太无聊了。I__can't__stand__this__movie,it__is__too__boring.(2)我不能忍受等候这么长时间。I__can't__stand__waiting__for__such__a__long__time.stand“顺利接受,忍受”,多用于否定句。经常用到的句型:不能忍受做某事can't__stand__doing__sth.。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:educational,plan,hope,discussion,stand,happen,may,expect2.重点短语:find out,around the world,one day3.重点句式:Do you plan to watch the news tonight?I hope to find out what's going on around the world.We had a discussion about TV shows.I like to follow the story and see what happens next.They may not be very exciting,but you can expect to learn a lot from them.I hope to be a TV reporter one day.1.掌握重点单词的用法2.谈论自己对事物的喜好并陈述原因1.掌握重点单词的用法2.谈论自己对事物的喜好并陈述原因一、预习课本P34新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.计划__plan__ 2.有教育意义的__educational__3.希望__hope__ 4.讨论__discussion__5.忍受__stand__ 6.发生__happen__7.也许__may__ 8.预料__expect__二、认真预习2a-2d找出下列短语和句型。1.在课堂上in__class2.我最喜欢的电视节目my__favorite__TV__shows3.期望做某事expect__to__do__sth.4.你今天晚上计划看新闻吗?Do__you__plan__to__watch__the__news__tonight?5.我想弄清全世界发生了什么事情。I__hope__to__find__out__what's__going__on__around__the__world.6.我们进行了关于电视节目的讨论。We__had__a__discussion__about__TV__shows.7.我喜欢跟着故事看接下来会发生什么事。I__like__to__follow__the__story__and__see__what__hoppens__next.8.它们也许不是非常令人兴奋,但是你能期待从它们那里了解到很多东西。They__may__not__be__very__exciting,but__you__can__expect__to__learn__a__lot__from__them.9.我希望有一天能成为一名电视记者。I__hope__to__be__a__TV__reporter__one__day.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:What do you think of game shows?Student 1:I like them very much.Teacher:Why do you like them?Student 1:Because they are very interesting.Teacher:What do you think of sports games?Student 2:I don't like them at all.Because they are very boring.I don't like sports.Now please ask and answer like this in groups.环节说明:通过师生对话练习和生生对话练习,既复习了上节课的重点句型,又为本节课的谈论喜好陈述原因做了铺垫。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.学生朗读单词或词组,为听力做好准备。(2分钟)2.认真听Lin Hui和Sally的对话录音,根据听到的顺序给电视节目标出序号,集体核对答案,完成2a。(3分钟)3.再听一遍录音,将句子补充完整,集体核对答案后熟读句子。(5分钟)4.让学生用2a中的信息两人一组仿照2c的形式来练习对话,对话内容要反映自己的真实信息。参考案例A:Do you plan to watch the news tonight?B:Yes,I like watching the news.I watch it every night.A:Why?B:Because I hope to find out what's going on around the world.小结训练。(2分钟)(C)1.Summer vacation is coming,and I plan ________ my grandparents in the country.A.visit B.visitingC.to visit D.visited(C)2.I hope you can help me ________ who helped me with my homework.A.find B.seeC.find out D.look for(B)3.—The picnic is only in three days.Have you made any ________?—Not yet.So let's discuss what to prepare.(准备)A.wishes B.plansC.mistakes D.friends(C)4.They all hope ________ on time next week.A.me to arrive B.me arriveC.I arrive D.I to arrive环节说明:通过听、说学习训练让学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升,小结训练让学生巩固练习了重点单词的用法。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,回答下面的问题。(5分钟)(1)What did Sarah do in class today?(2)Does Grace like soap operas?Why?(3)What does Sarah think of soap operas?(4)Why does Sarah like news and talk shows best?2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3. 邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.I don't ________ where to eat lunch.You can decide yourself.A.stand B.mindC.like D.want(C)2.Brazil has better players,So I ________ them to win.A.hope B.exceptC.expect D.prefer(B)3.—Would you like ________ to the movie tonight?—Sure,________.A.go;I'd love toB.to go;I'd love toC.going;I'd loveD.going;I'd love to(B)4.There is ________ about H7N9 on the Internet.A.a news B.some newsC.some newses D.many was环节说明:将对话问题化,既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。Step 4 问题探究1.plan的用法(1)制定一个计划make__a__plan(2)我们计划参观长城。We__plan__to__visit__the__Great__Wall.plan意为“计划,打算”既可以作为动词,又可以作为名词,常用的句型:计划做某事plan__to__do__sth.。2.hope的用法(1)我希望你能很快好起来。I__hope__you__can__get__well__soon.(2)我希望能很快见到你。I__hope__to__see__you__soon.hope意为“希望”,经常用到的句型为:希望做某事hope__to__do__sth.;hope后面还可以跟宾语从句,但是不能接双宾语。3.expect的用法(1)我期待着明天去北京。We__expect__to__go__to__Beijing__tomorrow.(2)我期待你能和我一起去北京。I__expect__you__to__go__to__Beijing__with__me.(3)我期待你能通过考试。I__expect__that__you__can__pass__the__test.expect意为“期待、盼望、预期”,其句型是:期待做某事expect__to__do__sth.;期待某人做某事expect__sb.to__do__sth.;此外expect后面还可以跟宾语从句。4.happen的用法(1)这个故事发生在2003年。This__story__happened__in__2003.(2)你怎么啦?What__happened__to__you?(3)昨天我在街上碰巧遇到了我的一个朋友。I__happened__to__meet__a__friend__of__mine__in__the__street__yesterday.表示“某地(某时)发生了什么事”,常用到happen__in/at__sp.这一结构来表达,此时主语应是事情。表示“某人出了某事(常指不好的事)”,要用“sth.+happen+to sb.”这一结构来表达。表示“某人碰巧做某事”,要用“sb.+happen+to__do sth.”这一结构来表达。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:joke,comedy2.重点短语:comedy shows3.重点句式:What do you plan to watch tonight?What comedy shows do you like to watch?询问他人对事物的观点询问他人对事物的观点一、预习课本P35新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.笑话__joke__ 2.喜剧__comedy__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.喜剧节目__comedy__shows__2.你今天晚上打算看什么?What__do__you__plan__to__watch__tonight?3.你喜欢看什么喜剧节目?What__comedy__shows__do__you__like__to__watch?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned some words and some important sentences.Do you remember them?First let's have a dictaion.Teacher lets the students write some important words and sentences,then check the answers in pairs.环节说明:通过听写检查,让老师了解学生对上节课所学知识的掌握情况,从而促使学生更加努力地去学这一节课的内容。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟) 环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.根据情景及所学知识来补全对话,完成后小组内互相交流答案,然后两人一组练习对话,并请学生表演对话。(5分钟)2.根据自己的实际情况来回答3b的四个问题,完成后小组成员互相交流答案,并朗读问题和答案。(3分钟)3.以小组为单位,询问小组成员3c表格中的问题,根据答案的结果将小组成员的名字写在相应的问题后面。(3分钟)参考案例A:Do you want to watch a movie?B:Yes,I do.A:Do you hope to watch a sitcom?C:Yes,I do.小结训练。(4分钟)连词成句。(1)don't,I,mind,shows,really,talk(.)I__really__don't__mind__talk__shows.(2)your,of,sitcoms,what,sister,does,think(?)What__does__your__sister__think__of__sitcoms?(3)what,expect,you,learn,news,do,from,to(?)What__do__you__expect__to__learn__from__news?(4)hope,world,I,the,to,around,find,on,out,going,what's(.)I__hope__to__find__out__what's__going__on__around__the__world.环节说明:通过本环节的学习,让学生练习询问他人对事物观点的句型,同时提高了学生的语言表达能力。Step 4 问题探究( )We can learn something important ________ the books.A.at B.to C.from D.in答案选择C,learn from是“从……得知,向……学习”,是指从某个地方或者某人学到知识,常用短语是learn from sb.向某人学习。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Do you want to__watch(watch) the news?Yes,I do./No,I don't.What__do__you__think__of__talk__shows?(你认为访谈节目怎么样?)I__can't__stand__them.(我不能忍受他们。)/I__don't__mind__them.(我不介意他们。)What do you plan to__watch(watch) tonight?I plan__to__watch Days of Our Past.What can you expect to__learn(learn) from sitcoms?We can learn some great jokes.Why__do__you__like__watching__the__news?(你为什么喜欢看新闻?)Because__I__hope__to__find__out__what's__going__on__around__the__world.(因为我想弄清世界发生了什么事情。)Section B(1a-1d)1.重点单词:meaningless,action,cartoon2.重点短语:action movie,scary movie3.重点句式:John wants to watch talk shows because they're enjoyable.1.用形容词描述电影和电视节目2.能够表达自己的喜好并陈述原因能够表达自己的喜好并陈述原因一、预习课本P36新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.毫无意义的__meaningless__2.行动__action__3.动画片__cartoon__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列短语和句型。1.动作电影__action__movie__2.恐怖电影__scary__movie__3.约翰想要看访谈节目因为它们令人愉快。John__wants__to__watch__talk__shows__because__they're__enjoyable.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you like action movies?Student 1:Yes,I do.Teacher:Why do you like them?Student 1:Because they are very exciting.Teacher:Do you want to watch news?Student 2:No,I don't.Teacher:Why don't you like them?Student 2:Because they are very serious.环节说明:通过对话练习复习巩固所学句型,练习了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材1a-1d的任务1.学生大声朗读1a中的单词,然后两人一组互相提问1a中的形容词。(2分钟)2.认真观察图片,从方框中选择合适的形容词来描述图片内容。(2分钟)3.听录音,在1a的方框中圈出所听到的形容词,完成1b。(3分钟)4.再听一遍录音,写出John和Mary形容电视节目或电影用到的形容词,集体完成1c表格。(3分钟)5.听第三遍录音,整体感知对话内容。(2分钟)6.根据1c中的信息,告诉你的搭档John和Mary喜欢看的电视节目或电影及原因,然后告诉你的搭档你喜欢看的电视节目或电影及原因,邀请几名学生来展示。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(1)The movie is educational(education).(2)Do you enjoy the enjoyable movie?(enjoy)(3)The movie is meaningless(meaning),I don't like it.(4)The boy often relaxes at the park.It's a relaxing place to go.(relax)(5)We are all excited about the exciting movie.(excite)环节说明:通过听说训练,让学生更熟练地掌握语言交际用语,通过小结训练,让学生熟练掌握了形容词的用法。Step 3 问题探究He likes ________ (enjoy) movie.答案为enjoyable,movie是名词,要用形容词来修饰,enjoy是动词,其形容词形式为enjoyable。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:famous,appear,become,rich,successful,might,main,reason,film,unlucky,lose,ready,character2.重点短语:think of,over 80 years ago,come out,one of the main reasons,such as,more than3.重点句式:When people say “culture”,we think of art and history.We all know and love the black mouse with two large round ears—Mickey Mouse.It was the first cartoon with sound and music.He always tried to face any danger.Mickey was unlucky and had many problems such as losing his house or girlfriend.He was always ready to try his best.Today's cartoons are usually not so simple as little Mickey Mouse,but everyone still knows and loves him.1.重点短语和句型2.了解Mickey Mouse的历史重点短语和句型一、预习课本P37-38新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.文化__culture__ 2.著名的__famous__3.出现__appear__ 4.变成__become__5.富有的__rich__ 6.有成就的__successful__7.可能__might__ 8.主要的__main__9.理由__reason__ 10.电影__film__11.不幸的__unlucky__ 12.失去__lose__13.愿意的__ready__ 14.人物__character__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.想起艺术和历史think__of__art__and__history2.因……而著名be__famous__for3.在美国文化中in__American__culture4.80多年前over__eighty__years__ago5.在卡通片中出现appear__in__the__cartoon6.出版,发行come__out7.主要的原因之一one__of__the__main__reasons8.像一个普通人be__like__a__common__man9.在他的早期电影中in__his__early__films10.这是第一部配有声音和音乐的卡通片。It__was__the__first__cartoon__with__sound__and__music.11.他总是尽力面对任何困难。He__always__tried__to__face__any__danger.12.米奇是不幸的,他遇到了很多问题,例如,失去了他的房子和女朋友。Mickey__was__unlucky__and__had__many__problems__such__as__losing__his__house__or__girlfriend.13.他总是乐意尽自己最大的努力。He__was__always__ready__to__try__his__best.14.今天的卡通已不止小米鼠老那么简单,但每个人仍然知道他是谁并且爱他。Today's__cartoons__are__usually__not__so__simple__as__little__Mickey__Mouse,but__everyone__still__knows__and__loves__him.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you like cartoons?What cartoon characters do you know?Do you know a black mouse with two large round ears?Do you know what his name is?Yes,his name is Mickey.He is an unlucky but a very brave mouse.He always tried to face any danger.We all want to be like Mickey.But do you want to know more about the mouse?Today we will learn more about him.环节说明:以大家喜爱的卡通人物Mickey导入本课学习内容,引起学生的好奇心,激发他们的学习兴趣。Step 2 完成教材2a-2b的任务1.小组内互相讨论2a中的三个问题,然后邀请几个学生谈谈自己的想法。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2b短文,了解短文大意,完成38页上面的时间轴。(2分钟)3.再次仔细阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)4.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)5.熟读短文,背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(C)1.When did this cartoon ________?A.came out B.come inC.come out D.came in(C)2.—When was David born?—He was born ________ June 12,1989.A.at B.in C.on D.for(B)3.Do you know the girl ________ long hair?A.has B.with C.had D.have(D)4.China is famous ________ the Great wall.A.on B.at C.with D.for(A)5.He always tries ________ any danger.A.to face B.facing C.faces D.face(A)6.When I see the photo,I will ________ my sister.A.think of B.think overC.think out D.think on(D)7.One of my friends ________ Canada.A.comes in B.comes toC.come from D.comes from环节说明:通过本环节的学习锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2c-2e的任务1.认真阅读课文,根据Mickey的历史信息来完成2c的表格,完成后请几位学生回答问题,教师点拨。(5分钟)2.再次阅读课文,然后和搭档来讨论2d中的4个问题,然后就其中的一两个问题让学生发表自己的观点。(5分钟)3.两人一组互相提问背诵2e中的短语,然后将这些短语在课文中画出来,并且用这些短语来编写新的句子,请几位学生到黑板上板书自己的句子,完成后小组内互相交流,教师点拨黑板上写的句子。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(1)当你离开的时候,你会想起我吗?Will__you__think__of__me__when__you__are__away?(2)他想再次出现。He__wants__to__appear__again.(3)我们能做很多运动,例如跑步、打篮球。We__can__do__many__kinds__of__sports__such__as__running,playing__basketball.(4)他非常乐意去帮助我学英语。He__is__ready__to__help__me__study__English.环节说明:2c环节的学习让学生对课文有了更深刻的理解,同时锻炼了学生的阅读能力;2d环节让学生发表自己的观点,同时锻炼了学生的口语;2e环节和小结训练让学生对本节课的重点短语进行了巩固练习。Step 4 问题探究( )1.I want to try my best ________ it well.A.do B.to doC.does D.doing答案选择B,try one's best to do sth.尽某人最大的努力去做某事。( )2.He ________ the movie two years ago.A.watch B.is watchingC.watched D.watches答案选择C,因为有two years ago两年以前,这是一般过去时态的标志词,所以选watched。( )3.The girl ________ English these days.A.tries she best to learnB.is trying her best learningC.is trying her best to learnD.tries her best to learn答案选择C,these days这些天,是现在进行时态的标志词,而try one's best to do sth.是尽某人最大的努力去做某事,所以答案选择C。4.famous的用法(1)一个著名的歌手a__famous__singer(2)周杰伦因为他的歌曲而出名。Jay__Chou__is__famous__for__his__songs.(3)周杰伦作为一名歌手而出名。Jay__Chou__is__famous__as__a__singer.famous意为“著名的,出名的”,经常用到的句型:因为……而出名be__famous__for…;作为……而出名be__famous__as…请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:army2.重点短语:dress up,take one's place,do a good job3.重点句式:She dresses up like a boy and takes her father's place to fight in the army.The other actors are also fantastic and they did a good job in the movie.1.学会问他人对事物的看法2.会介绍影片会用学过的知识来介绍影片一、预习课本P38-39新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。军队__army__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.乔装打扮__dress__up__2.替代某人的位置__take__one's__place__3.干得好__do__a__good__job__4.她打扮成一个男人,替她父亲在军队里打仗。She__dresses__up__like__a__boy__and__takes__her__father's__place__to__fight__in__the__army.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you know the story about Mulan?She is a girl,but she dresses up like a boy and takes her father's place to fight in the army.A film has been made according to the story.Now let's see the movie reviews to know something more about the movie.环节说明:由花木兰替父从军,引起学生的学习兴趣;由《花木兰》的影视评论,引出影视评论的写法,过渡自然。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真阅读3a中关于《花木兰》的短文,选用方框中的单词来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,然后大声地朗读短文。(5分钟)2.根据要求写出你自己的电影评论的注解。(3分钟)3.根据3b填写的内容来写你自己的电影评论,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查点拨。(7分钟)参考案例Lost on Journey is my favorite movie.It's a comedy movie.In the movie,there are two important persons.They are the boss,Li Chenggong and the young worker out of home.Niu Geng.Li Chenggong wants to go to Wuhan to spend the Spring Festival with his family.But Niu Geng wants to go to Wuhan to ask his boss for his money.They meet on the way.The journey to Wuhan is full of hardships.They come across many unexpected hardships.But they get them over and get to Wuhan at last.The movie is very funny.It always makes me laugh.The actor plays Niu Geng's role very well.The other actors also play very wonderfully.I like the movie very much.The movie shows that Niu Geng's kind and lovely.If you want to watch a movie and plan to watch something funny,choose Lost on Journey.4.两人一组利用What do you think of…?句型互相提问对电影或电视节目的看法,然后把描述电视节目或电影的形容词写在4的表格中,完成后小组内互相交流。(5分钟)小结训练。(1分钟)(D)1.We all ________ as all kinds of animals at the party yesterday.A.get dressed B.get dressC.dress up D.dressed up(B)2.You are very important in the team.No one can ________.A.takes your place B.take your placeC.take you place D.takes you place环节说明:这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力和口语表达能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.根据括号内的提示完成对话,完成后集体核对答案。(5分钟)2.大声地朗读核对答案后的句子,然后两人一组练习对话。(3分钟)3.认真阅读2中的5个句子,在你同意的句子后面打勾,在你不同意的句子后面打叉。然后给出你同意或不同意的理由,小组内交流自己的观点。(5分钟)环节说明:通过1环节的学习,学生牢固掌握了本单元的重点单词和句型,2环节的学习使学生能充分发表自己的观点,同时锻炼了口语表达能力。Step 4 问题探究( )1.He dressed up ________ Harry Potter.A.in B.like C.for D.as答案选择D,dress sb.up…as把某人打扮成……的样子。( )2.Tom is ill,Sam will ________ to do it.A.take place B.take his placeC.take him place答案选择B,根据句意可知“汤姆生病了,萨姆将替他做这件事”,应该选择take his place,意为“代替”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 6I'm going to study computer science.1.重点单词:cook,doctor,engineer,violinist,driver,pilot,pianist,scientist2.重点短语:grow up,computer programmer,bus driver,basketball player3.重点句式:—What do you want to be when you grow up?—I want to be a basketball player.—How are you going to do that?—I'm going to practice basketball every day.1.重点词组和句型2.用be going to句型来谈论将来的打算1.be going to的用法2.用be going to句型来谈论将来的打算一、预习课本P41新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.厨师__cook__ 2.医生__doctor__3.工程师__engineer__ 4.小提琴手__violinist__5.司机__driver__ 6.飞行员__pilot__7.钢琴家__pianist__ 8.科学家__scientist__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.学习电脑科技study__computer__science2.成长,长大grow__up3.编程人员a__computer__programmer4.上表演课take__acting__lessons5.练习篮球practice__basketball6.努力学数学study__math__really__hardStep 1 情景导入Teacher:There are many jobs in the world,such as teachers,doctors,workers and so on,people who do different jobs play different roles in society.Now I am a teacher.I want to be a doctor.What do you want to be?Student 1:I want to be a movie star.Teacher:What do you want to be?Student 2:I want to be a singer.……环节说明:从社会上的不同职业以及自己的理想职业入手,在师生问答中自然而然导入新课。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词或词组,教师纠正错误读音,然后两人一组互相提问背诵单词或词组。(5分钟)2.你认为这些工作有趣吗?请把他们按1~12的顺序排列,1是最有趣的,12是最没趣的,完成后小组内互相交流,互相了解对方对职业的看法。(2分钟)3.认真听录音,完成1b的填空。(3分钟)4.再认真听一遍录音,完成匹配。(3分钟)5.听第三遍录音,学生跟读。(2分钟)6.学生两人一组练习图片中的对话,然后运用1b中的信息仿照图片对话形式进行对话练习,邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:What do you want to be when you grow up?B:I want to be a basketball player.A:How are you going to do that?B:I'm going to practice basketball every day.小结训练。(5分钟)(D)1.—What are you ________ when you grow up?—Well,I'm going to be an engineer.A.going B.beC.to do D.going to be(A)2.—________ are you going to do that?—I'm going to study really hard.A.How B.Why C.What D.When(D)3.There is going to ________ a football game this afternoon.A.have B.has C.is D.be(C)4.Does Tom want ________ a bus driver?A.to B.beC.to be D.to do(B)5.His father is ________ engineer.A.a B.an C.the D.×(A)6.—What does your sister want to be?—She wants to be a teacher when she ________.A.grows upB.grow upC.is going to grow upD.grew up环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.be going to的用法(1)我打算每天练习说英语。I__am__going__to__practice__speaking__English__every__day.(2)我不打算明天去上表演课。I__am__not__going__to__have__acting__lessons__tomorrow.(3)你明天去弹钢琴吗?Are__you__going__to__play__the__piano?(4)你打算怎么去做呢?How__are__you__going__to__do__that? be going to是一般将来时态的一种表达方式,表示打算做某事,其结构为:主语+be going to+do__sth.,其中be随主语的人称和数的变化而变化。当主语是第三人称单数时用is,主语是第二人称及复数时用are,主语是I时用am;变否定句时,在am,is,are的后面加not;一般疑问句是把be动词提到主语前面,特殊疑问句由疑问词+be__going__to构成。( )2.My mother is a singer,she practices ________ every day.A.sing B.singsC.to sing D.singing答案选择D,practice doing sth.练习做某事。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:熟练掌握P42的单词2.重点短语:be sure about,make sure3.重点句式:I know why you're so good at writing stories.—How are you going to become a writer?—I'm going to keep on writing stories.I'm not sure about that.Just make sure you try your best.Then you can be anything you want!1.重点短语及句型2.会用be going to句型来描述将来的职业打算1.重点短语及句型2.会用be going to句型来描述将来的职业打算认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.确信__be__sure__about__ 2.确保__make__sure__3.我知道你为什么如此擅长写故事了。I__know__why__you're__so__good__at__writing__stories.4.—成为一名作家,你将怎样做?—我将继续坚持写作。—How are you going to become a writer?—I'm going to keep on writing stories.5.我还不确定。I'm__not__sure__about__that.7.确保你是尽力了,你就能做你想做的任何职业。Just__make__sure__you__try__your__best.__Then__you__can__be__anything__you__want!Step 1 情景导入Teacher:What do you want to be when you grow up?Student 1:I want to be an engineer.Teacher:How are you going to do that?Student 1:I am going to study science hard.Teacher:What does he(student 1) want to be when he grows up?Student 2:He wants to be an engineer.Teacher:How is he going to do that?Student 2:He is going to study science hard.Now please practice conversations like this in groups.……环节说明:通过对话练习既复习了上节课的重点句型,同时改编的对话让学生对单三形式进行了练习。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.认真听录音,在程寒想做的职业的图片方框内打勾并核对答案,完成2a。(3分钟)2.再听一遍录音完成2b表格填空,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.听第三遍录音,并跟读录音。(3分钟)4.根据听力信息中程寒的计划,两人一组练习对话,并邀请多组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:What does Cheng Han want to be?B:He wants to be…小结训练。(4分钟)(1)你的弟弟想做什么工作?What__does__your__brother__want__to__be?(2)我打算明天去拜访我的老师。I'm__going__to__visit__my__teacher__tomorrow.(3)他将怎样做才能说好英语呢?How__is__he__going__to__speak__English__well?环节说明:通过听说读写学习训练,学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,回答下面的问题。(5分钟)(1)What is Ken doing?(2)What does Ken want to be?(3)How is Ken doing to become a writer?(4)Does Andy want to be a doctor?2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.Look,the girl ________ English stories.A.read B.is readingC.reads D.is going to read(C)2.________ your sister good at ________ stories?A.Does;writing B.Is;writeC.Is;writing D.Does;write(C)3.After a short break,he keeps on ________.A.work B.to workC.working D.worked(D)4.I hear we are going to have a test,but I am not sure ________ it.A.in B.on C.at D.about环节说明:将对话问题化,既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解;小结训练巩固练习了重要知识点。Step 4 问题探究1.sure的用法(1)我对这个答案有把握。I'm__sure__about__this__answer.(2)我确信能做好这件事情。I'm__sure__to__do__this__thing__well.(3)我确信他会努力学习的。I'm__sure__he__will__study__hard.(4)—你能关上门吗?—当然可以。—Would__you__please__close__the__door?—Sure.(5)他确定他已经关上窗户了。He__makes__sure__that__he__has__closed__the__window.(1)be sure+of/about+名词或动名词,意为“确信……”;“对……有把握”。(2)be sure+不定式,表示说话人对句子主语作出的判断,认为句子主语“必定”、“必然会”、“准会”如何如何。(3)be sure+宾语从句,表示主句主语对宾语从句中所涉及的事物作出的判断,意为“确信某事一定会……”。(4)主要用于口语,此时的“Sure”相当于“OK”或“Certainly”。(5)sure经常用到的短语是make sure,有弄清、确保之意,经常跟“宾语”从句。( )2.He is very tired,but he keeps on ________ after a short rest.A.walk B.walksC.walking D.to walk答案选择C,keep on doing sth.继续做某事。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:college,education,medicine,university,London,article,send2.重点短语:a race car driver,a fast car,a cooking school,take acting lessons3.重点句式:—Where are you going to work?—I'm going to move to Shanghai.—When are you going to start?—I'm going to start when I finish high school and college.He's going to take acting lessons.I'm going to study medicine at a university.I'm going to write articles and send them to magazines and newspapers.1.重点单词和句型2.熟练运用be going to句型询问他人对事物的观点一、预习课本P43新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.学院__college__ 2.教育__education__3.医学__medicine__ 4.大学__university__5.伦敦__London__ 6.文章__article__7.邮寄__send__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.搬到……move__to…2.高中和大学毕业finish__high__school__and__college3.一位赛车手a__race__car__driver4.上声乐课take__singing__lessons5.学习教育学study__education6.上烹饪学校go__to__a__cooking__school7.—你将什么时候动身呀?—当我读完高中和大学的时候就动身去。—When are you going to start?—I'm going to start when I finish high school and college.8.我将去上表演课。He's__going__to__take__acting__lessons.9.我将去大学学医。I'm__going__to__study__medicine__at__a__university.10.我将写文章并把它们寄到杂志社或报社。I'm__going__to__write__articles__and__send__them__to__magazines__and__newspapers.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We learned some words and some important sentences.Do you remember them?First let's have a dictation.Teacher lets the students write some important words and sentences,then check the answers in pairs.环节说明:通过听写检查,老师了解了学生对上节课所学知识的掌握情况,从而促使学生更加努力地去学这一节课的内容。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a左右两组句子,然后将句子搭配,完成后小组内互相交流答案,然后熟读句子。(3分钟)2.认真阅读3b中的对话,根据所学知识补全对话,完成后小组成员互相交流答案,然后两人一组练习对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)3.完成3c表格,然后和你的搭档仿照方框中的对话进行练习。(3分钟)参考案例A:What do you want to be when you grow up?B:I want to be a reporter.A:How are you going to do that?B:I'm going to write articles and send them to magazines and newspapers.小结训练。(2分钟)(A)1.The old man worked at ________ university.A.a B.an C.any D./(B)2.She is going to be a doctor when she ________ up.A.grow B.growsC.is going to grow D.grew(D)3.He is in Beijing now,but he ________ London next year.A.moves to B.is going to moveC.moved to D.is going to move to(B)4.—Can you help me send the books ________ Jim?—No problem.A.for B.to C.at D.with环节说明:通过本环节的学习,学生练习掌握了be going to句型,同时提高了语言表达能力。Step 4 问题探究1.send的用法你能把这本书送给Jim吗?Can__you__send__this__book__to__Jim?或Can__you__send__Jim__this__book?send意为“邮寄,赠送”,把某东西送给某人send__sb.sth.或send__sth.to__sb.( )2.I am going to tell him about it when I ________ him.A.see B.am going to seeC.is seeing D.saw答案选择A,when意为“当……的时候”,引导时间状语从句,主句用一般将来时态,从句用一般现在时态,be going to是将来时态的一种形式,因此答案选择A。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。What__do__you__want__to__be__when__you__grow__up?(长大之后你想干什么?)I__want__to__be__an__engineer.(我想成为一名工程师。)How__are__you__going__to__do__that?(你打算怎么去做呢?)I'm__going__to__study__math__really__hard.(我将努力学习数学。)Where__are__you__going__to__work?(你将去哪里工作?)I'm__going__to__move__to__Shanghai.(我将搬到上海去。)When__are__you__going__to__start?(你将什么时候动身?)I'm__going__to__start__when__I__finish__high__school__and__college.(当我读完高中和大学的时候就动身去。)Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:resolution,team,foreign2.重点短语:make the soccer team,get good grades,get lots of exercise3.重点句式:I'm going to learn another foreign language .Sounds like a good plan.用be going to句型来制定新年计划用be going to句型来制定新年计划一、预习课本P44新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.决定__resolution__ 2.队,组__team__3.外国的__foreign__二、认真预习1a-1e,找出下列短语和句型。1.组建足球队make__the__soccer__team2.新年决心New__Year's__resolutions3.学习弹钢琴learn__to__play__the__piano4.吃更健康的食物eat__healthier__food5.多锻炼get__lots__of__exercise6.学习另一门外语learn__another__foreign__language7.听起来像是一个好计划Sounds__like__a__good__planStep 1 情景导入Teacher:New Year is coming,many people make their New Year's resolutions.Some people are going to visit some interesting places.Some people are going to take more exercise to keep healthy.Some people are going to study hard to learn a lot.What about your New Year's resolutions?Now please say something about your New Year's resolutions to your partner.环节说明:由新年到来,人们制定新年计划入手,让学生们谈论自己的新年计划,过渡自然,激起学生用英语表达的欲望,同时又锻炼了学生的口语表达能力。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1. 大声朗读1a的句子,然后将句子和图片匹配,集体核对答案。(3分钟)2.熟读并背诵句子,然后两人一组互相提问。(5分钟)3.两人一组互相练习1b的对话,然后以此对话形式谈谈你明年的打算。参考案例A:What are you going to do next year?B:Well,I'm going to take guitar lessons.I really love music.A:Sounds interesting.I'm going to learn another foreign language.B:Are you?Great!But foreign languages are not for me.小结训练。(3分钟)(1)你打算组建足球队吗?Are__you__going__to__make__a__soccer__team?(2)我不打算学另外一种外语。I'm__not__going__to__study__a__foreign__language.(3)我想学弹吉他。I__want__to__learn__to__play__the__guitar.(4)明年你的爸爸打算干什么?What__is__your__father__going__to__do__next__year?环节说明:通过这个环节的对话和习题练习,学生熟练地掌握了be going to句型和一些重要的词组。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.听录音,在1a中圈出所听到的新年计划,集体核对答案,完成1c。(3分钟)2.再听一遍录音,写出人们将如何去实现他们的工作计划,核对答案,完成1d。(3分钟)3.听第三遍录音,学生跟着大声朗读。(3分钟)4.让学生们列一个计划及如何去实施计划的清单,然后小组内成员仿照1e的对话形式讨论一下彼此的清单内容,并邀请几组学生表演自编对话。(5分钟) 小结训练。(2分钟)(D)1.He ________ when he was four years old.A.learn to ride a bikeB.learned to ride bikeC.learned riding a bikeD.learned to ride a bike(B)2.—What is her New Year's ________?—She is going to study a lot.A.think B.resolutionC.idea D.food(A)3.—I am going to learn the piano when I grow up.—That sounds ________ a good idea.A.like B.as C.about D.of(C)4.—Is Mr.Brown living here?—No,he moved ________ last week.A.to anywhere quietB.somewhere quietC.to somewhere quietD.to quiet somewhere环节说明:通过听说训练,学生更熟练地掌握了语言交际用语;通过小结训练,语言目标得以强化。Step 4 问题探究( )1.There ________ a basketball match tomorrow.A.isB.is going to haveC.is going to beD.there is going to答案选择C,there be结构的一般将来时态是There is going to be或there will be,因此答案选择C。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:question,meaning,discuss,promise,beginning,improve,physical,selfimprovement,hobby,weekly,schoolwork,agree2.重点短语:be able to,most of the time,make promises,get back,make resolutions,at the beginning of,write down,different kinds of,have to do with,take up,a weekly plan,agree with3.重点句式:When we make resolutions at the beginning of the year,we hope that we are going to improve our lives.Many resolutions have to do with selfimprovement.Sometimes the resolutions may be the too difficult to keep.The best resolution is to have no resolutions.The start of the year is often a time for making resolutions.1.重点短语和句型2.了解关于计划的一些内容(计划的含义、种类以及实施过程中出现的问题)重点短语和句型一、预习课本P45-46新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.怀疑__question__ 2.意义__meaning__3.讨论__discuss__ 4.承诺__promise__5.开端__beginning__ 6.改进__improve__7.身体的__physical__ 8.自我改进__selfimprovement__9.业余爱好__hobby__ 10.每周的__weekly__11.学校作业__school__work__ 12.同意__agree__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.对某人许下诺言make__promises__to__sb.2.整理某人的房间tidy__one's__room3.从学校回来get__back__from__school4.在一年开始的时候at__the__beginning__of__the__year5.提高我们的生活improve__our__lives6.身体健康状况physical__health7.开始一项运动项目start__an__exercise__program8.少吃快餐eat__less__fast__food9.与自我提升有关have__to__do__with__selfimprovement10.开始培养一个爱好take__up__a__hobby11.当我们在一年的开始制订计划的时候,我们希望能够改善我们的生活。When__we__make__resolutions__at__the__beginning__of__the__year,we__hope__that__we__are__going__to__improve__our__lives.12.许多计划和自我改进有关系。Many__resolutions__have__to__do__with__selfimprovement.13.有时这些计划也许太难了而不能坚持。Sometimes__the__resolutions__may__be__too__difficult__to__keep.14.最好的计划就是没有计划。The__best__resolution__is__to__have__no__resolutions.15.年初经常是制定计划的时间。The__start__of__the__year__is__often__a__time__for__making__resolutions.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Each of us often makes resolutions for many things.But do you know what resolutions are?Do you know the kinds of resolutions?And Do you know what difficulties you may face?If you want to know the answers to the questions,please let's learn from 2a to 2e together.环节说明:针对制订计划这个话题,向学生提出问题,引起学生的好奇心,激发他们的学习欲望。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.小组内互相讨论2a中的问题,然后教师邀请几个学生谈谈自己的想法。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2b短文,了解短文大意,选出每个段落的段意,并且画出帮助你选择段意的单词或短语。(3分钟)3.认真阅读短文,将2c中的4个句子放在文章中适合的位置,使文章完整,完成后集体核对答案。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(7分钟)(C)1.I ________ swim next year.A.canB.am able toC.am going to be able toD.could(D)2.We all make some resolutions ________ the year.A.at beginning of B.the beginning ofC.in the beginning of D.at the beginning of(C)3.Here is my telephone number.Please ________.A.write down it B.write them downC.write it down D.write down them(B)4.I read a book last week,and the book has to do ________ earthquake.A.to B.with C.in D.on(B)5.I like playing the piano,and I am going to ________ from now on.A.take up B.take it upC.take up it D.take off it(C)6.His idea sounds good,we all agree ________ him.A.in B.to C.with D.at(B)7.Eating vegetables ________ good for your health.A.am B.is C.are D.be(C)8.The old man is ________ work.A.very old to do B.too old onC.too old to finish D.very old to finish环节说明:本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.认真阅读课文,根据短文内容回答问题,教师找学生到黑板上板演答案,并点拨。(5分钟)2.两人一组互相提问背诵2e中的短语,然后将这些短语在课文中画出来,并且用这些短语来编写新的句子,请几位学生到黑板上板演句子,完成后小组内互相交流,教师点拨黑板上写的句子。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节让学生对文章有了更深刻的理解;2e环节让学生熟练掌握并灵活运用了重点短语.Step 4 问题探究1.write down的用法(1)写出你的名字write__down__your__name(2)把它写下来write__it__downwrite down是动词+副词结构,如果宾语是人称代词的宾格要放到中间。如果宾语是名词既可以放到中间也可以放到后面。2.too…to的用法(1)他年龄太小,不能参军。He__is__too__young__to__join__the__army.(2)这道数学题太难我解不出来。This__math__problem__is__too__difficult__for__me__to__work__it__out.或This__math__problem__is__not__easy__for__me__to__work__it__out.或This__math__problem__is__so__difficult__that__I__can't__work__it__out.too…to…句型形式上是肯定的,但是它在意义上却是否定的,表示“太……而不能……”。too的后面接副词或形容词的原级,to的后面接动词原形。too…to…句型是简单句。当too…to…句型中动词不定式所表示的动作的执行者与整个句子的主语不是同一人或物时,需要在动词不定式前加上一个逻辑主语,常用for__sb.。too…to…结构与enough…to…结构及so…that…结构可以相互转换,将too…to…结构转换为enough…to…结构时,要注意:(1)enough前的形容词或副词应是too前面形容词或副词的反义词;(2)enough…to…句式须用否定式;(3)too…to…结构有逻辑主语时,enough…to…结构也要加上逻辑主语。将too…to…结构转换为so…that…结构时,要注意:(1)so…that…结构是复合句,so的后面接形容词或副词的原级,that的后面接从句。(2)that后面的从句要用否定形式。3.agree的用法(1)我同意你的意见。I__agree__with__your__suggestion.(2)我同意他们的安排。I__agree__to__their__arrangements.(3)我同意买这辆汽车。I__agree__to__buy__the__car.agree意为“同意”,表示同意某人或某人的意见、想法、分析、解释等(即持同一观点)时,用agree with…;agree to…主要用来表示一方提出一项建议、安排、计划等,另一方同意协作;agree to__do sth.表示同意做某事。( )4.He ________ sing this song in English in a few hours,too.A.will canB.canC.is going to be able toD.be able to答案选择C,can与be able to都可以表示能力,但两者在用法上有点差异:be able to强调通过努力而获得的能力,而can则强调自身已具有的能力;be able to可以有各种时态,而can只有一般现在和一般过去两种时态。根据句意“几小时之后,他也能用英语唱这首歌”可知,这句话强调的是通过努力可获得的能力,并且是几小时之后,因此要用be able to的一般将来时态,所以答案选择C。此外can可用于表示可能性、推测、允许等情况,而be able to通常不这样用。( )5.He is a doctor.So most of his reports ________ medicine.A.take up B.have to do withC.agree with答案选择B,根据句意“他是一个医生,他的大多数报告跟医学有关系”可知,要用句型have to do with sth.“与……有关”,因此答案选择B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:own,personal,relationship2.重点短语:finish high school,go to university3.重点句式:They may help to make you a better person and to make your life easier.I think singing is a great activity so I am going to learn to sing.I think this will also make my family happy.1.询问他人对事物的看法2.会介绍影片会用学过的知识点来介绍影片一、预习课本P47-48新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.自己的__own__ 2.个人的__personal__3.关系__relationship__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.高中毕业__finish__high__school__2.去上大学__go__to__university__3.他们也许使你成为一个更好的人,而且使你的生活更轻松。They__may__help__to__make__you__a__better__person__and__to__make__your__life__easier.4.我认为唱歌是一项很好的活动,因此我将去学唱歌。I__think__singing__is__a__great__activity__so__I__am__going__to__learn__to__sing.5.我想这将使我的家人高兴。I__think__this__will__also__make__my__family__happy.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Resolutions are promises to yourself.They may help to make you a better student and to make your life easier.Are you going to make some resolutions?What are your resolutions and why do you make the resolutions?Please say something about your resolutions and why you make them.环节说明:让学生知道制订计划的好处,在互相交流中锻炼学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真阅读3a中的短文 ,选用方框中的单词来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,然后大声地朗读短文 。(5分钟)2.根据要求写出自己在身体健康、改善家人和朋友关系以及学业方面的计划,完成后小组内互相交流,完成3b。(3分钟)3.根据3b填写的内容来写三段关于自己的计划,并且每一段中都要写出自己将要做的事情以及原因,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师批阅点拨。(7分钟)参考案例The second resolution is about improving my physical health.Next year I am going to do more exercise.I think running slowly is a great activity.So I am going to run slowly for half an hour every morning.I think it will make me healthier and healthier because I am a little fat now.If I get thinner,I am going to be healthier.The third resolution is about improving my relationship with my family and my friends.Next year I am going to get along better with my family and my friends.I think communication is a good way.I will talk more to my family about my study and what I think.I am going to try my best to help my friends when they are in trouble.I think these will make them happy,and let them think I am their good child and good friend.The last resolution is about how to do better at school.I am going to study harder than before.I am going to listen to the teacher more carefully in class.After class I will do my homework more carefully,too.If I have any questions,I am going to ask the teacher and the students.I will be not lazy no longer.I think this will make my parents happy,and I am going to get good grades.4.假设你在你的城市工作,想一个使它更清洁更绿色环保的计划,写出来,完成后小组内互相交流答案,纠正错误。(3分钟)小结训练。(2分钟)(1)这本书和音乐有关。The__book__has__to__do__with__music.(2)我非常喜欢游戏,我将去从事它。I__like__swimming__very__much.I'll__take__it__up.(2)这对双胞胎有很多共同点。The__twins__have__many__things__in__common.环节说明:这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力和口语表达能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.朗读1表格中表示职业和学科的单词,然后将职业和与之相配的学科匹配。(3分钟)2.认真阅读2中的对话,根据所学知识将对话补充完整,集体核对答案,两人结对练习对话。(5分钟)3.根据要求写出你的计划,完成后小组成员互相交流。(3分钟)环节说明:本环节的学习使学生复习了本单元的对话及be going to句型的用法。Step 4 问题探究( )1.Watching TV too much ________ bad for your eyes.A.is B.areC.be D.sound答案选择A,这句话的主语是Watching TV too much,属于动名词做主语,谓语动词用单三形式,因此答案选择A。( )2.The good news makes us ________.A.happy B.be feel happyC.happily D.feel happily答案选择A,本题考查make的用法,make sb.do sth.使某人做某事,make+宾语+形容词,又因为feel是系动词,后面应跟形容词,所以答案选择A。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 7Will people have robots?1.重点单词:paper2.重点短语:in their homes,in 100 years,on computer,on paper3.重点句式:—Do you think there will be robots in people's homes?—Yes,there will.Kids won't go to school.They will study at home on computers.People will live to be 200 years old.—Will people use money in 100 years?—No,they won't.Everything will be free.1.will构成的一般将来时态的肯定句、否定句、一般疑问句及回答2.做预言,用will来讨论未来发生的事情做预言,用will来讨论未来发生的事情一、预习课本P49新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。纸张__paper__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.在他们的家中__in__their__homes__2.100年之后__in__100__years__3.通过电脑__on__computer__4.在纸上__on__paper__5.—你认为在人们的家中会有机器人吗?—是的,将会有。—Do you think there will be robots in people's homes?—Yes,there will.6.孩子们不用去上学,他们将在家里通过电脑学习。Kid's__won't__go__to__school.__They__will__study__at__home__on__computers.7.人们将会活到200岁。People__will__live__to__be__200__years__old.8.—100年后人们会用钱吗?—不,不会的。一切东西都是免费的。—Will people use money in 100 years?—No,they won't. Everything will be free.Step 1 情景导入(Show a picture of a robot)Teacher:What's this?Students:It's a robot.Teacher:Do you have a robot?Students:No.Teacher:We don't have robots now.But I think I will have a robot in the future.Will people have robots in the future?Today we will learn “Unit 7 Will people have robots?”.Students:Will people have robots?(read it three times)Teacher:In this unit,we will talk about “How to make predictions?”.环节说明:利用图片导入新课,学生的兴趣比较浓厚,告知学生本单元的语言目标,学生学习起来能够做到心中有数,可以更好地帮助学生去学习新课。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.在今后的100年里世界将会有怎样的不同呢?阅读1a中的预言,同意请在A处打勾,不同意请在D处打勾,完成后小组内互相交流。(3分钟)2.熟读1a中的句子,并两人一组互相背诵句子。(5分钟)3.以小组为单位,结合图片和1a中的句子,小组讨论一般将来时态的各种句型的构成,教师点拨。(5分钟)4.认真听录音并在1a中圈出你所听到的预测,集体核对答案,完成课本上1b的听力任务。(3分钟)5.再听一遍录音,并跟读对话。(2分钟)6.仿照1c中的对话,两人一组来对1a中的活动进行对话练习,并邀请一些小组表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Will people use money in 100 years?B.No,they won't.Everything will be free.Will people live to be 200 years old?A:Yes,they will.小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.Lucy went to New York last week,and she will be back ________ two weeks.A.at B.in C.for D.after(A)2.There ________ a football game tomorrow afternoon.A.will be B.is going to haveC.has D.will have(D)3.The students will study ________ home ________ computers.A.at;at B.at;inC.on;at D.at;on(A)4.—Who will be on duty tomorrow?—Susan ________.A.will B.is C.be D.does(C)5.There ________ a talk show on CCTV-2 at eight this evening.A.will have B.is going to haveC.will be D.is having(B)6.There ________ some paper on the table.A.am B.is C.are D.be环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达了语言目标,结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.will表示将来的用法(1)他们将有个愉快的寒假。They__will__have__a__pleasant__winter__holiday.(2)他们将不会有一个愉快的寒假。They__won't__have__a__pleasant__winter__holiday.(3)他们将有个愉快的寒假吗?是的,会有。/不,不会有。Will__they__have__a__pleasant__winter__holiday?Yes,they__will./No,they__won't.一般将来时态表达将来某一时间要发生或将要发生的动作或状态。其陈述句构成为:主语+will+动词原形(当主语为第一人称时,一般用shall代替will;当主语为其他人称时,用will,但主语为第一人称时,也可以用will)。否定句:主语+will+not+动词原形.一般疑问句:Will+主语+动词原形?肯定回答:Yes,主+will.否定回答:No,主+will+not(可以缩写成won't)2.in+一段时间的用法(1)他三个小时以后回来。He'll__come__back__in__three__hours.“in+一段时间”表示时间段之后,常用于将来时态中,对此短语提问用How__soon。( )3.Would you mind giving me ________ to write on?A.a paper B.some papersC.a piece of papers D.two pieces of paper答案选择D,根据句意,在本句中paper是纸张的意思,因此它是不可数名词,故排除A和B。当纸张前面加了可数词组piece of的时候,变复数,只在piece后面加s,paper后面不加,因此排除C答案。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:pollution,prediction,future,pollute,environment,planet,earth,plant,part2.重点句式:People will use the subways less.What's your prediction about the future?I think there will be more pollution.I don't think so.I think there will be fewer trees.It's a book about future.What will the future be like?The environment will be in great danger.Will we have to move to other planets?Everyone should play a part in saving the earth.1.用助动词will来表达将来时,并能熟练运用there be句型表达将来时2.明确区分可数名词和不可数名词;正确使用more,less,fewer1.用助动词will来表达将来时,并能熟练运用there be句型表达将来时2.明确区分可数名词和不可数名词;正确使用more,less,fewer一、预习课本P50新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.污染物__pollution__ 2.预言__prediction__3.将来__future__ 4.污染__pollute__5.环境__environment__ 6.行星__planet__7.地球__earth__ 8.植物__plant__9.参加__part__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列句型。1.人们将会更少地用地铁。People__will__use__the__subways__less.2.你对未来的预言是什么?What's__your__prediction__about__the__future?3.我认为将会有更多的污染。I__think__there__will__be__more__pollution.4.我认为不是这样的。我认为将会有更少的树。I__don't__think__so.__I__think__there__will__be__fewer__trees.5.它是一本关于未来的书。It's__a__book__about__future.6.未来将会是什么样子呢?What__will__the__future__be__like?7.环境将会面临很大的危险。The__environment__will__be__in__great__danger.8.我们必须要搬到另外一个行星上吗?Will__we__have__to__move__to__other__planets?9.每个人都要参与到拯救地球的活动中来。Everyone__should__play__a__part__in__saving__the__earth.Step 1 情景导入(Show some pictures to the students)Teacher:This is our earth in 100 years.What will the earth be like?Now please say some sentences according to the pictures like this:There will be more cars.There will be fewer people.There will be less water……环节说明:情景导入激发了学生用英语表达的欲望,同时又引出了本节课的重点句型,对提高学生的口语表达能力也起到了较好的效果。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.大声朗读2a中的句子,为听力做好准备。(2分钟)2.听录音,圈出括号中你所听到的单词,完成2a。(3分钟)3.朗读2b中的句子,然后再听一遍录音,圈出你所听到的预言,完成2b。(4分钟)4.听第三遍录音,学生跟读对话。(2分钟)5.两人一组根据2a、2b中的信息来练习对话谈论预言。(5分钟)参考案例A:What's you prediction about the future?B.I think there will be more pollution.A:Really?I don't think so.But I think there will be fewer trees.6.结合2a-2c中的句子,小组内讨论there be,less,more,fewer的用法,教师点拨重难点。(5分钟)小结训练。(4分钟)(B)1.Five years ago,Sally ________ soccer,but today she ________ soccer,she ________ basketball in five years.A.play;isn't play;will playB.played;doesn't play;will playC.plays;won't play;will playD.played;doesn't play;plays(C)2.We'll try our best to do the work with ______ money and ________ people.A.few; little B.a few; a littleC.less; fewer D.fewer; less(B)3.I am happy because I have ________ homework to do today than yesterday.A.more B.less C.few D.fewer(D)4.There ________ an English speech contest tomorrow afternoon in our school.A.will have B.will isC.is going to have D.will be(D)5.In ten years Joe ________ an astronaut.A.is B.was C.will is D.will be(C)6.He is very happy,because he ________ in a big apartment next year.A.live B.livesC.will live D.will living环节说明:通过听、说、读、写训练让学生掌握了解了语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,回答下面的问题:(1)Jill is reading a book about the cities and environment.( )(2)What's Jill's prediction about the future?________________________________________________________________________(3)Does Jill want to live on the earth or other planets?________________________________________________________________________(4)Everyone should play a part in saving the earth.________________________________________________________________________2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.—Do you like the books ________ history?—Yes,I do.A.at B.for C.about D.in(C)2.—What ________ your father ________?—He is very kind.A.does;like B.does;likesC.is;like D.is;likes(B)3.I think many famous predictions ________.A.come true B.will come trueC.came true D.comes true(B)4.Trees are very important in our life.We all should play a part in ________ trees.A.plant B.plantingC.to plant D.planted(A)5.The river is dirty.________ people go to swim in it.A.Few B.A few C.Little D.A little环节说明:将对话以任务型阅读的形式呈现,这样不仅能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解;对话练习还能提高学生的语言表达能力。Step 4 问题探究1.There be句型的一般将来时(1)在人们的家里将会有机器人。There__will__be__robots__in__people's__homes.(2)明天不会有一个会议。There__won't__be__a__meeting__tomorrow.(3)一百年后将会有更少的污染吗?是的,会有。/不,不会有。Will__there__be__less__pollution__in__one__hundred__years?Yes,there__will./No,there__won't.There be句型的一般将来时的构成:肯定句:There will be+名词+其他成分。【温馨提示】无论后面是单数名词还是复数形式,be都必须用原形。否定句:在will后面加not;一般疑问句:把will提到there之前,回答:Yes,there__will./No,there__won't__to.2.few,a few,little,a little,much,many(1)几乎没有朋友few__friends(2)一些朋友a__few__friends(3)几乎没有水little__water(4)一点水a__little__water(5)许多水much__water(6)许多学生many__studentsfew和a few修饰或代替可数名词,few表示否定意义,a few表示肯定意义;little和a little修饰或代替不可数名词;little表示否定意义,a little表示肯定意义。可数名词和不可数名词前都可用some,any,a lot of,lots of等修饰。可数名词表示不确定数量时,用a few,few,many修饰,询问数量时用How__many;不可数名词表示不确定数量时,用a little,little,much修饰,询问数量时,用How__much。3.more,less,fewer的用法(1)史密斯先生想挣更多的钱。Mr.Smith__wants__to__make__more__money.(2)那个杯子里的水更少。There__is__less__water__in__that__glass.(3)在那所学校里我有较少的朋友。I__have__fewer__friends__in__that__school.more是many和much的比较级,其后既可以跟可数名词复数,也可以跟不可数名词,意思是“更多”。less是little的比较级,其后只接不可数名词,意思是“更少的,较少的”。fewer是few的比较级,其后只接可数名词的复数形式,意思是“更少的,较少的”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:peace,sea,sky2.重点短语:in the future,fresh water,in the country3.重点句式:Will there be world peace?There will be more pollution.There will be less free time.1.用助动词will来表达将来时,并能熟练运用there be句型表达将来时2.明确区分可数名词或不可数名词;正确使用more,less,fewer1.用助动词will表达将来时,并能熟练运用there be句型表达将来时2.明确区分可数名词和不可数名词;正确使用more,less,fewer一、预习课本P51新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.和平__peace__ 2.海洋__sea__3.天空__sky__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.在未来__in__the__future__2.淡水__fresh__water__3.在乡下__in__the__country__4.世界将会拥有和平吗?Will__there__be__world__peace?__5.将会有更多的污染。There__will__be__more__pollution.__6.将会有更少的空闲时间。There__will__be__less__free__time.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned Simple Future Tense.Now please make some predictions with you partner.You can use “will do sth.”or “there will be” to make sentences.环节说明:通过这个环节的练习,学生复习巩固了一般将来时态的用法及构成,同时又锻炼了口语表达能力。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a中的句子,然后用more,less或fewer填空,完成后小组内互相交流答案。(3分钟)2.熟读3a的句子,然后两人一组用more,less或fewer互相提问。(3分钟 )3.你认为将来会发生什么事情呢?用你的预测来完成预言,完成后小组内互相交流。(5分钟)4.画一幅画来描绘一下你想象中的未来的城市是什么样子的。然后向全班同学描述你所画的图片。(3分钟)小结训练。(2分钟)(C)1.We should use ________ plastic bags to protect our environment.A.more B.lessC.fewer D.much(C)2.I hope people ________ to be 200 years old ________ the future.A.would live;from B.lived;forC.will live;in D.live;to(D)3.He ________ very busy this week,but he ________ free next week.A.will be;is B.is;isC.will be;will be D.is;will be(D)4.—________ you ________ free tomorrow?—No,I ________ free the day after tomorrow.A.Are;going to;willB.Are;going to be;willC.Are;going to;will beD.Are;going to be;will be环节说明:通过3a的学习,学生练习掌握了more、less和fewer的用法;3b的学习让学生巩固练习了一般将来时态。Step 4 问题探究( )There ________ a talk show on CCTV-2 at eight this evening.A.will have B.is going to beC.is having D.have答案选择B,There be的将来时态有两种:There will be…和There is/are going to be…。句意为“今天晚上八点钟,中央台第二频道有一个访谈节目。”故选B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。What__will__the__future__be__like?(将来是什么样子的?)Cities will be more__polluted(更多的污染).And there will be fewer__trees(更少的树).Will__people__use__money__in__100__years?(100年后人们将使用钱吗?)No,they won't.Everything__will__be__free.(一切将是免费的。)Will__there__be__world__peace?(世界将会和平吗?)Yes,I__hope__so.(我希望如此。)Kids__will__study__at__home__on__computers.(孩子们将会在家通过电脑学习。)They__won't__go__to__school.(他们将不用去上学。)Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:astronaut,apartment,rocket,space2.重点短语:space station3.重点句式:—Where do you live?—I live in an apartment.I will fly rockets to the moon.1.掌握关于职业、交通的单词2.巩固一般过去时态、一般现在时态和一般将来时态的用法区别巩固一般过去时态、一般现在时态和一般将来时态的用法区别一、预习课本P52新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.宇航员__astronaut__ 2.公寓__apartment__3.火箭__rocket__ 4.空间__space__二、认真预习1a-1e,找出下列短语和句型。1.太空站__space__station__2.—你住在哪里?—我住在一套公寓里。—Where do you live?—I live in an apartment.3.我将乘火箭去月球。I__will__fly__rockets__to__the__moon.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned many words about jobs,transportation and places to live.Can you say some words?(Let some students say some words that we have learned about jobs,transportation and places to live.)Today we will go on learning some new words about them.Now let's learn new words about them.环节说明:由复习学过的表示职业、交通和居住地方的单词引出本节课的新单词,过渡自然,易于引起学生的学习兴趣。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b任务1.学生领读1a单词或词组,两人一组互相提问单词。(3分钟)2.将1a方框中的单词或词组分类,完成后集体核对答案。(2分钟)3.在1a中的各个方框中填写更多的同类单词,完成后小组内互相交流答案,并大声地朗读这些单词。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(1)My family live in a big apartment in a big city.(2)I want to go to a space station.(3)My uncle is a computer programmer.(4)Yang Liwei is an astronaut.(5)People will fly rockets to the moon one day.环节说明:通过本环节的学习,学生掌握了表示职业、交通和居住地方的单词。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.听Alexis和Joe的对话,按听到的顺序给图片标号,集体核对答案,完成1c。(3分钟)2.再听一遍录音,用正确的单词来补全句子。(3分钟)3.再细心听录音,并跟读以整体感知对话。(3分钟)4.一个学生扮演Alexis,另外一个学生扮演Joe,来谈论Joe现在、十年前和十年后的生活,邀请几组学生来展示对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Where do you live?B:I live in an apartment.小结训练。(5分钟)(1)People will use money in 100 years.(变为一般疑问句,并作否定回答)Will__people__use__money__in__100__years?No,they__won't.(2)Kids will go to school every day.(变为否定句)Kids__won't__go__to__school__every__day.(3)He returned home an hour ago.(用in an hour改写)He__will__return__home__in__an__hour.(4)There will be robots in our homes.(改为一般疑问句)Will__there__be__robots__in__our__homes?(5)I will fly rockets to__the__moon.(对画线部分提问)Where__will__you__fly__rockets?环节说明:通过听力训练和对话练习,学生掌握了一般过去时态、一般现在时态和一般将来时的用法区别;小结训练让学生熟练巩固了一般将来时态的用法。Step 4 问题探究My uncle often flies to London.(改为同义句)________________________________________________________________________根据句意“我叔叔经常乘飞机去伦敦”可知,fly to…飞往……=go…by air/plane。因而答案为:My uncle often goes to London by air/plane.请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:even,human,servant,dangerous,already,factory,simple,believe,able,disagree,shape,fall,possible,impossible,side2.重点短语:over and over again,get bored,hundreds of,fall down,look for,at some point3.重点句式:They are usually like human servants.They help with the housework and do jobs like working in dirty or dangerous places.There are already robots working in factories.Some scientists believe that there will be more robots in the future.Scientists are now trying to make robots look like humans and do the same things as we do.For example,scientist James White thinks that robots will never be able to wake up and know where they are.They think that robots will even be able to talk like humans in 25 to 50 years.If buildings fall down with people inside,these snake robots can help look for people under the buildings.1.重点短语和句型2.会用will来谈论将要发生的事情重点短语和句型一、预习课本P53-54新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.甚至__even__ 2.人的__human__3.仆人__servant__ 4.危险的__dangerous__5.已经__already__ 6.工厂__factory__7.简单的__simple__ 8.相信__believe__9.能够__able__ 10.不同意__disagree__11.形状__shape__ 12.倒塌__fall__13.可能的__possible__ 14.不可能的__impossible__15.一方__side__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.多次__over__and__over__again__ 2.厌烦__get__bored__3.许多__hundreds__of__4.倒塌__fall__down__5.寻找__look__for__6.在某些时候来说__at__some__point__7.他们通常就像是人类的仆人。They__are__usually__like__human__servants.8.他们帮着做家务,帮着做一些在肮脏和危险的环境下的工作。They__help__with__the__housework__and__do__jobs__like__working__in__dirty__or__dangerous__places.9.已经有机器人在工厂里工作了。There__are__already__robots__working__in__factories.10.一些科学家相信在将来会有更多的机器人。Some__scientists__believe__that__there__will__be__more__robots__in__the__future.11.如今科学家们正在设法使机器人看起来更像人类,并且使得它们能和我们做同样的事情。Scientists__are__now__trying__to__make__robots__look__like__humans__and__do__the__same__things__as__we__do.12.例如,科学家James White认为机器人永远不会醒来并且知道他们在哪里。For__example,scientist__James__White__thinks__that__robots__will__never__be__able__to__wake__up__and__know__where__they__are.13.他们认为25到50年后机器人将会像人一样说话。They__think__that__robots__will__even__be__able__to__talk__like__humans__in__25__to__50__years.14.如果倒塌的建筑物里面有人,蛇形机器人能够帮助寻找建筑物下面的人。If__buildings__fall__down__with__people__inside,these__snake__robots__can__help__look__for__people__under__the__buildings.Step 1 情景导入(Show some pictures of robots to the students)Teacher:Do you know what they are?Yes,they are robots.In some science fiction movies,we often see many robots.Can you tell us what they look like and what they can do?Can you also tell us something else about the robots?环节说明:由机器人的图片入手,向学生提出问题,引起学生的好奇心,激发他们求知的欲望,为本课的学习做好铺垫。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.小组内互相交流各自知道的机器人,他们看起来像什么,他们能做什么。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2b短文,了解短文大意,完成2b中的填空,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.认真阅读短文,写出3项未来机器人能够完成的工作,完成后小组内交流答案。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(7分钟)(B)1.There are many people ________ in the park.A.walk B.walkingC.to walk D.walked(C)2.The old man is very kind,he always helps with ________ the children.A.look after B.looking forC.looking after D.looks after(B)3.I ________ believe he ________ come back in two days.A./;won't B.don't;willC.don't;won't D.isn't;will(B)4.I think it is possible ________ the students ________ English well.A.of;learning B.for;to learnC.of;to learn D.for;earning(C)5.It's eight o'clock.Please ________.A.wake up he B.wake up himC.wake him up D.wake his up(C)6.I lost my bike yesterday.I ________ it now.But I can't ________ it.A.look for;find B.finding;look forC.am looking for;find D.looking for;finding(C)7.There are ________ people in the cinema watching the new movie.A.two hundred of B.two hundredsC.hundreds of D.two hundreds of(C)8.The house might ________ in a few months.A.fall behind B.fall offC.fall down D.fall for环节说明:本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.认真阅读短文,根据短文内容回答,完成2d短文填空,集体核对答案,并大声朗读短文。(5分钟)2.认真观察2e中的机器人,想象一下他们能够帮助你或你的家庭做什么工作。把你的想法写出来,然后小组内交流讨论。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节的学习让学生对文章有了更深刻的理解;2e环节让学生灵活运用了一般将来时态,并锻炼了学生的想象力和书面表达能力。Step 4 问题探究1.wake up的用法(1)他每天早上6点钟醒来。He__wakes__up__at__6:00__every__morning.(2)他妈妈每天早晨6点钟把他叫醒。His__mother__wakes__him__up__at__6:00__every__morning.wake up意为“醒来,叫醒”,是动词+副词结构。如果宾语是人称代词的宾格要放到中间;如果宾语是名词既可以放到中间也可以放到末尾。( )2.—How many birds can you see in the trees?—I can see ________ birds in them.A.hundreds of B.five hundredsC.hundred of D.five hundreds of答案选择A,hundred“百”,当前面有具体数字的时候,其后不加s,不和of连用。若表示一个不确定的数目时,前面没有具体的数字时,其后要加s,而且与of连用。故正确答案为A选项。( )3.There are some boys ________ in the swimming pool.A.swim B.to swimC.swiming D.swimming答案选择D,本句含有固定句型:There is/are+sb./sth.+doing sth.表示“有某人/某物在做某事”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)—self Check1.重点单词:probably,during,holiday2.重点短语:as a reporter,during the week,the meaning of the word,both…and…3.重点句式:In 20 years,I think I'll be a newspaper reporter.As a reporter,I'll meet a lot of interesting people.My apartment will be no good for pets because it'll be too small.I'll look less smart but I'll be more comfortable.I will take a holiday in Hong Kong when possible.Nobody knows what the future will be like.I want to fly up into the sky.1.重点单词和句型2.能用will句型描述将来的生活能用will句型描述将来的生活一、预习课本P55-56新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.大概__probably__ 2.在……期间__during__3.假日__holiday__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.作为一名记者__As__a__reporter__2.在这一周期间__during__the__week__3.这个单词的意思__the__meaning__of__the__word__4.……和……__both...and...__5.二十年之后,我认为我将成为一名新闻记者。In__20__years,I__think__I'll__be__a__newspaper__reporter.6.我将接触到很多有趣的人。I__will__meet__a__lot__of__interesting__people.7.我的公寓对我的宠物是没有好处的,因为它太小了。My__apartment__will__be__no__good__for__pets__because__it'll__be__too__small.8.我看上去不那么整齐,但是我将更舒服。I'll__look__less__smart__but__I'll__be__more__comfortable.9.当有可能的时候,我将去香港度假。I__will__take__a__holiday__in__Hong__Kong__when__possible.10.没有人知道将来是什么样子的。Nobody__knows__what__the__future__will__be__like.11.我想飞上天空。I__want__to__fly__up__into__the__sky.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:The world is changing faster and faster,the life in 20 years is different from the life now.What do you think you life will be like in the future?Can you imagine the life in 20 years?Now please say something about life in the future to your partner.环节说明:让学生互相交流20年后的生活,发挥了学生的想象力,练习了一般将来时态,同时在互相交流过程中锻炼了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真阅读3a中关于Jill的未来是什么样子的短文,选用方框中的单词来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,然后大声地朗读短文。(5分钟)2.想象一下你自己20年后的生活是什么样子的,根据3b的要求项目来完成表格,你可以添加更多的内容,完成后小组内互相交流,完成3b。(3分钟)3.根据3b填写的内容仿照3a的形式来写一写20年后的生活,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师批阅点拨。(7分钟)参考案例In 20 years,I think I will be a doctor.I'll live in Beijing.Because it is the capital of China and it is a beautiful city.As a doctor,I think I will be busy to save people's lives.In the future,people will have more time to enjoy the life.So will I.I will exercise every day.I will run in the morning,and have a walk with my family after supper.I will listen to music to make me relaxed.I will play basketball with my friends on weekends.It will make me fit and happy.I will go to many countries to take vacations.In 20 years,our neighborhood will be more beautiful,there will be more parks.In the parks there will be more trees and grass.We can relax in the parks.We will also do less housework.Because we will have robots in our homes,the robots can help us do all the housework.The life in 20 years will be very good.4.以小组为单位讨论未来机器人在学业方面怎样帮助学生,把你们小组的见解写下来,然后画一幅机器人的图片。(5分钟)环节说明:通过这个教学环节,学生灵活运用了一般将来时态并锻炼了写作能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.朗读1表格中的单词,然后将这些单词按要求分类。(3分钟)2.认真阅读2中的对话,根据所学知识将对话补充完整,集体核对答案,两人结对练习对话。(5分钟)环节说明:通过本环节的学习,学生复习了more、fewer和less的用法及本单元的语法。Step 4 问题探究( )1.________ Jim ________ Tara like playing chess.A.Neither;nor B.Either;or C.Both;and答案选择C,neither...nor...和either...or...连接的词做主语时,谓语动词用单三形式,因此答案选择C( )2.He works ________ a teacher in a school.A.like B.as C.is答案选择B,like常用介词“像……一样”;as介词,意为“作为”。该句的意思是“它作为一名教师在一所学校工作”,因此选择B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 8How do you make a banana milk shake?1.重点单词:shake,blender,peel,pour2.重点短语:milk shake,turn on,cut up3.重点句式:How do you make a banana milk shake?Turn on the blender.Cut up the bananas.Pour the milk into the blender.Peel three bananas.1.学习询问和描述食物的制作过程2.能正确理解和运用祈使句描述食物的制作过程一、预习课本P57新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.摇动__shake__ 2.食物搅拌器__blender__3.剥皮__peel__ 4.倒出__pour__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.奶昔__milk__shake__2.接通__turn__on__3.切碎__cut__up__4.你怎么制作香蕉奶昔?How__do__you__make__a__banana__milk__shake?5.接通搅拌机的电源。Turn__on__the__blender.6.切碎香蕉。Cut__up__the__bananas.7.把牛奶倒进搅拌机内。Pour__the__milk__into__the__blender.8.剥香蕉皮。Peel__three__bananas.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We all know that milk shake is very delicious.I believe that most of us like it.But do you know how to make a banana milk shake?环节说明:由美味可口的奶昔引出它的做法,激起了学生的学习兴趣。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词和词组,学生识记并且互相提问这些单词和词组。(3分钟)2.认真观察图片,将这些单词和词组填在图片中的横线上,集体核对答案。(5分钟)3.大声地朗读图片中的句子,为听力做好铺垫。(2分钟)4.听录音,按听到的顺序给句子排序,师生共同核对答案。(3分钟)5.熟读制作奶昔的过程,并且三分钟背诵下来。(4分钟)6.两人一组练习对话,向大家介绍奶昔的制作过程,然后邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:How do you make a banana milk shake?B.First,peel the bananas…小结训练。(3分钟)1.Turn(turn) on the blender before you use it.2.I spent two minutes cutting(cut) up the bananas.3.Don't__drink(not drink) the orange milk shake too much.4.He put(put) on his coat and went out.5.Don't turn__on(打开) the radio,the baby is sleeping.6.Please pour__the__milk__into__the__blender(把牛奶倒进果汁机中)。7.If you want to make fruit salad,please cut__up(切碎) the fruit first.8.How do you make a banana milk__shake(奶昔)?9.Put the bananas and icecream in(把……放进) the blender.环节说明:1a-1c听说环节让学生掌握了奶昔的制作过程,小结训练巩固练习了本节课重要知识点。Step 3 问题探究1.turn on的用法(1)打开灯turn__on__the__lightturn on打开(电器等的电源),其反义词是turn__off关上。这种由“动词+副词”构成的短语中,当宾语是名词时,可置于动副词短语后面,也可以在动词和副词中间。但当宾语是代词时,则只能放在动词和副词中间。类似用法的短语还有:调高(声音)turn__up;调低turn__down;切碎cut__up等。( )2.Can you help me pour some water ________ the cup?A.in B.into C.at D.to答案选择B,pour…into…意为“把……倒入到……”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:yogurt,honey,watermelon,spoon,pot,add,finally,salt2.重点短语:another ten minutes,one more thing3.重点句式:How many bananas do we need?—How much yogurt do we need?—We need one cup of yogurt.I want to make Russian soup for a party on Saturday.Don't forget to add some salt.1.How many和How much对可数名词与不可数名词的数量进行提问2.学会用first,next,then,after that,finally描述程序学会用first,next,then,after that,finally描述程序一、预习课本P58新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.酸奶__yogurt__ 2.蜂蜜__honey__3.西瓜__watermelon__ 4.勺__spoon__5.锅__pot__ 6.增加__add__7.最后__finally__ 8.食盐__salt__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.再有十分钟__another__ten__minutes__2.还有一件事__one__more__thing__3.我们需要多少香蕉?How__many__bananas__do__we__need?4.—我们需要多少酸奶?—我们需要一杯酸奶。—How much yogurt do we need?—We need one cup of yogurt.5.我想为星期六的聚会做罗宋汤。I__want__to__make__Russian__soup__for__a__party__on__Saturday.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to make a banana milk shake.I believe we all know how to make it.Who can tell me how to make a banana milk shake?(Ask some students to describe how to make a banana milk shake.)Today I will teach you how to make Russian soup—a kind of delicious soup.Then you can make it for your parents.Let them taste the delicious soup.Do you like to learn it?Students:Yes.Teacher:OK.Let's learn how to make Russian soup together.环节说明:这个环节既让学生复习了上节课学到的知识,又引出了本节课的学习内容,一举两得。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.大声朗读2a图片中的单词并两人一组互相背诵单词。(3分钟)2.认真听录音,按要求填写2a表格,小组内核对答案并且讨论how many和how much的用法区别。(5分钟)3.再听一遍录音,在每种材料的下面写出所需要的数量,集体核对答案,完成2b。(3分钟)4.再听一遍录音,并跟读以整体感知对话内容。(3分钟)5.根据2b中的听力信息,两人一组练习对话怎样制作水果沙拉,邀请几组学生展示对话内容。参考案例A:Let's make fruit salad.B:OK,good idea.How much yogurt do we need?A:One cup.B:How many apples do we need?A:Let me think…We need two apples.B:OK,and how much…小结训练。(4分钟)用how many,how much填空。1.How__much yogurt do we need?2.How__many apples do we need?3.How__much water does he need?4.How__much salt does she want?5.How__many watermelons do they have?对画线部分提问。6.We need two spoons of honey.How__many spoons of honey do you need?7.We need two__spoons__of honey.How__much honey do you need?环节说明:本环节的学习锻炼了学生的听力和口语能力,小结训练更是巩固练习了how many和how much的用法。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.认真阅读2d对话,然后回答下列问题:(1)Does Anna have a party on Saturday?(2)How many ingredients do we need if we make Russian soup?(3)How long does it take to make Russian soup?(4)When do we add the salt when making Russian soup?2.学生自读2d对话,然后结对练习对话,并请几组学生来表演该对话。小结训练。(D)1.—________ do you make fruit salad?—First,cut up the apples,bananas and pears.A.When B.WhereC.Why D.How(B)2.Don't ________ the milk into the cup,It's full.A.peel B.pourC.leave D.drink(C)3.Please give me two ________.A.glass of apple juiceB.glasses of apple juicesC.glasses of apple juiceD.glasses apple juice(A)4.Please ________ the ingredients to the noodles.A.add B.coffeeC.cut D.pour(C)5.Today is Jim's tenth birthday.There are eight candles,so we still need ________.A.two another candlesB.more two candlesC.two more candlesD.another two candle环节说明:本环节的学习不仅让学生知道了罗宋汤的做法,更重要的是让学生掌握了用first,next,then,after that,finally描述事物的程序。Step 4 问题探究1.first,…then,…after__that,…finally,...首先,……然后,……接着,……最后,……这是英语中表达做某事的步骤的一种说法。通常你会听到英语国家的人在说first,next,then,finally和后面的内容时,他们会做一些停顿,这样就能提前告诉听者接下来讲的是一系列的步骤。这一点在朗读和听力中应特别注意。2.(1)一块面包a__piece__of__bread(2)两杯水two__glasses__of__water在不可数名词前可加much、little、some、lots__of等词修饰,还可以用“数量词+of+不可数名词”来表示不可数名词的数量。其中数量词可以用单数,也可以用复数。( )3.If you add 4________3,you will get 7.A.on B.toC.at D.for答案选择B,add…to…意为“把……加到……上”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:cheese,popcorn,corn,machine,dig,hole2.重点短语:plant a tree,make beef noodles,get a book from the library3.重点句式:Do you know how to plant a tree?1.How many和How much对可数名词与不可数名词的数量进行提问2.学会用first,next,then,after that,finally描述程序1.How many和How much对可数名词与不可数名词的数量进行提问2.学会用first,next,then,after that,finally描述程序一、预习课本P59新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.干酪__cheese__ 2.爆米花__popcorn__3.玉米__corn__ 4.机器__machine__5.挖__dig__ 6.洞__hole__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.植树__plant__a__tree__2.做牛肉面__make__beef__noodles__3.从图书馆借书__get__a__book__from__the__library__4.你知道怎么种树吗?Do__you__know__how__to__plant__a__tree?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to make Russian soup.I believe we all know how to make it.Who can tell me how to make Russian soup?(Ask some students to describe how to make Russian soup.)Today I will teach you how to make popcorn.Then you can make it for your parents.Let them taste the popcorn you make.Do you like to learn it?Students:Yes.Teacher:OK.Let's learn how to make popcorn together.环节说明:这个环节既让学生复习了上节课学到的知识,又引出了本节课的学习内容,一举两得。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a中的句子,然后圈出每个问题中正确的单词,完成后小组内互相交流答案。(3分钟)2.熟读3a的句子,然后两人一组互相提问how many和how much的用法。(3分钟)3.认真阅读3b中1-5和a-e中的句子,然后根据所学的知识补全句子,完成后请学生说出答案,教师点拨。(3分钟)4.让学生认真观察3b右侧的图片,根据图片提示把3b中的句子排序,完成爆米花的制作过程。(2分钟)5.两人一组根据图片提示分别叙述爆米花的制作过程,并邀请几名学生来叙述此过程。(5分钟)6.从3c方框中选出一件事情,来叙述它的完成过程并且把过程写下来,完成后小组内互相交流,并邀请几名学生来展示所写的内容,教师点评。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.There are some bananas here.Let me help you ________.A.cut up them B.to cut them outC.cut them up D.cutting them up(B)2.—________ butter do we need for a sandwich?—Two teaspoons should be enough.A.How many B.How muchC.How long D.How far(D)3.I walked a long way,________ I got there.A.first B.nextC.then D.finally(A)4.Please ________ the ingredients to the noodles.A.add B.put C.cut D.pour(A)5.—I'm going to Hainan with my aunt next week.—________!A.Have a good timeB.Best wishes to youC.CongratulationsD.Please go(D)6.________ cross the road until the traffic lights turn green.A.Not B.Won'tC.Doesn't D.Don't环节说明:通过3a学习,让学生练习掌握了how many和how much的用法;3b、3c的学习让学生巩固练习了如何描述程序。Step 4 问题探究( )Could you please ________ the radio a bit?It's too loud.A.turn up B.turn downC.turn off D.turn on答案选择B,本题考查turn的短语。turn up开大音量;turn down调低音量;turn off关掉;turn on打开。根据It's too loud声音太大了,确定把音量调低,所以答案选择B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。How__do__you__make__a__banana__milk__shake?(你怎么制作香蕉奶昔?)First,peel the bananas.Next,put the bananas in the blender.Then,pour the milk into the blender.Finally,turn__on the blender.How__many bananas do we need?We need three bananas.How__much yogurt do we need?We need two__cups__of__yogurt.(两杯酸奶).Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:sandwich,butter,turkey,lettuce,piece2.重点短语:in my sandwich,a piece of bread3.重点句式:—Do you like lettuce in a sandwich?—Yes,I do.First,put some butter on a piece of bread.1.可数名词与不可数名词2.学会描述三明治的制作工序学会描述三明治的制作工序一、预习课本P60新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.三明治__sandwich__ 2.黄油__butter__3.火鸡__turkey__ 4.生菜__lettuce__5.片,段__piece__二、认真预习1a-1e,找出下列短语和句型。1.在我的三明治中__in__my__sandwich__2.一片面包__a__piece__of__bread__3.你喜欢三明治里的生菜吗?Do__you__like__lettuce__in__a__sandwich?4.首先将一些黄油放到一片面包上。First,put__some__butter__on__a__piece__of__bread.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Good morning,everyone.Do you like sandwiches?Students:Yes,we do.Teacher:But do you know the story about sandwiches?Today I will tell you the story.Then tell the story about sandwiches to the students.环节说明:通过三明治由来的故事,引起学生的学习兴趣。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1.学习1a中的单词,学生识记并且两人一组互相提问。(3分钟)2.列一个清单,写出三明治中你喜欢的食物,完成后小组内互相交流。(2分钟)3.两人一组仿照1b的形式练习对话,弄清楚对方喜欢的三明治里的食物,然后邀请几组学生展示对话。(3分钟)参考案例A:Do you like lettuce in a sandwich?B:Yes,I do.A:Do you like tomatoes?B:No,I don't.小结训练。(2分钟)1.I often have some bread(面包).2.Many children like sandwiches(三明治).3.How much butter(黄油) do you need?4.My father likes to have tomato(西红柿) soup.环节说明:本环节的学习让学生熟练掌握了可数名词和不可数名词,同时也锻炼了学生的口语。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.听录音,在1a图片中圈出所听到的单词,集体核对答案,完成1c。(3分钟)2.再认真听一遍录音,按你听到的顺序写出制作三明治的原料,完成1d对话填空,教师核对答案。(3分钟)3.认真听第三遍录音,然后跟读复述三明治的制作方法。(4分钟)4.仿照1d听力形式,两人一组来练习对话,告诉搭挡你最喜欢的三明治的制作过程。(5分钟)参考案例A:First,put some butter on a piece of bread.B:How much butter?A:About one spoon.……小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.—________ there any lettuce in the bowl?—Yes,there is.A.Were B.Is C.Are D.Have(D)2.Put some butter ________ a piece of bread.A.over B.at C.in D.on(C)3.—Would you like some butter?—Yes,but ________.A.few B.little C.a little D.a few(D)4.Do you like lettuce ________ hamburgers?A.to B.with C.at D.in(D)5.How much ________do you want?A.butter B.relishC.onion D.A and B环节说明:这个环节的学习让学生熟练掌握了三明治的制作工序,同时也锻炼了学生的听力和口语表达能力。Step 4 问题探究1.put…on…与put on(1)在面包上放一些黄油。Put__some__butter__on__the__bread.(2)穿上你的大衣,外面很冷。Put__on__your__coat.It's__cold__outside.put…on…意为“把……放在……上”;put__on意为“穿上”,是动词+副词构成的动词短语,当宾语是人称代词时要放在中间,它的反义词是put__off。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:Thanksgiving,traditional,autumn,traveler,England,celebrate,mix,pepper,fill,oven,plate,cover,gravy,serve,temperature2.重点句式:In most countries,people usually eat traditional food on special holidays.It is a time to give thanks for food in the autumn.At this time,people also remember the first travelers from England who came to live in America about 400 years ago.These travelers had a long,hard winter,and many of them died.In the next autumn,they gave thanks for life and food in their new home.These days,most Americans still celebrate this idea of giving thanks by having a big meal at home with their family.The main dish of this meal is almost always turkey.Fill the turkey with this bread mix.Place the turkey on a large plate and cover it with gravy.Cut the turkey into thin pieces and eat the meat with vegetables like carrots and potatoes.1.重点短语和句型2.了解感恩节的历史及火鸡的做法1.重点短语和句型2.了解感恩节的历史及火鸡的做法一、预习课本P61-62新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.感恩节Thanksgiving 2.传统的traditional3.秋天autumn 4.旅行者traveler5.英格兰England 6.庆祝celebrate7.混合mix 8.甜椒pepper9.填满fill 10.烤箱oven11.盘子plate 12.遮盖cover13.肉汁gravy 14.接待serve15.温度temperature二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列句型。1.在大多数的国家,人们在特殊的节日通常吃传统的食物。In__most__countries,people__usually__eat__traditional__food__on__special__holidays.2.这是一个感恩秋天粮食收获的时间。It__is__a__time__to__give__thanks__for__food__in__the__autumn.3.在这个时候人们也纪念来自英国的第一批旅行者,他们400年前来到美国居住。At__this__time,people__also__remember__the__first__travelers__from__England__who__came__to__live__in__America__about__400__years__ago.4.这些旅行者渡过了一个漫长艰苦的冬季,很多人逝去了。These__travelers__had__a__long,hard__winter,and__many__of__them__died.5.在第二年秋天,他们在他们的新家感恩生活和粮食的收获。In__the__next__autumn,they__gave__thanks__for__life__and__food__in__their__new__home.6.现在,大多数的美国人仍然通过和家人一起在家共进丰盛的大餐来庆祝感恩这个想法。These__days,most__Americans__still__celebrate__this__idea__of__giving__thanks__by__having__a__big__meal__at__home__with__their__family.7.这顿饭的主要菜肴几乎总是烤火鸡。The__main__dish__of__this__meal__is__almost__always__turkey.8.用这些面包混合物填满火鸡。Fill__the__turkey__with__this__bread__mix.9.用火鸡放置到一个大盘子上,然后用肉汁覆盖它的全身。Place__the__turkey__on__a__large__plate__and__cover__it__with__gravy.10.把烤火鸡切成薄片,和胡萝卜、土豆等蔬菜一起吃。Cut__the__turkey__into__thin__pieces__and__eat__the__meat__with__vegetables__like__carrots__and__potatoes.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:There are many traditional holidays in China,like the Dragon Boat Festival,the Midautumn Day,the Spring Festival and so on.On the special holidays,we often eat traditional food.Do you know what we eat on the holidays?(Let the students answer the questions)These are all our traditional holidays in China.Do you know thanksgiving?Do you know the story about the festival?Do you know what they eat on the special holiday?Today we will learn an article about these.环节说明:由中国的传统节日以及节日饮食入手引出Thanksgiving,引起学生的学习兴趣,为本课的学习做好铺垫。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.小组内互相交流中国的传统节日及这些传统节日的饮食。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2b短文,了解短文大意,根据烤火鸡的制作步骤,将图片排序,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.认真阅读短文,回答2c中的五个问题,完成后请学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(B)1.—Don't take pictures here,please.—________.A.No way B.Sorry,I won'tC.Here you are D.It's a pleasure(D)2.—________ salt do you want?—Two teaspoons of ________.A.How many;salts B.How many;saltC.How much;salts D.How much;salt(C)3.Do you have ________ to eat?A.delicious anything B.good somethingC.anything delicious D.bad something(D)4.Paul made a nice cage ________ the little sick bird till it could fly.A.keep B.keptC.keeping D.to keep(A)5.We have no ________ in the fridge.Let's go to buy some peas,carrots and cabbages.A.vegetables B.eggsC.meat D.fruit环节说明:本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.认真阅读短文有关火鸡烹饪的方法的段落,然后结合2d的提示要求,用First,Next,Then和Finally完成填空,集体核对答案,并大声朗读短文。(5分钟)2.两人一组互相提问2e中的问题,然后根据问题的答案将其整理成一篇介绍中国传统节日及饮食的小短文,完成后小组内互相交流短文。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节让学生对烤火鸡的制作步骤有了更深刻的理解;2e环节锻炼了学生的口语表达能力和书面表达能力,同时让学生对中国的传统节日有了更深刻的理解。Step 4 问题探究1.fill的用法(1)用水把杯子装满。Fill__the__bottle__with__water.(2)杯子里装满了水。The__bottle__is__filled__with__water.fill意为“装满”,经常用到的句型:用……装满……fill…with…;……被……充满…be__filled__with…2.cover的用法(1)用报纸盖住食物。Cover__the__food__with__the__newspaper.(2)食物被报纸覆盖了。The__food__is__covered__with__the__newspaper.cover意为“覆盖”,经常用到的句型:用……盖住……cover…with…;……被……盖住:…be__covered__with…。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:rice noodles,one by one2.重点句式:Cut the chicken into pieces.It's time to enjoy the rice noodles.1.复习巩固所学过的重要单词、短语和句型2.会叙述食物的制作过程会用学过的知识点来介绍食物的制作过程一、预习课本3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.米线__rice__noodles__2.逐一__one__by__one__3.把鸡肉切成片。__cut__the__chicken__into__pieces.__4.享受米线的时间到了。__It's__time__to__enjoy__the__rice__noodles.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone.We all know that there are many kinds of delicious food in China.Rice noodles are very popular in Yunnan.Many people like to eat them.I'm sure most of us have eaten them.But do you know how to make rice noodles?Do you want to make them for your family and yourself?Today we will learn a short passage about how to make rice noodles.I hope you can make some rice noodles for yourself.环节说明:由人人爱吃的米线,引出它的做法,激起了学生的学习兴趣,为课堂学习做好铺垫。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真阅读3a中关于米线的烹饪方法的短文,选用方框中的单词来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,然后大声地朗读短文。(5分钟)2.想一种你喜欢的食物的烹饪方法,然后把所用到的材料列出一个清单,完成3b。(3分钟)3.根据3b填写的内容仿照3a的形式来介绍一种你最喜爱的食物的烹饪方法,然后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查,点拨。(7分钟)参考案例Beef Stew with tomatoesIn my town,the people all like eating beef stew with tomatoes.It's very delicious.Now let me tell you how to cook it.To make this special food,you need to have some beef and some tomatoes.First,cut two tomatoes and some beef into small pieces.Then,place some oil into a pan and heat.After that,put tomatoes and beef into the pan to fry a few minutes.And then add some bowls of water into it and cook it for about two hours.At last,put some salt and seasoning.Now it's time for you to enjoy it.4.和你的搭档一起编一个离奇的食谱,然后告诉另外一组搭档这种离奇食物的烹饪方法,他们将根据你们的描述把它画下来。(5分钟)环节说明:这个教学环节让学生熟练掌握了食物制作过程的表达,同时练习了本单元的写作并锻炼了学生的写作能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.认真阅读做西红柿蛋汤的步骤,将这些步骤按正确的顺序排列,然后用左侧方框中的单词补全句子,集体核对答案,并大声的朗读西红柿鸡蛋汤的做法。(4分)2.根据提示内容利用所学的知识完成2中的问句答语,邀请几位学生到黑板上板演答案,教师点评。(5分钟)环节说明:本环节的学习让学生掌握了本单元的重要句型及first,next,then,after that,finally描述程序的用法。Step 4 问题探究( )Please retell the story ________.A.over and over again B.one by oneC.day and day答案选择B:over and over again意为“多次,反复的”;day and day意为“一天又一天”;one by one意为“一个接一个”。根据句意“一个接一个地复述故事”,故选择B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 9Can you come to my party?1.重点单词:prepare,exam,flu2.重点短语:prepare for an exam,have the flu3.重点句式:—Can you come to my party on Saturday afternoon?—Sure,I'd love to./Sorry,I can't.I have to prepare for an exam. /I'm sorry,too.I must go to the doctor.1.会用“Can you…?”来对别人发出邀请2.学会接受和拒绝对方的邀请1.熟练掌握情态动词can的用法2.学会有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请一、预习课本P65新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.准备__prepare__ 2.考试__exam__3.流感__flu__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.准备考试__prepare__for__an__exam__2.去看医生__go__to__the__doctor__3.患流感__have__the__flu__4.来参加我的舞会__come__to__my__party__5.——你能在星期六的下午参加我的聚会吗?——当然了,我非常乐意去。/抱歉我不能。我必须要准备考试。/我也很抱歉,我必须去看医生。 —Can you come to my party on Saturday afternoon?—Sure,I'd love to./Sorry,I can't.I have to prepare for an exam. /I'm sorry,too.I must go to the doctor. Step 1 情景导入Teacher:I'm very happy today,because it is my birthday tomorrow,and I am going to have a birthday party.Would you like to come to my party?Students:Yes,we'd love to.Teacher:Welcome to my party.But do you know another way of saying “Would you like to come to my birthday party”? You don't need to be worried,today we will learn it.Now let's learn “Unit 9 Can you come to my party?”环节说明:由过生日邀请学生参加生日聚会引出将要学习的新句型,过渡自然,简洁明了。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.教师教读65页的新词组,学生领读1a中的词组,两人一组背诵并互相提问。(5分钟)2.教师抽查学生的背诵情况,之后让学生认真观察图片中人物的活动并把短语和图片匹配,集体核对答案,完成1a。(3分钟)3.请学生大声朗读1a图片中的对话,了解大意,为听力做好铺垫。(2分钟)4.听录音,根据录音内容,把1b中的人物名字写在1a图片中相应的学生旁边,集体核对答案。(3分钟)5.再听一遍录音,并大声地跟读对话。(3分钟)6.利用1a中的短语,仿照1c中的形式小组内练习发出、接受或拒绝邀请的对话,邀请几组学生来展示对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(D)1.I usually watch TV with parents ________ Sunday evening.A.in B.at C.for D.on(C)2.—What is your mother doing?—She is preparing ________ dinner for us.A.in B.at C.for D.to环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.can表示邀请的用法——你能参加我们的英语联欢会吗?——当然,我非常愿意。/对不起,我不能。—Can__you__come__to__our__English__party?—Sure,I'd__love__to./Sorry,I__can't.Can you…?是向对方发出邀请或请求时所用的句型,肯定回答用Yes,I'd__love__to,它是I would love to的缩略形式,等于I__would__like__to。否定回答用Sorry,but…,在表示拒绝时,口气应该委婉,先用“对不起”,然后用but引出要陈述的理由。2.prepare的用法(1)他爸爸正在为会议做准备。His__father__is__preparing__for__the__meeting.(2)吉姆正准备去旅行。Jim__is__preparing__to__travel.(3)你必须为他们准备好食物。You__must__prepare__food__for__them.(4)父亲在为我小弟弟上学做准备。Father__is__preparing__my__little__brother__for__school.prepare意为“准备”,经常用到的句型:(1)为……做准备,for是准备的目的prepare__for…;(2)准备做某事prepare__to__do__sth.;(3)为……准备某事prepare__sth.for…;(4)使某人准备做某事prepare__sb.to__do__sth.请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:available,until,hang,catch2.重点短语:another time,go bike riding,last fall,hang out3.重点句式:I'm not available.I have too much homework this weekend.Thanks for askingI remember we went bike riding together last fall when he visited you.Sam isn't leaving until next Wednesday.Can you hang out with us on Monday night?Catch you on Monday.1.can的用法2.学会有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请1.can的用法2.学会有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请一、预习课本P66新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.有空的__available__ 2.到……时__until__3.悬挂__hang__ 4.抓住__catch__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.别的时间__another__time__2.骑自行车旅行__go__bike__riding__3.去年秋天__last__fall__4.闲逛__hang__out__5.我没有时间,这个周末我有太多的作业。__I'm__not__available,__I__have__too__much__homework__this__weekend.__6.我记得去年秋天他来看你时我们一起骑自行车旅行。__I__remember__we__went__bike__riding__together__last__fall__when__he__visited__you.__7.萨姆直到下周三才离开。__Sam__isn't__leaving__until__next__Wednesday.__8.你周一晚上和我们一起随便逛逛吗?__Can__you__hang__out__with__us__on__Monday__night?9.周一联系你。__Catch__you__on__Monday.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Would you like to come to my birthday party?Student 1:Sure,I'd love to.Student 2:I'm sorry.I have to prepare for my English exam.Student 3:I'm sorry,too.I have the flu.Teacher:Now please practice the conversations like this with your partners in group.环节说明:通过师生对话、生生对话,既复习了上节课的语言目标——发出、接受及拒绝邀请,又练习了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.认真阅读2中的句子,为听力做好准备。(2分钟)2.认真听录音,根据听力内容圈出can或can't。(3分钟)3.认真听一遍录音,写出谁不能参加聚会及其原因,完成2b中的表格。(3分钟)4.再听一遍录音订正2a和2b的答案。(4分钟)5.认真阅读2b表格中的原因,再添加更多的原因,然后两人一组仿照2c对话形式来练习对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(2分钟)(B)1.—Would you like to play basketball with us?—Yes,I'd love to.________I'm afraid I have no time.A.So B.But C.Or D.And(C)2.—Harbin is really a beautiful city and there're many places of interest.—So it is.Why not stay here for ________ two days?A.other B.othersC.another D.the other环节说明:通过读、写、听、说学习训练让学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,回答下面的问题。(5分钟)(1)Who is going to Jeff's house on Saturday?(2)Did Sam visit Jeff last year?(3)Why doesn't Nick go to Jeff's house?(4)When is Sam leaving?(5)What will Jeff do on Monday night?2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.He won't go home until he ________ his homework.A.finish B.finishesC.will finish D.is finishing(D)2.Tomorrow is Saturday.I have nothing to do.What about ________?A.hang out B.to hang outC.hangs out D.hanging out3.Can you go to the movies with me?(肯定回答)Sure,I'd__love__to.4.Can you come to my house for dinner?(否定回答)Sorry,I__can't.环节说明:将对话问题化,既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。Step 4 问题探究1.hang的用法(1)她把衣服挂在了晾衣绳上。She__hung__the__clothes__on__the__line.(2)这个女人昨天晚上自杀了。The__woman__hanged__herself__last__night.Hang表示“悬挂”的意思时,是不规则动词,过去式和过去分词都是hung;表示“吊死、绞死”的意思时,是规则动词,过去式和过去分词均为hanged。2.until的用法(1)我会一直工作到他叫我停下来为止。I__will__keep__working__until__he__asks__me__to__stop.(2)她直到做完作业,才去睡觉。She__didn't__go__to__bed__until__she__finished__homework.(3)我们要直到雨停了才回家。We__won't__go__home__until__the__rain__stops.until是中考英语试题中常考的词汇之一,它既可以用作介词,又可用作连词。作介词时,后面要接具体的名词;作连词用时,后面要接从句。在until引导的时间状语从句中,如果句子(主句)的谓语动词是持续性动词(即动作可以延续一段时间的动词),那么这个句子(主句)常常用肯定式,表示动作一直延续到until所表示的时间为止。这时until可译作“直到……为止”。在until引导的时间状语从句中,如果句子(主句)的谓语动词是短暂性动词(即动作一会儿就结束的动词),常常要用否定式,表示某一动作到until所表示的时间才发生。not…until…意为“直到……才……”。until用作连词引导时间状语从句时,主句用将来时(或主句是祈使句时),until引导的时间状语从句要用一般现在时。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:invite,accept,refuse2.重点句式:—Can you go to the movies tomorrow night?—I'm afraid not.I have the flu.They might have to meet their friends.When will you finish the science homework?Are you free to come to my place on Saturday?1.情态动词might的用法2.学会有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请1.情态动词might的用法2.学会有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请。一、预习课本P67新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.邀请__invite__ 2.接受__accept__3.拒绝__refuse__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列句型。1.——你明天晚上去看电影吗?——恐怕不能,我感冒了。 —Can you go to the movies tomorrow night?—I'm afraid not. I have the flu. 2.我们也许必须要去见朋友。__They__might__have__to__meet__their__friends.__3.你将什么时候完成你的科学作业?__When__will__you__finish__the__science__homework?4.你星期六有空来我这里吗?__Are__you__free__to__come__to__my__place__on__Saturday?__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to make an invitation,we also have learned how to accept and refuse an invitation.Now please make conversations with your partner about what we have learned.环节说明:这个环节的学习既让学生复习了上节课学到的知识,又引出了本节课的学习内容,锻炼了学生的口语表达能力。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a中5组对话,然后用might和方框中的其中一个短语来写出问题的答案。完成后老师让几名学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(3分钟)2.两人一组大声地朗读3a中的对话。(3分钟)3.根据要求和括号内所给的提示词,来完成3b中的句子,邀请几名学生到黑板上板演答案,完成后小组互相交流答案,教师点拨黑板上学生所写的句子。(5分钟)4.在3c的表格中填写出下周每天你要做的事情,选择其中的一天的某个时间举行一个聚会,然后仿照3c的对话形式来邀请你的同学参加你的聚会。参考案例A:Can you come to my party?B:When is it?A:Next week,on Thursday night.B:I'm sorry.I have to study for a math test.小结训练。(2分钟)1.Thank you for inviting me.(改为同义句)Thanks__for__asking__me.2.Jeff can join the baseball game.(改为否定句)Jeff__can't__join__the__baseball__game.3.She has to go to school.(改为一般疑问句)Does__she__have__to__go__to__school?4.Can you come to my house for dinner?(肯定回答)Sure,I'd__love__to.5.I am going to the movies with my__parents.(对画线部分提问)Who__are__you__going__to__the__movies__with?环节说明:通过3a环节的学习,学生练习掌握了情态动词might的用法;3b和3c环节的学习让学生熟练掌握了发出、接受和拒绝邀请的句型。Step 4 问题探究1.might的用法(1)我可以问你一个问题吗?Might__I__ask__you__a__question?(2)史密斯先生或许是对的。Mr.Smith__might__be__right.(3)你可以请他帮忙嘛。You__might__ask__him__for__help.might意为“或许,可能”,主要有以下用法:might表示请求允许。但“Might I…?”比“May I…?”更客气,但是不如“May I…?”常用;might表示说话人的推测,其把握性比may小;might用于委婉地提出建议、责备等。2.invite的用法(1)谢谢你的邀请。Thanks__for__your__invitation.(2)我的老师上周邀请我去他家。My__teacher__invited__me__to__his__home__last__week.(3)我的朋友经常邀请我去看电影。My__friends__often__invite__me__to__go__to__the__movies.invite意为“邀请”,是动词,其名词为invitation。作为动词经常用到的句型为:(1)邀请某人去某地invite__sb.to__sw.(2)邀请某人做某事invite__sb.to__do__sth.( )3.I ________ a gift from my classmate yesterday,but it's very valuable.So I can't ________ it.A.receive;acceptB.accept;receiveC.received;acceptD.accepted;receive答案选择C,accept意为“收到并接受”,而receive只是“收到”,不一定“接受”。根据本题句意“我昨天收到了来自我朋友的礼物,但是它太贵重了,我不能接受。”判断第一个空填receive,第二个空填accept,又根据yesterday和can't判定最终答案为C。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Can__you__come__to__my__party__on__Saturday?(你星期六能参加我的聚会吗?)Sure,I'd__love__to./Sorry,I must study for a math test.Can__you__go__to__the__movies__tomorrow__night?(你明天晚上能去看电影吗?)Sure.That sounds great./I'm__afraid__not.I__have__the__flu.(我恐怕不能去,我得感冒了。)Can__he__go__to__the__party?(他能参加聚会吗?)No,he__can't.He has to help his parents.Can__she__go__to__the__baseball__game?(她能去参加棒球比赛吗?)No,she's__not__available.She__must__go__to__the__doctor.(她没有空,她必须要去看医生。)Can__they__go__to__the__movies?(他们能去看电影吗?)No,they are not free.They__might__have__to__meet__their__friends.(他们也许必须要去见他们的朋友。)Section B(1a-1f)1.重点单词:weekday2.重点短语:the day before yesterday,the day after tomorrow,look after3.重点句式:—What's today?—It's Monday the 14th.1.熟悉对星期的询问及回答;学会日期的表达法2.灵活地将星期和日期用到发出或接受邀请的谈话中以丰富交际能力1.熟悉对星期的询问及回答;学会日期的表达法2.灵活地将星期和日期用到发出或接受邀请的谈话中以丰富交际能力一、预习课本P68新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。工作日__weekday__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列短语和句型。1.前天__the__day__before__yesterday__2.后天__the__day__after__tomorrow__3.照料__look__after__4.——今天几号,星期几?——今天14号,星期一。—What's today?—It's Monday the 14th. Step 1 情景导入Teacher:This is a calendar.Now please look at it.What's the date today?Students:It's…Teacher:What day is it today?Students:It's…Teacher:Very good.Do you know how to answer the question “What's today”? It's very easy.Today we will learn how to answer it.环节说明:由学过的询问日期和星期的句型入手,既复习了学过的知识又为本节课的学习做好准备。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中表示星期的单词,教师纠正读音。然后学生背诵识记并且两人一组互相检测。(4分钟)2.在1a表格中填写这周的日期,完成后小组内互相交流。(2分钟)3.学生朗读并识记1b中的单词或词组,两人一组互相提问。然后在1a日历上的相应日期下面写下这些单词,小组交流,完成1b。(3分钟)4.两人一组,用1a中的日期仿照1c的对话形式来做问答练习,然后邀请几组学生展示对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:What's today?B:It's Monday 14th.小结训练。(对画线部分提问)(2分钟)1.It's Monday today.What__day__is__it__today?2.It was January__21st yesterday.What__was__the__date__yesterday?3.It is Sunday__the__12th.What's__today?环节说明:本环节的学习让学生熟练掌握了星期、日期的询问方法及答语。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.朗读1d中的短语,并在小组内互相提问。(3分钟)2.认真听录音,根据内容回答问题:Can Vince play with Andy?圈出正确答案Yes或No,集体核对答案,完成1d。3.再认真听一遍录音,将1d表格中的活动和日期连起来,集体核对答案,完成1e。(2分钟)3.细心听录音,并跟读,整体感知对话。(2分钟)4.分角色表演对话,学生A扮演Andy,学生B扮演Vince。Andy邀请Vince去打网球,就此情景两人练习对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Hi,Vince.Can you play tennis with me?B:When?A:Today.B:Sorry,I can't.I…小结训练。(2分钟)(B)1.—What's the ________ today?—It's September 12,2009.A.day B.date C.month D.week(C)2.—What day ________ it the day before yesterday?—It was Friday.A.is B.are C.was D.were环节说明:听说读写相结合,全方位训练学生的能力,使学生牢固掌握语言目标。Step 4 问题探究1.——今天几号,星期几?——今天23号,星期二。—What's today?—It's Tuesday the 23rd.本句用来询问星期和日期,回答通常为星期和日期,星期在前,日期在后。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:invitation,reply,forward,delete,print,sad,goodbye,glad,preparation,glue,without,surprised,housewarming.2.重点短语:accept an invitation,make an invitation,turn down an invitation,take a trip,at the end of,help out,look forward to,hear from3.重点句式:What a great idea!She helped me to improve my English so much.The party is the best way to say “Thank you and goodbye.”I already have a great idea about how to do that.My family is taking a trip to Wuhan at the end of this month to visit my aunt and my uncle.Let me know if you need my help.To show how much we're going to miss her,let's have a surprise party for her next Friday the 28th.Bring Ms.Steen to the party without telling her so that she can be surprised.I look forward to hearing from you all.1.重点短语和句型2.会向他人发出邀请,并且会接受和拒绝对方的邀请1.重点短语和句型2.会向他人发出邀请,并且会接受和拒绝对方的的邀请一、预习课本P69-70新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.邀请__invitation__ 2.回复__reply__3.发送__forward__ 4.删除__delete__5.打印__print__ 6.悲伤__sad__7.再见__goodbye__ 8.高兴__glad__9.准备__prepare__ 10.胶水__glue__11.没有without 12.惊奇的surprised13.乔迁聚会__housewarming__二、认真预习2a-2e的内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.接受邀请__accept__an__invitation__2.发出邀请__make__an__invitation__3.拒绝邀请__turn__down__an__invitation__4.去旅行__take__a__trip__5.在……的末尾__at__the__end__of__6.帮助__help__out__7.盼望__look__forward__to__8.收到来信__hear__from__9.真是一个好主意!__What__a__great__idea!__10.她帮助我很大地提高了我的英语水平。__She__helped__me__to__improve__my__English__so__much.__11.这个聚会是最好的道谢和送别的方式了。__The__party__is__the__best__way__to__say__“Thank__you__and__goodbye.”__12.我已经有了一个怎么去做它的很好的想法了。__I__already__have__a__great__idea__about__how__to__do__that.__13.我的一家人要在这个月底去武汉旅行并看望我的叔叔和婶婶。__My__family__is__taking__a__trip__to__Wuhan__at__the__end__of__this__month__to__visit__my__aunt__and__my__uncle.__14.让我知道你是否需要我的帮助。__Let__me__know__if__you__need__my__help.__15.为了表明我们是多么的想念她,让我们在28号下周五举行一个惊喜派对。__To__show__how__much__we're__going__to__miss__her,let's__have__a__surprise__party__for__her__next__Friday__the__28th.__16.在没有告诉Ms.Steen的情况下把她带去参加聚会,以便使她感到意外。__Bring__Ms.Steen__to__the__party__without__telling__her__so__that__she__can__be__surprised.__17.我期待收到你们所有人的来信。__I__look__forward__to__hearing__from__you__all.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to make a conversation about making,accepting and turning down an invitation.But do you know how to write something about the invitation?Today we will learn it.环节说明:由对话发出、接受和拒绝邀请过渡到文字写作发出、接受和拒绝邀请,开门见山,直奔主题。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.小组内互相交流聚会的种类,然后在2a的横线上写下来。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2a短文,了解短文大意,把人们写文章的原因与每篇短文匹配。(3分钟)3.认真阅读2a的短文,回答2c中的五个问题,完成后请学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(D)1.I'll invite some classmates ________ to the English evening.A.come B.comingC.to coming D.to come(B)2.Will you please ________ to my email by Saturday?A.answer B.replyC.delete D.print(C)3.I was ill.That's ________ I didn't go to your party.A.because B.whereC.why D.what(D)4.—What's the weather like ________?—The radio says it is going to be raining.A.yesterdayB.last SundayC.the day before yesterdayD.tomorrow(A)5.There are trees on ________ side of the street.A.each B.allC.both D.many环节说明:本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.认真阅读69页的信息,用信息中的单词和短语来补全2d的邀请,完成后集体核对答案,并大声朗读短文。(5分钟)2.两人一组互相提问2e中的问题,然后根据问题的答案将其整理成一篇为老师送行的派对计划。完成后小组内互相交流短文。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节让学生对邀请函的写法有了更深刻的理解,2e环节锻炼了学生的口语表达能力和书面表达能力。Step 4 问题探究( )1.We will have an exam ________ this month.A.in the end B.at the end ofC.by the end of D.to the end of答案选择B,at the end of意思是“在……尽头(末端)”,后面可接地点或时间名词,通常与一般过去时或一般将来时连用;by the end of意思是“到……为止”,仅指时间,指某一动作在某时间点以前或到某一时间段为止就已发生或完成,多用于过去完成时。若后面接的是将来时间,句子要用将来时态;in the end意为“最终、最后”,与at last或者finally同义。( )2.The best way ________ is to work hard.A.to succeed B.succeedC.succeeding D.succeeded答案选择A,the best way to do sth.意为“做某事的最好的方法”,其中动词不定式to do作后置定语。( )3.We will go to the beach tomorrow.But do you know ________?A.when will we startB.when we startC.when we will startD.when to start答案选择C,本句是含有宾语从句的复合句,A选项语序不对,B选项时态不对,D选项是“疑问词+动词不定式”在句子中充当宾语成分。( )4.The boy was very angry,he went out ________ saying anything.A.with B.withoutC.at D.for答案选择B,根据句意“这个男孩很生气,什么都没有说就出去了”可知应该表示否定意思,故选择without,without意为“没有”,是介词,其后要跟动名词。( )5.I haven't seen him for a long time.I look forward to ________ him soon.A.see B.seeingC.to see D.saw答案选择B,look forward to doing sth.期待做某事。( )6.I often write to my friend and I also ________ him.A.hear of B.hear aboutC.hear from答案选择C,根据句意“我经常给我的朋友写信,我也收到他的来信”可知应该选择hear from,意为“收到某人的来信”,hear from的宾语是人。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:opening,concert,daytime,headmaster,event,guest,calendar2.重点短语:reply to the invitation3.重点句式:I would like to invite you to the opening of our new library at No.9 High school.I would also like to invite each parent to bring one book as a gift for the new library.Please reply in writing to this invitation by Friday,December 20th.1.会写邀请函2.复习有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请会写邀请函一、预习课本P71-72新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.开幕仪式__opening__ 2.音乐会__concert__3.白天__daytime__ 4.校长__headmaster__5.大事__event__ 6.客人__guest__7.日历__calendar__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.回复邀请__reply__to__the__invitation__2.我想邀请您参加第九中学图书馆的开幕仪式。__I__would__like__to__invite__you__to__the__opening__of__our__new__library__at__No.9__high__school.__3.我也想邀请每一位父(母)亲带来一本书作为送给新图书馆的礼物。__I__would__also__like__to__invite__each__parent__to__bring__one__book__as__a__gift__for__the__new__library.__4.请在12月20日,星期五之前写信回复这个邀请。__Please__reply__in__writing__to__this__invitation__by__Friday,__December__20th.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:There is an opening of a new library at a school,you want to invite some parents to come to the school and let them bring some gifts,do you know how to write an invitation to the parents?Do you know how to write invitations about other events?Today we will learn to write invitations about events.环节说明:由询问学生新图书馆开幕式的邀请函的写法引出重大事件的邀请函,明确了本节课的学习任务——邀请函的写法。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.快速阅读3a短文,了解短文大意。(2分钟)2.认真阅读短文,回答3a中的六个问题,完成后请学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(5分钟)3.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作总结邀请函的写法。(5分钟)4.教师点拨邀请函的写法。(3分钟)5.认真阅读3b中的问题,根据问题提示仿照3a的形式来写一个聚会或其它重大事件的邀请函,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查,点拨。(7分钟)参考案例Dear classmates of Class Four,I would like to invite you to my birthday party.The party will be on the evening of Friday at 7:00.We will have it at my house.You needn't bring anything,but I think you should prepare some funny stories or English songs for the party.You should dress casually.We will play some games at the party.I would like to see you all at the party.If you want to come to the party,please reply in writing to this invitation by Wednesday.Jim6.两人一组互相回复对方的邀请,完成后互相交流借鉴。(5分钟)参考案例Dear Jim,I would like to come to your birthday party,but I'm not available.My uncle will come back from the UK.I am going to see him at the airport on Tuesday,and show him around the city.However,thanks for inviting me to you party all the same.I hope you all have a good time.7.两人一组按要求完成4的对话练习,学生A看右侧的日程安排,学生B看81页的日程安排表,然后通过对话的形式来找出两个人都能去购物的时间,并邀请学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Can you go shopping with me next week?B:Sure,I'd love to.When?A:Well,what are you going to do on Monday evening?B:I must study for the English test.What about Tuesday evening?……环节说明:3a-3b教学环节让学生熟练掌握了邀请函的写法,同时练习了本单元的写作并锻炼了学生的写作能力;4环节练习了学生的口语表达能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.认真阅读1中的对话,根据所学的知识将对话补充完整,集体核对答案,然后让学生们4人一组练习对话并邀请学生展示对话。(4分钟)2.认真阅读2中的邀请句型,然后写出拒绝邀请的句型及理由,邀请几位学生到黑板上板演答案,教师点评。(5分钟)环节说明:本环节的学习让学生熟练掌握了本单元的语言目标——发出、接受和拒绝邀请。Step 4 问题探究( )Would you like to come to the ________ of the new school?A.open B.openedC.opening D.opens答案选择C,the opening of…意为“……的开幕仪式”,opening为名词。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 10If you go to the party,you'll have a great time!重点句式:If you go to the party,you'll have a great time.I think I'll wear jeans to the party.Who will you go with?1.学习if引导的条件状语从句2.能用“I think I'll…”来表达作出的决定if引导的条件状语从句认真预习1a-1c,找出下列句型。1.如果你参加聚会,你就会玩得愉快。__If__you__go__to__the__party,__you'll__have__a__great__time.2.我想我将穿着牛仔裤去参加聚会。__I__think__I'll__wear__jeans__to__the__party.__3.你将和谁一起去?__Who__will__you__go__with?__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone,are you happy?I'm very happy.If I am happy,I will listen to the tape.Do you want to listen?Now let's listen to If You Are Happy together.(Play the song If You Are Happy to the students.)环节说明:用歌曲If Your Are Happy导入新课,让学生在歌声中轻松的进入学习状态,且切入学习主题,并在歌声中提前感知if的用法。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生认真观察1a图片,将句子与图片搭配,集体核对答案。(2分钟)2.大声朗读1a中的小对话,为听力做好准备。(2分钟)3.认真听录音,完成1a中的句子,集体核对答案,完成课本上1b的听力任务。(3分钟)4.再听一遍录音,大声跟读整体感知对话内容。(3分钟)5.根据1a图片中的内容信息,两人一组仿照1c的形式来编练新对话,并请一些学生表演出他们的对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Are you going to the party tomorrow night?B:Yes,I am.A:Who will you go with?B:I think I'll go with Karen and Anna.A:If you do,you'll have a great time.小结训练。(3分钟)1.If he goes(go) to the movies,he won't finish his work.2.If I become(become) a doctor,I can help others.3.If we have(have) time,we will go to the park tomorrow.4.If you shout(shout) at the party,you will__have(have) to leave.5.If I go to college,I will__be(be) a college student.6.If I like(like) the ball,I will__buy(buy) it.7.If Tom gets(get) good grades,his parents will__be(be) happy.8.If it doesn't__rain(not rain) tomorrow,he will__go(go) to the mountains.环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.If引导的条件状语从句(1)如果明天不下雨,我就去公园。If__it__doesn't__rain__tomorrow,I'll__go__to__the__park.(2)如果想取得好成绩,你必须努力学习。If__you__want__to__get__good__grades,you__must__study__hard.(3)如果你有问题请举手。If__you__have__some__questions,please__hands__up.if意为“如果”,引导的句子在复合句中表示条件,在做主句的条件状语,称为条件状语从句。从句可以放在主句前或主句后,从前主后用逗号隔开,主前从后if连接。if引导的条件状语从句与主句的时态:(1)主将从现:如果主句是一般将来时,从句则用一般现在时表将来。(2)主情从现:主句含有must,may,can等情态动词,从句用一般现在时表将来。(3)主祈从现:如果主句是祈使句,从句用一般现在时表将来。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:meeting,video,organize,chocolate2.重点短语:talk about,a class meeting,watch a video,half the class,potato chips3.重点句式:What will happen if they watch a video at the party?What will Mark organize?When is a good time to have the party?For the party next week,should we ask people to bring food?If we ask people to bring food,they will just bring potato chips and chocolate because they'll be too lazy to cook.Do you think we should give people some small gifts if they win?The games will be more exciting.1.熟练运用if引导的条件状语从句2.运用What对if引导的句子所产生的结构进行提问1.熟练运用if引导的条件状语从句2.运用What对if引导的句子所产生的结构进行提问一、预习课本P74新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.会议__meeting__ 2.录音带__video__3.组织__organize__ 4.巧克力__chocolate__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.谈论__talk__about__2.一次班会__a__class__meeting__3.看录像__watch__a__video__4.一半的学生__half__the__class__5.炸薯条__potato__chips__6.如果他们在聚会上看录像将会发生什么事情?__What__will__happen__if__they__watch__a__video__at__the__party?__7.马克将组织什么?__What__will__Mark__organize?__8.什么时间举行聚会好呢?__When__is__a__good__time__to__have__the__party?__9.对于下周的聚会,我们应该让人们带食物吗?__For__the__party__next__week,should__we__ask__people__to__bring__food?__10.如果我们让人们带食物,他们将只会带炸薯条和巧克力因为他们太懒了而不去做。__If__we__ask__people__to__bring__food,they__will__just__bring__potato__chips__and__chocolate__because__they'll__be__too__lazy__to__cook.__11.如果人们获胜了,你认为我们应该给他们一些小礼物吗?__Do__you__think__we__should__give__people__some__small__gifts__if__they__win?__12.游戏将会更令人兴奋。__The__games__will__be__more__exciting.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to make sentences with “If” yesterday.Now please make sentences with “if” like this:If it is sunny tomorrow,I will go to the zoo.I will visit my grandparents if I have enough time.……环节说明:通过用if来编写句子复习上节课的内容,并且为新课的学习做好了铺垫。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.认真阅读2a中的句子,然后听录音,根据录音内容圈出正确的答案来完成1a中的句子,完成后集体核对答案。(4分钟)2.认真阅读2b中的句子,然后听录音,根据录音内容选择正确的答案来回答每一个问题,核对答案后大声朗读句子。(4分钟)3.听第三遍录音,跟读并从整体上感知对话内容。(2分钟)4.根据2b的听力信息,分角色表演Nelly和Mark的对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:OK,when is a good time to have the party?B:Let's have it today.A:Hmm.If we have it today,half the students won't come.小结训练。(2分钟)(C)1.It's a good time ________ Hainan Island in autumn.A.visit B.visitingC.to visit D.visits(B)2.—I wonder if it is going to rain next week.—If it ________,I have to stay at home.A.is B.does C.do D.will(B)3.If we ________ pay attention to the safety of food,our health ________ in danger.A.isn't;is B.don't;will beC.won't;is D.isn't;will be(D)4.What ________ if we don't work hard?A.is happened B.will happenedC.was happening D.will happen(D)5.________ you work hard,you will do well in English.A.Until B.BeforeC.Why D.If环节说明:通过听、说学习训练让学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力和听力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,根据对话内容完成下列句子。(5分钟)(1)Jeff and Ben will have a party ________.(2)They will give people ________ if they win.(3)Ben thinks people will bring potato chips and chocolate because ________.2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)1.Please ask the children not__to__play(not play) in the street.2.Let's ride(ride) our bikes to the open air.3.The students will go to the Summer Palace if it doesn't__rain(not rain) tomorrow.4.The teacher took(take) his phone away when he was sending messages in class.5.If you bring snacks to school,the teacher will__be(are) angry.6.I want to__have(have) a class party.7.What will__happen(happen) if you have a meeting tomorrow?8.What should we do(do) if they can't come on time?9.We are all excited about the exciting news.(excite)环节说明:将对话转化成填空题,这样能对所学的重要句型起到复习巩固的作用。Step 4 问题探究( )1.I have a lot of homework ________.A.do B.doing C.did D.to do答案选择D,本题考查动词不定式做定语,常常放在被修饰词之后,故正确答案为D选项。( )2.If you have a headache,you should ________ a doctor.A.see B.to see C.seeing D.saw答案选择A,should意为“应该”,是情态动词,后面跟动词原形,所以答案选择A。3.half的用法(1)半个小时half__an__hour(2)这个苹果一半是坏的Half__of__the__apple__is__bad.(3)三个半小时three__hours__and__a__half/three__and__a__half__hourshalf作形容词,意为“一半的”,一般要放在名词、代词之前。“half+名词”作主语时,谓语动词的单、复数形式由所接名词的单、复数形式来决定,名词是中心词。half还可作名词,意为“半,一半”,其复数形式为halves。“……个半……”可表达为“数词+名词+and a half”或“数词+and a half+名词(复数)”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:upset,taxi,advice2.重点句式:—I think I'll take the bus to the party.—If you do,you'll be late.I don't know what to do about going to Mike's birthday party tomorrow night.Can you give me some advice please?I will not have enough time to study.熟练运用if引导的条件状语从句熟练运用if引导的条件状语从句一、预习课本P75新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.难过__upset__ 2.出租车__taxi__3.建议__advice__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列句型。1.——我想我将要乘公共汽车去参加聚会。——如果你那样,你将会迟到。—I think I'll take the bus to the party.—If you do,you'll be late.2.关于明天晚上参加迈克的生日聚会,我不知道该做些什么。__I__don't__know__what__to__do__about__going__to__Mike's__birthday__party__tomorrow__night.__3.你能给我一些建议吗?__Can__you__give__me__some__advice__please?__4.我将没有足够的时间来学习。__I__will__not__have__enough__time__to__study.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:What should you do if your classmate invites you to his birthday party?Student 1:If he invites me to his birthday party,I will go to the party.Teacher:But your parents think you should study for the test.If you go to the party,your parents will be upset.What should you do?Tina has the same problem.Can you give her some advice?环节说明:师生回答,引出了本节课的学习内容,锻炼了学生的口语表达能力及思维能力。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a中短文,然后用括号中所给单词的正确形式来填空,完成后老师让几名学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(3分钟)2.大声地熟读3a中的短文,体会if引导的条件状语从句的用法及时态。(3分钟)3.阅读3b中的句子,然后用自己的想法来补全每一个句子,注意所补充句子的时态。让几名学生到黑板上板演答案,完成后教师点拨。(5分钟)4.小组成员一起在一张纸上写一个故事。第一个人用“I think I'll…”给故事开头,组里其他成员用“if”添加句子。把这张纸在小组里传两遍,然后读出这个故事。(5分钟)参考案例I think I will go to the movies tonight.If I go to the movies,I won't finish my homework.If I don't finish my homework,the teacher won't be happy.If the teacher is not happy,she will tell my parents…小结训练。(2分钟)(B)1.My brother likes reading but half of his books ________ in English.A.is B.are C.have D.has(C)2.We'll easily become unhappy ________ we solve our problems.A.because B.ifC.unless D.although环节说明:通过3a-3c的学习,让学生练习掌握了if引导的条件状语从句的用法。Step 4 问题探究( )Can you give me ________.A.some advicesB.an adviceC.two piece of adviceD.some pieces of advice答案选择D,advice是不可数名词,some advice是指一些建议。而我们通常说“他给了我一个(则)建议”,不能说成an advice,而应该说成a piece of advice,又因为advice是不可数名词,所以两个(则)建议,我们通常说two pieces of advice。注意piece要用复数,advice不可数,但piece可数。因此,我们也可以说为some pieces of advice。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。I__think__I'll__take__the__bus__to__the__party.(我想我将乘公共汽车去参加聚会。)If you do,you will__be__late.(如果那样,你将迟到。)I__think__I'll__stay__at__home.(我想我将待在家里。)If__you__do,you'll__be__sorry.(如果那样,你将很遗憾。)What__will__happen__if__they__have__the__party__today?(如果他们今天举行聚会,将会怎么样?)If__they__have__it__today,half__the__class__won't__come.(如果今天举行,一半的学生将不能来。)Should__we__ask__people__to__bring__food?(我们应该让人们带来食物吗?)If__we__ask__people__to__bring__food,they__will__just__bring__potato__chips__and__chocolate.(如果我们让人们带来食物,他们将会只带来炸薯条和巧克力。)Section B(1a-1d)1.重点单词:travel, agent2.重点短语:travel around the world,go to college,make a lot of money,get an education3.重点句式:If you work really hard,you will travel around the world.What do you think I should do?If I go to college,I'll never become a great soccer player.1.进一步学习if引导的条件状语从句2.会用if来谈论自己感兴趣的话题会用if来谈论自己感兴趣的话题一、预习课本P76新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.旅行__travel__ 2.代理人__agent__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列短语和句型。1.环球旅行__travel__around__the__world__2.上大学__go__to__college__3.挣很多钱__make__a__lot__of__money__4.接受教育__get__an__education__5.如果你努力工作,你就能环游世界。__If__you__work__really__hard,you__will__travel__around__the__world.__6.你认为我该怎么办?__What__do__you__think__I__should__do?__7.如果我去上大学,我就不会成为一名很棒的足球运动员。__If__I__go__to__college,I'll__never__become__a__great__soccer__player.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,boys and girls.Now I ask you a question:What will you do if you have a million dollars?Student 1:If I have a million dollars,I will buy a big house with a beautiful garden for my parents.Student 2:I will buy a car if I have a million dollars.Student 3:I will travel around the world.……环节说明:以假如你有一百万美元为话题导入新课,引起了学生的学习兴趣,激起了学生表达英语的欲望,引出了新课的学习,同时也练习了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材1a-1d的任务1.学生领读1a中的词组,教师纠正读音错误,然后两人一组互相提问词组。(4分钟)2.圈出三件对于你来说最重要的事情,小组内互相交流答案。(2分钟)3.看1a中的词组,认真听录音,在足球经纪人谈到的内容前写“A”,在Mike的父母谈到的内容前写“P”,集体核对答案。(5分钟)4.认真阅读1c中的句子,再听一遍录音,将左右两组句子匹配,完成1c中的句子,集体核对答案。(3分钟)5.听第三遍录音,跟读整体感知对话内容。(3分钟)6.学生A扮演Michael,学生B扮演他的朋友,两人仿照1d的对话形式练习对话,给Michael提出建议。参考案例A:What do you think I should do?Can you give me some advice?B:I think you should go to college.A:But if I go to college,I'll never become a great soccer player.小结训练。(2分钟)(C)1.Tom,if you ________ so many mistakes again,you'll lose your job.A.will B.madeC.make D.can make(C)2.If it ________ sunny tomorrow,I ________ fishing in South Lake.A.is;go B.will be;goC.is;will go D.will be;will go(B)3.If he ________ harder,he will catch up with us soon.A.study B.studiesC.will study D.studied(C)4.________ she can't find her lost bike.A.I hope B.I thinkC.I'm afraid D.He said环节说明:通过本环节的练习使学生掌握了if引导的条件状语从句及一般将来时态的用法,有效地巩固了前几个课时所学的知识点。Step 3 问题探究( )Mum,today is Mother's Day,Mike and I want to invite you to have dinner ________ us at Shanghai Restaurant,which is famous ________ its sea food.A.with;of B.with;forC.for;to D.to;for答案选择B,“和某人一起”用介词with;“上海饭店因为海鲜而出名”be famous for“因为……而出名”,因此正确答案为B选项。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:expert,else,teenager,normal,unless,certainly,wallet,worried,mile,angry,understanding,careless,mistake,himself,careful,advise,solve,step,trust,experience,halfway2.重点短语:worry about,get advice,keep…to oneself,a lot of worries,make mistakes,in the end,in half,a lot of experience3.重点句式:If people have problems,they should keep them to themselves.Some people believe the worst thing is to do nothing.Unless we talk to someone,we'll certainly feel worse.She was afraid to tell her parents about it.They got her a new wallet and asked her to be more careful.Robert Hunt advises students about common problems.It is best not to run away from our problems.He thinks the first step is to find someone you trust to talk to.Sharing a problem is like cutting it in half.You are halfway to solving a problem just by talking to someone about it.1.重点短语和句型2.在遇到困难时要寻求正确的解决方法重点短语和句型一、预习课本P77-78新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.专家__expert__ 2.别的__else__3.青少年__teenager__ 4.正常的__normal__5.除非__unless__ 6.当然__certainly__7.钱包__wallet__ 8.担心的__worried__9.英里__mile__ 10.愤怒的__angry__11.粗心的careless12.善解人意的understanding13.错误__mistake__ 14.他自己__himself__15.细致的__careful__ 16.劝告__advise__17.解决__solve__ 18.步骤__step__19.信任__trust__ 20.经验__experience__21.在中途__halfway__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.担心……__worry__about__2.获得建议__set__advice__3.保守秘密__keep...to__oneself__4.很多的烦恼__a__lot__of__worries__5.犯错__make__mistake__6.最后__in__the__end__7.分成两半__in__half__8.许多经验__a__lot__of__experience__9.如果人们遇到问题了,他们要自己保守秘密。__If__people__have__problems,they__should__keep__them__to__themselves.__10.一些人认为最糟的事情就是什么也不做。__Some__people__believe__the__worst__thing__is__to__do__nothing.__11.如果我们不和别人交流,我们一定感觉更糟。__Unless__we__talk__to__someone,we'll__certainly__feel__worse.__12.她害怕告诉父母这件事情。__She__was__afraid__to__tell__her__parents__about__it.13.他们给她买了新的钱包并且告诉她要多加小心。__They__got__her__a__new__wallet__and__asked__her__to__be__more__careful.__14.Robert Hunt就普通的问题给学生提出建议。__Robert__Hunt__advises__students__about__common__problems.__15.最好不要逃避我们的问题。__It__is__best__not__to__run__away__from__our__problems.__16.他认为第一步就是找到你信任的人和他来交流。__He__thinks__the__first__step__is__to__find__someone__you__trust__to__talk__to.__17.共享一个问题就像是把它分成两半。__Sharing__a__problem__is__like__cutting__it__in__half.18.通过和人交流你的问题,你就解决了这个问题的一半。__You__are__halfway__to__solving__a__problem__just__by__talking__to__someone__about__it.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you have any problems in your life?What should you do if you have any problems?Do you talk to other people or keep them to yourself?Which is the best way to solve problems?Do you know other ways to solve problems?Today we will learn a passage about how to solve problems we have.环节说明:由一系列的问题入手,让学生带着问题来学习新的内容,目标明确,重点突出。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.小组内互相交流各自在生活中遇到的问题以及遇到问题后经常找谁来帮助解决问题。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2b短文,了解短文大意,从所给出的a,b,c三个选项中选出一个能概括这篇文章的中心意思的选项。(3分钟)3.认真阅读短文,回答2c中的四个问题,完成后请学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(A)1.This letter is about how ________ English well.A.to learn B.learnC.learning D.learned(D)2.Don't ________ jeans to school,________ you teacher won't let you in.A.put;and B.put on;orC.wear;and D.wear;or(D)3.If you work hard,you ________ pass the exam.A.are able to B.will are able toC.be able to D.will be able to(C)4.He was ________ tired ________ he couldn't go on working.A.too;to B.such;thatC.so;that D.too;that环节说明:通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.认真阅读2d的短文,然后用所给的短语来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,并大声朗读短文。(5分钟)2.两人一组互相提问2e中的问题,然后根据问题的答案将其整理成一篇短文,完成后小组内互相交流短文。(5分钟)环节说明:通过2d环节锻炼了学生对文章的总结概括能力,同时对2b短文有了更深刻的理解;2e环节锻炼了学生的口语表达能力和书面表达能力。Step 4 问题探究( )1.The girl is new in the school.She has some problems ________ her subjects.A.to B.in C.at D.with答案选择D,have a problem with sth.在……方面有问题或困难。with后面的宾语可以是名词也可以是代词;如果强调在做某事方面有困难要用have a problem doing,意为“做……有困难”,强调动作。2.worry的用法(1)这个母亲有很多烦恼。The__mother__has__lots__of__worries.(2)他很担心他丢失的儿子。He__is__very__worried__about__his__lost__son.或He__worries__about__his__lost__son__very__much.worry作为名词时,意为“烦恼,忧虑”,作为动词时意为“担心”,它的形容词是worried。为某人担心worry__about或be__worried__about。( )3.You will miss the bus ________ you hurry up.A.if B.or C.unless D.so答案选择C,根据句意“你如果不快点,你就会错过早班车”。连词unless意为“除非……;如果不……除了……”;引导条件状语从句。unless引导条件句时主句用一般将来时态、祈使句或谓语中含有情态动词的句子,从句用一般现在时态。4.experience的用法(1)经验是最好的老师。Experience__is__the__best__teacher.(2)他有很多有趣的经历。He__has__a__lot__of__interesting__experiences.(3)这位老师有很丰富的教学经验。The__teacher__has__lots__of__experience__in__teaching.experience用作名词,表示“经验,体验”,是不可数名词;而表示“经历,感受”,通常是可数名词。表示做某事的经验,其后通常不接不定式,而接in/of doing sth.。5.advise的用法(1)他建议早点动身。He__advised__leaving__early.(2)他建议我买台电脑。He__advised__me__to__buy__a__computer.(3)他劝她晚上不要出去。He__advised__her__against__going__out__at__night.advise意为“建议”,动词。经常用到的句型:(1)advise__doing__sth.建议做某事;(2)advise__sb.to__do__sth.建议某人做某事;(3)advise__sb.not__to__do__sth.或advise__sb.__against__doing__sth.劝告某人不要做某事。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:old people's home visit,school clean-up,take part in2.重点句式:If my family travel to a new country this summer,I'll send you a letter about my apartment.I got into a fight with my parents.You should just say sorry to your parents.1.熟记本单元的重点单词、短语及句型2.熟练掌握if引导的条件状语从句的用法熟练掌握if引导的条件状语从句的用法预习课本3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.参观敬老院__old__people's__home__visit__2.学校大扫除__school__cleanup__3.参加__take__part__in__4.如果今年夏天我们家去一个新的国家旅行,我将给你写封信,告诉你我的公寓的情况。__If__my__family__travel__to__a__new__country__this__summer,__I'll__send__you__a__letter__about__my__apartment.__5.我与我的父母吵架了。__I__got__into__a__fight__with__my__parents.__6.你应该跟你的父母道歉。__You__should__just__say__sorry__to__your__parents.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone.Now I will give you a task.Please tell your partner one problem that you have solved and the way you solved it.环节说明:这个环节的学习让学生学会了找到解决问题的最佳方式,同时也锻炼了学生的语言表达能力和语言组织能力。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.和你的搭档交流生活或学习中遇到的问题,找出他(她)最大的担忧,然后尽力想一些解决问题的方法,把它们写下来,完成后小组内互相交流。(5分钟)2.根据3b给出的结构安排,来完成你的写作计划。(3分钟)3.针对你朋友遇到的某个问题给出你的建议,写成一篇短文,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查,点拨。(7分钟)参考案例Dear Mary,I know that you don't want your friend to wear the same clothes as you do.It's not really important.Everyone has her own feature.Maybe she wants to be the same all the time.In fact,friends shouldn't be the same all the time.If you don't want her to wear the same clothes,you should tell her to get different clothes.If you can't change her,then change yourself.Please remember to talk more to her,and you will find the reason of it.Then choose the best way to solve it.Yours,Tara4.你的学校的学生正在参加“我能帮忙”的活动,根据要求在方框中填写更多的项目,然后和你的搭档仿照4的对话形式来编练新的对话,并邀请学生展示新对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:What will you do if you visit an old people's home?B:If I do that,I'll bring the old people some flowers.环节说明:通过3a-3c教学环节提高了学生解决问题的能力,同时练习了本单元的写作并锻炼了学生的写作能力;4环节让学生再次巩固了if引导的条件状语从句的用法。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.认真阅读1中的四个句子,然后用左侧方框中的单词补全句子,集体核对答案,并大声地朗读句子。(2分钟)2.认真阅读2中的对话,用所给的单词来补全对话,单词可以重复使用,完成后集体核对答案,然后两人一组来练习对话。(4分钟)3.发挥你的想象,如果出现了3中的情况你会怎么办?把你的答案写在横线上,邀请几位学生到黑板上板演答案,教师点评。(5分钟)环节说明:本环节的学习让学生掌握了本单元重要的语法知识——if引导的条件状语从句。Step 4 问题探究( )If you have ________ questions,please hands up.A.some B.anyC.much D.a答案选择B,在if引导的条件状语从句中,表示“一些”时,要用any而不用some。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。
Section A(1a-1c)Unit 1Where did you go on vacation?1.重点单词:stay at home,go to the mountains,go to summer camp2.重点句式:—Where did Tina go on vacation?—She went to the mountains.1.重点短语和句型2.一般过去时态的特殊疑问句和陈述句一般过去时态的特殊疑问句和陈述句认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.待在家里stay__at__home2.去登山go__to__the__mountains3.去海滩go__to__the__beach4.去纽约市go__to__New__York__City5.参观博物馆visit__museums6.去夏令营go__to__summer__campStep 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone.Glad to see you again.Did you have a good time during the vacation?Did you go anywhere interesting with your parents?Did you do anything special there?Can you tell us where you went on vacation?环节说明:以学生假期旅行为话题开始本节课的教学,引起了学生的学习兴趣和用英语表达的欲望。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词和词组,学生识记单词和词组并且将活动和图片中的人物匹配。(3分钟)2.认真观察1a图片中的人物活动,然后认真听录音,将1b中的人物序号写在相应的图片旁边,完成课本上1b的听力任务。(3分钟)3.再听一遍录音,并跟读对话。(2分钟)4.结对练习1c中的对话,并请一些学生表演出他们的对话。(3分钟)5.模仿1c中的对话,利用1a中的短语和1b的听力答案与同伴编练新对话,请邀请一些小组表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Where did Tina go on vacation?B:She went to the mountains.小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.—When ________ a sports meeting?—Last Monday.A.had you B.do you haveC.did you have D.will you have(C)2.—________?—He did some reading at home.A.What does your father do yesterday eveningB.What does your brother do in the schoolC.What did your brother do over the weekendD.Where did your brother go last Sunday(B)3.—Did you go shopping yesterday?—________.A.Yes,I do B.Yes,I didC.Yes,I am D.No,I don't(A)4.—Where did you go ________ vacation?—I went to the mountains.A.on B.to C.at D.with环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.你去哪儿度假?Where__did__you__go__on__vacation?go__on__vacation意为“去度假”。2.我去了夏令营。I__went__to__summer__camp.go__to__summer__camp意为“去夏令营”。类似的短语有:去爬山go__to__the__mountains去海滩go__to__the__beach去看电影go__to__the__movies( )3.—Where ________ he go on vacation?—He went to the mountains.A.is B.does C.has D.did答案选择D,根据答语中went可知问句是一般过去时态的句子,因此选择助动词did。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:anyone,anywhere,wonderful,few,most2.重点短语:quite a few3.重点句式:—Did you buy anything special?—Yes,I did.—Did you meet anyone interesting?—No,I didn't.—Did you go with anyone?—Yes,I went with my mother.Long time no see.I was on vacation last month.We took quite a few photos.I just stayed at home most of the time to read and relax.1.一般过去时态的一般疑问句及回答2.会用一般过去时态来谈论过去发生的事情1.一般过去时态的一般疑问句及回答2.会用一般过去时态来谈论过去发生的事情一、预习课本P2新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.任何人__anyone__2.任何地方__anywhere__3.精彩的__wonderful__4.不多__few__5.大多数__most__二、认真预习2a-2d找出下列短语和句型。1.学习备考study__for__tests2.买特别的东西buy__something__special3.好久不见Long__time__no__see4.去有趣的地方go__somewhere__interesting5.拍相当多的照片take__quite__a__few__photos6.大多数时间most__of__the__time7.当然,自然of__course8.你去哪里度假了?Where__did__you__go__on__vacation?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Did you have a good summer vacation?Student 1:Yes,I did.Teacher:Where did you go on vacation?Student 1:I went to the mountains.Teacher:Who did you go with?Student 1:I went there with my family.Teacher:Did you buy anything special?Student 1:No,I didn't.……环节说明:通过本环节的师生对话,不仅复习了Where did you go on vacation?这一句型及答语,而且引出了本节课的重点——一般过去时态的一般疑问句及不定代词。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.听录音,在2a相对应的方框中写出Grace,Kevin和Julie度假的地方,集体核对答案。(3分钟)2.认真阅读2b中的句子,再听一遍录音,为每一个问题选择正确的答案Yes,I did或No,I didn't,完成后集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.听第三遍录音,学生跟读。(3分钟)4.让学生利用2b中的信息仿照2c的形式练习对话,并要求多组同学表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Grace,where did you go on vacation?B:I went to New York City.A:Oh,really?Did you go with anyone?B:Yes,I went with my mother.小结训练。(2分钟)(A)1.I hope I can go ________ to have my holiday.A.somewhere excitingB.exciting somewhereC.anywhere excitingD.exciting anywhere(A)2.There are ________ new English words(单词) in this book.I can't read it.A.quite a few B.quite a littleC.few D.little(B)3.Did you see ________ in the classroom?A.someone B.anyoneC.no one D.some one(B)4.—Did Tom see anything special on the beach?—No,he saw ________.A.something B.nothingC.anything D.no one环节说明:通过听说读写训练让学生掌握了一般过去时态的一般疑问句及不定代词,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.让学生自读对话,回答下面的问题。(5分钟)(1)When was Helen on vacation?(2)Where did Helen go?(3)Is Huangguoshu Waterfall in Guizhou?(4)Did Rick do anything special last month?What did he do?2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.I ________ on vacation last month.A.did B.was C.were D.do(B)2.I am very busy these days,so I can't go ________ with you.A.somewhere B.anywhereC.everywhere3.好长时间不见了。Long__time__no__see.4.我们在那里照了很多照片。We__took__quite__a__few__photos__there.5.上个月你做了一些特殊的事情吗?Did__you__do__anything__special__last__month?环节说明:将对话问题化,既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。小结训练又对对话中的重要知识点进行了巩固加深。Step 4 问题探究1.anyone的用法(1)有谁去过山区吗?Did__anyone__go__to__the__mountains?(2)我不想告诉任何人这件事。I__don't__want__to__tell__anyone__about__the__thing.(3)任何人可以做这件事。Anyone__can__do__the__thing.(4)你见过有趣的人吗?Did__you__meet__anyone__interesting?anyone表示“某人”时,常用于否定句和疑问句,意为“什么人,谁”;表示“任何人”,可用于肯定句。被形容词修饰时,形容词应置于其后。2.anywhere的用法(1)我在什么地方都不能找到它。I__can't__find__it__anywhere.(2)昨晚你去什么地方了吗?Did__you__go__anywhere__last__night?(3)你去过有趣的地方吗?Did__you__go__anywhere__interesting?(4)随便坐。Sit__anywhere.anywhere表示“某地”时,用于否定句和疑问句中,意为“在(往)什么地方,在(往)任何地方”;被形容词修饰时,形容词应置于其后;意为“在任何地方”时,用于肯定句中。3.few的用法(1)他在这里几乎没有朋友。He__has__few__friends__here.(2)篮子里有几个鸡蛋。There__are__a__few__eggs__in__the__basket.few用来修饰可数名词的复数,表示否(肯或否)定意思,“没有,几乎没有”;常用词组为a few,表示肯定意思,意为“有几个”。与few和a few相对应的是little和a little,用来修饰不可数名词,little表示否定意思,意为“没有,几乎没有”。a little表示肯定意思,意为“有一点儿”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:something,nothing,everyone,myself,yourself,hen,pig,seem,bored,someone,diary2.重点短语:of course,in the countryside,keep a diary3.重点句式:No one was here.Everyone was on vacation.I bought something for my father.I bought nothing.Everything tasted really good!Did everyone have a good time?The only problem was that there was nothing much to do in the evening but read.1.一般过去时态的用法2.不定代词的用法不定代词的用法一、预习课本P3新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.某物__something__2.没有什么__nothing__3.你自己__yourself__4.母鸡__hen__5.猪__pig__6.好像__seem__7.郁闷的__bored__8.某人__someone__9.日记__diary__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.为某人买某物buy__sb__sth=buy__sth__for__sb2.喂母鸡feed__some__hens3.去一个朋友的农场go__to__a__friend's__farm4.唯一的问题the__only__problem5.记日记keep__a__diary6.似乎感到疲劳seem__to__be__tired7.读一些有趣的东西read__something__interesting8.这是我第一次在这儿。It__was__my__first__time__here.9.在晚上除了读书没有事情可做。There__was__nothing__to__do__in__the__evening__but__read.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Now,please listen to me carefully and answer my questions.I went to Qingdao last vacation.I went there with my family.It was my first time to go there,so everything was really interesting.And I bought something for my friends,but I didn't buy anything for myself.(1)Where did I go last vacation?(2)Did I go there with anyone?(3)Did I buy anything for myself?环节说明:本环节既练习了学生的听力又复习了所学的知识。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a对话,从方框中选择合适的不定代词补全对话,完成集体核对答案,然后两人一组练习对话,并让几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)2.认真阅读3b的电子邮件,用方框中的不定代词来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案。然后让学生大声朗读短文。(5分钟)3.以小组为单位,询问小组其他成员3c中的问题,然后根据调查结果向其他同学汇报结果。参考案例In our group,everyone ate something at a restaurant.And everyone read something interesting.Tim and Mary visited someone in their family.Everyone bought something.And no one kept a diary.小结训练。(4分钟)(C)1.—Who teaches ________ music?—No body,I teach ________.A.your;mine B.your;myselfC.you;myself D.you;me(B)2.Suzhou is a beautiful city,There are many people here ________ vacation every year.A.to B.on C.for D.in(D)3.I never feel ________ when I stay with him because he is such a ________ man.A.boring;bored B.boring;funnyC.bored;boring D.bored;funny(C)4.My father seems ________ busy today,so I must help him.A.be B.to C.to be D.being(A)5.—Can I help you,boy?—Yes,There is ________ wrong with my bike.A.something B.anythingC.everything D.nothing(A)6.—Would you like ________ to eat?—Thanks,please.A.something B.anythingC.some things D.any things(D)7.On weekends,I have nothing to do but ________ TV.A.watches B.to watchC.watching D.watch环节说明:通过本环节的学习,让学生掌握了不定代词的用法,同时小结训练更是加深了对重要知识点的巩固深化。Step 4 问题探究1.由some,any,no,every构成的不定代词的用法(1)有人认识他。Someone__knows__him.(2)有什么有趣的事吗?Is__there__anything__interesting?(3)你能给我一些吃的东西吗?Can__you__give__me__something__to__eat?(4)今天的报纸上没有什么新内容。There__is__nothing__new__on__today's__newspaper.复合不定代词做主语时都看做单数,其谓语动词用单数形式;复合不定代词被定语所修饰时,定语必须放在它们的后面,由some构成的合成代词一般用于肯定句,由any构成的合成代词一般用于否定句和疑问句。如果要在疑问句中表示请求、建议等肯定的意思或者盼望得到肯定的答复,须用somebody,someone或something。2.seem的用法(1)一切似乎很容易。Everything__seems__easy.(2)这道数学题似乎很难。The__math__problem__seems__to__be__difficult.(3)似乎她很高兴。She__seems__to__be__very__happy.seem意为“看起来像……,似乎……,好像……”,经常用到的句型是:(1)seem+形容词;(2)seem+to do sth;(3)It seems that+句子。3.boring与bored的用法区别(1)这部电视剧很无聊。The__TV__play__is__very__boring.(2)我很无聊。I__am__very__bored.bored和boring是动词bore的两个形容词。bored表示“感到厌烦的”,用来指人;boring表示“令人厌烦的”,指物。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Where__did__you__go__on__vacation?(你去哪度假了?)I went to New York City.Did__you__go__out__with__anyone?(你和某人一起出去的吗?)No.No__one(没有人) was here.Everyone(每一个人) was on vacation.Did__you__buy__anything__special?(你买了一些特殊的东西吗?)Yes,I bought something(某物) for my father.How__was__the__food?(食物怎么样呢?)Everything__tasted__really__good!(每一样东西品尝起来都很好。)Did__everyone__have__a__good__time?(每一个人都玩得很高兴吗?)Oh,yes.Everything__was__excellent.(噢,是的。每一样东西都很棒。)Section B(1a-1e)1.学习掌握有关评价事物的形容词2.能运用be+形容词来评价事物3.熟练地谈论表示过去发生的事件1.能运用be+形容词来评价事物2.熟练地谈论表示过去发生的事件1.能运用be+形容词来评价事物2.熟练地谈论表示过去发生的事件认真预习1a-1e,找出下列句型。丽莎对她的假期是怎么评价的?________________________________________________________________________Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Now let's have a dictation.I will give you the Chinese meanings,please write them in English.1.一本有趣的书2.这本书很有趣。3.这个女孩很漂亮。4.我弟弟很聪明。……Now please check the answers in groups.Then write some sentences like them.环节说明:由听写短语或句型过渡到自己写短语或句型,让学生尽可能多地写出学过的形容词,为学习形容词描述事物打下基础。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1.学生领读1a中的形容词,然后两人一组互相提问背诵单词。(3分钟)2.仔细观察1a图片,将图片和形容词匹配,集体核对答案。(2分钟)3.再认真地读1a中的单词,然后将这些单词分成两类,将表示积极意义的形容词写在左边的横线上,将表示消极意义的形容词写在右边的横线上,小组内核对答案,完成1b。(2分钟)4.让学生用这些形容词来写句子,写完后小组内相互交流。(3分钟)小结训练。(2分钟)1.I like Chinese food because it's delicious.2.My computer isn't cheap.It's expensive.3.The movie is very boring,I don't like it at all.4.He tells us something exciting.环节说明:通过本环节的学习让学生记住了这些形容词,用形容词造句更是让学生掌握了这类词的用法。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.认真阅读1c中的句子,带着问题听第一遍录音,将问题的答案写在横线上,集体核对答案。(3分钟)2.再认真听一遍录音,完成1d,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.听第三遍录音,并跟读,整体感知对话。(3分钟)4.利用1c、1d中的信息,用1e中的问题提示两人一组来练习对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:How was her vacation?B:It was very great.小结训练。(3分钟)(D)1.—________ were the cake?—They were very delicious.A.Why B.What C.Where D.How(D)2.He had a good time ________ in the river yesterday.A.swim B.swimingC.swims D.swimming(C)3.I am so bored for a long time.I hope to have ________ to do.A.exciting anything B.nothing excitingC.something interesting D.good something(B)4.When ________ your brother Jack ________ to school every morning?A.did;get B.does;getC.is;getting D.are;getting(A)5.Where did Kate ________ vacation?A.go on B.go inC.go to D.went onStep 4 问题探究( )1.What did they say ________ the Great Wall?A.about B.to C.on D.at答案选择A,say about发表对……的看法。( )2.Tomorrow is my mother's birthday.And I want to buy a gift ________ her.A.about B.to C.for D.with答案选择C,buy sth.for sb.=buy sb.sth.给某人买某物。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:activity,decide,try,bird,bicycle,building,trader,wonder,difference,top,wait,umbrella,wet,below,enough,hungry,as2.重点短语:arrive in,feel like,a lot of new buildings,in the past,over an hour ,because of,along the way,about an hour later,another two hours,the top of the hill3.重点句式:We decided to go to the beach near our hotel.I felt like I was a bird.I wonder what life was like here in the past.I really enjoyed walking around the town.What a difference a day makes!It started raining a little.And because of the bad weather,we couldn't see anything below.My father didn't bring enough money.That's not all.1.重点短语和句型2.会用一般过去时态叙述过去发生的事情1.重点短语和句型2.会用一般过去时态叙述过去发生的事情一、预习课本P5-6新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.活动__activity__ 2.决定__decide__3.尝试__try__ 4.鸟__bird__5.自行车__bicycle__ 6.建筑物__building__7.商人__trader__ 8.想知道__wonder__9.差别__difference__ 10.顶部__top__11.等待__wait__ 12.雨伞__umbrella__13.潮湿的__wet__14.在……下面__below__15.足够的__enough__ 16.饥饿__hungry__17.如同__as__二、认真预习2a-2e,找出下列短语和句型。1.到达arrive__in/at/get__to2.尝试滑翔伞运动try__paragliding3.感觉像feel__like4.许多旧建筑many__of__the__old__buildings5.因为because__of6.带足够的钱bring__enough__money7.忘了带雨伞forget__to__bring__an__umbrella8.又两个小时another__two__hours9.一个小时以后one__hour__later10.山顶the__top__of__the__hill11.我们决定去我们旅馆附近的海滩。We__decided__to__go__to__the__beach__near__our__hotel.12.我感觉我就像一只小鸟。I__felt__like__I__was__a__bird.13.我想知道过去的生活是什么样子的。I__wonder__what__life__was__like__here__in__the__past.14.我真的很喜欢围绕着小镇散步。I__really__enjoyed__walking__around__the__town.15.多么与众不同的一天呀!What__a__difference__a__day__makes!16.天开始下小雨。It__started__raining__a__little.17.因为糟糕的天气,我们看不到下面的任何东西。And__because__of__the__bad__weather,we__couldn't__see__anything__below.18.我爸爸没有带足够的钱。My__father__didn't__bring__enough__money.19.那还不是全部。That's__not__all.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone!Do you like travelling?Have you ever been to Malaysia?Do you know Penang Hill?Jane went to Malaysia with her family.They had a good time on the first day,but the next day is terrible for them.Do you want to know what happened to them?OK,let's read Jane's diary entries to see what happened to them on earth.环节说明:以Jane的旅游经历为话题,设置悬念,引起学生的好奇心,引出本节课的学习。Step 2 完成教材2a-2b的任务1.认真思考2a中的两个问题并在小组内讨论,发表自己的观点。比一比谁说得好。(3分钟)2.快速的阅读2b中Jane的日记,回答教材中所提出来的两个问题,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.认真朗读日记,了解日记内容,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)4.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(10分钟)5.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(D)1.I ________ you yesterday morning,but you ________ at home.A.call;aren't B.am calling;areC.called;were D.called;weren't(B)2.—Why were you late for the sports meeting?—________ the bad weather.A.Because B.Because ofC.In front of D.Before(A)3.The girl in purple is new here,so________ students know here.A.few B.a fewC.little D.a little(B)4.—What do you think of this math problem?—It's too easy.________ in our class can work it out.A.Someone B.AnyoneC.Anywhere D.No one(C)5.When I swim in the river,I ________ I'm a fish.A.look like B.sound likeC.feel like D.taste like环节说明:通过本环节的学习使学生不仅了解旅游日记的写法,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2c-2e的任务1.再次认真阅读日记,根据日记所记录的内容来完成2c表格,集体核对答案。(5分钟)2.根据Jane去马来西亚旅行的信息来完成2d中Anna和Jane的对话。完成后集体核对答案。然后两人一组练习对话,并邀请两组学生表演对话。(5分钟)3.认真阅读Jane再次去槟城山的旅行日记,用所给词的正确形式来补全日记,完成后集体核对答案。(5分钟)4.大声朗读2e日记,体会日记的写法及一般过去时态的用法。(3分钟)环节说明:这一环节的训练,有助于学生的阅读水平的提高,巩固所学的知识。小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.There are ten students,but we have only five books,so we still need ________ books.A.five another B.more fiveC.another five(B)2.We don't have ________ money for a taxi,so we have to walk home.A.some B.any C.few D.anything(C)3.Two hours ________,we got home.A.after B.late C.laterStep 4 问题探究1.decide的用法(1)你决定去买一些特殊的东西吗?Do__yo__decide__to__buy__anything__special?(2)我决定明天不去打篮球了。I__decide__not__to__play__basketball__tomorrow.decide意为“决定”,经常用到的句型:(1)决定做某事decide__to__do__sth.;(2)决定不做某事decide__not__to__do__sth.。它的名词是decision,常用句型为make__a__decision__to__do__sth.。2.try的用法(1)试一试have__a__try(2)为什么不试着骑车去学校呢?Why__not__try__riding__a__bike__to__school?(4)我要尽我最大的努力来帮助你。I__will__try__my__best__to__help__you.try意为“尝试,努力”,既可以作为动词,也可以作为名词。常用到的句型:(1)努力做某事try__to__do__sth.(2)尝试做某事try__doing__sth.(3)尽某人最大的努力做某事try__one's__best__to__do__sth.。3.feel like的用法(1)好像马上就要下雨了。It__feels__like__rain__soon.(2)我现在什么都不想吃。I__feel__like__eating__nothing__now.(3)我感觉我就像一只鸟。I__felt__like__I__was__a__bird.feel like+名词意为“觉得好像……”。fell like+doing意为“想做……”,其同义句为want__to__do和would__like__to__do。feel like+从句,意为“觉得好像是……”。4.because与because of的区别(1)我没有买是因为它太贵了。I__didn't__buy__it__because__it__was__too__expensive.(2)由于年龄关系他失去了工作。He__lost__his__job__because__of__his__age__.(3)他为你而来这里。He__comes__here__because__of__you.because和because of的意思都是“因为”,但是because是连词,其后接句子;because of是复合介词,其后接名词、动名词等。5.enough的用法(1)我有足够的时间来写作业。I__have__enough__time__to__do__homework.(2)我们有足够的苹果给每一个人。We__have__enough__apples__to__give__everyone.(3)这孩子到上学的年龄了。The__child__is__old__enough__to__go__to__school.enough用作形容词时,意思是“足够的”,通常用来修饰名词。既可以修饰可数名词也可修饰不可数名词,可放在该名词之前,也可放在该名词之后;但在enough用作副词时,意为“足够地,充分地,相当地”及“很”等意思,修饰形容词、副词或动词时,应放在这些词之后。6.another与more的区别我需要另外两本书。I__need__another__two__books.或I__need__two__more__books.another和more都表示“额外又……个”,常用到的结构为:another+数词+复数名词=数词+more+复数名词。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:duck,dislike2.重点短语:learn something important,in the shopping center,find out,go on,come up3.重点句式:How did you feel about the trip?Did you dislike anything?I didn't bring back anything from Malaysia.My classmates told me to keep going.So I went on.Everyone jumped up and down in excitement.It was so beautiful that we forgot about the last five hours.1.不定代词的用法2.用一般过去时态叙述过去发生的事情1.不定代词的用法2.用一般过去时态叙述过去发生的事情一、预习课本P7新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.鸭子__duck__2.不喜欢__dislike__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.在购物中心in__the__shopping__center2.在我们的学校旅行中on__our__school__trip3.带一个装有食物和水的包take__a__bag__with__some__food__and__water4.兴奋地跳起来jump__up__and__down__in__excitement5.升起来come__up6.你感觉这次旅行怎么样?How__did__you__feel__about__the__trip?__7.你不喜欢某些东西吗?Did__you__dislike__anything?__8.我没有从马来西亚带回来一些东西。I__didn't__bring__back__anything__from__Malaysia.__9.我的同学告诉我要坚持,所以我继续走下去。My__classmates__told__me__to__keep__going.__So__I__went__on.__10.每一个人都激动地跳了起来。Everyone__jumped__up__and__down__in__excitement.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Have you ever been to Beijing?There are many famous places,such as Tian'anmen Square,the Great Wall,Beijing Hutong and so on.Now please tell us something about your trip to visit the famous places in Beijing.环节说明:以旅行为话题,既复习了本单元所学的语言目标又锻炼了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.两人一组大声朗读3a的单词和短语,然后选择合适的单词或短语来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,并大声地朗读短文。(3分钟)2.两人一组互相提问3b中的问题,把自己的答案记下来,然后仿照第5页上Jane的日记来写自己的旅行日记,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,教师抽查点评短文 ,完成3c。(10分钟)参考案例 Tuesday,July 28thToday the weather was very sunny.I went to Qingdao with my family.I went to the beach.There were many people there.Some people swam in the sea,some lay on the beach to enjoy the sunshine.I found many beautiful shells on the beach with my sister.I liked them very much.I ate some sea food.I think it was awful.But my father said it was very delicious.We stayed there for a week.I was happy to stay here.3.假如你和你的搭档是在中国度假的外国人,你们在机场相见,然后用我们学过的句型互相询问对方在中国的度假情况。(3分钟)环节说明:通过这个教学环节让学生复习了日记的写法,完成了本单元的写作,提高了学生的写作水平。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.请同学们认真阅读1中的对话,然后从左边方框中选择合适的不定代词来补全对话。完成后小组核对答案,然后两人一组练习对话。(5分钟)2.认真阅读2中的短文,用所给词的正确形式来完成短文,然后集体核对答案,学生大声地朗读短文,弄懂每一句话的意思。(5分钟)3.教师点拨短文中的知识要点。(3分钟)环节说明:这一环节通过训练,让学生对本单元的语法——不定代词和一般过去时态有了更深刻的理解。小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.You are ________ now,Bill.So you should wash your clothes by yourself.A.young enough B.enough oldC.old enough D.enough young(C)2.Now most families have only one child ________ our country's one child policy(计划生育政策).A.so B becauseC.because of D.so that(D)3.Did you decide ________ a bicycle to school?A.by B.ridingC.to by D.to ride4.The students stood up and clapped in excitement(excited).Step 4 问题探究1.look for,find和find out的区别(1)他在找他的鞋子。He__is__looking__for__his__shoes.(2)他没找到他的自行车。He__didn't__find__his__bike.(3)读这篇短文,找出这个问题的答案。Read__this__passage,and__find__out__the__answer__to__the__question.look for,find和find out都含有“寻找、找到”的意思,但其含义和用法却不同。look for意为“寻找”,是有目的地找,强调“寻找”这一动作。find意为“找到,发现”,通常指找到或发现具体的东西,也可指偶然发现某物或某种情况,强调的是找的结果。find out意为“找出,发现,查明”,多指通过调查、询问、打听、研究之后“搞清楚、弄明白”,通常含有“经过困难曲折”的含义,指找出较难找到的、无形的、抽象的东西。2.so…that…的用法(1)天气如此晴朗以至于我想去游泳。It's__so__sunny__that__I__want__to__swim.(2)他跑得如此快以至于我不能追上他。He__runs__so__quickly__that__I__can't__catch__up__with__him.so+形容词或副词+that引导的肯定的结果状语从句,意思是“如此……以至于……”。so+形容词或副词+that引导的否定的结果状语从句,意思是“如此……以至于不能……”。当that引导的结果状语从句为肯定句时,so…that…可以与be…enough to do转换;当从句为否定句时,可以与too…to…或be not…enough to do转换。3.keep的用法(1)保暖keep__warm(2)保持教室的整洁keep__the__classroom__tidy(3)他整天都在不停地工作,因为他想准时完成工作。He__keeps__working__all__day,because__he__wants__to__finish__the__work__on__time.keep意为“保持”,经常用到的句型为:(1)保持某种状态keep+形容词;(2)使……保持某种(状态、位置或动作等)keep…+形容词;(3)继续干某事,表示不间断地持续干某事keep__doing。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 2How often do you exercise?1.重点单词:housework,hardly,ever2.重点短语:hardly ever,go shopping3.重点句式:—What do you do on weekends?—I usually watch TV.—Do you go shopping?—No,I never go shopping.能描述课余时间的活动安排能描述课余时间的活动安排一、预习课本P9新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.家务__housework__2.几乎不__hardly__3.从来__ever__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.多久一次how__often2.在周末on__weekends3.周末活动weekend__activities4.去看电影go__to__the__movies5.帮忙做家务help__with__housework6.几乎从不hardly__everStep 1 情景导入Teacher:I like Saturday and Sunday.Because I can do many things that I like.I always watch TV. I sometimes help with the housework.I often go shopping.I usually play with my friends.What do you usually do on weekends?Can you tell us what you do on weekends?Please say something to your partner about your weekends.环节说明:由自己的周末活动为导线让学生说出自己周末的活动,引出本课时的学习,同时也锻炼了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.认真观察1a图片中人物的活动,然后利用适当的短语来描述人物的活动,完成后小组内互相交流答案。(3分)2.邀请几组学生把所写的短语板书到黑板上,要求学生识记并互相提问所写的短语。(5分钟)3.两人一组互相练习1a图片中的对话,然后用黑板上的语言来替换练习对话并邀请几组学生表演对话。(3分钟)4.学生领读1b中的频率副词,教师纠正读音,然后互相背诵单词,为听力打好基础。(3分钟)5.认真听录音,把1a图片中的字母写在横线上,集体核对答案,完成1b。(3分钟)6.再听一遍录音,并跟读。(2分钟)7.仿照1c中的对话,利用1a图片中的人物活动与同伴练习新对话,并邀请几组学生来表演对话。(5分)8.通过对话练习,学生总结1b中频率副词的用法,教师点拨。(5分钟)参考案例A:What do you do on weekends?B:I usually watch TV.A:Do you go shopping?B:No,I never go shopping.小结训练。(5分钟)(D)1.—How often do you go skating?—________.I can't skate at all.A.Always B.SometimesC.Hardly D.Never(D)2.I ________ watch TV on weekends.I have too much homework to do.A.often B.sometimesC.always D.hardly ever(C)3.—What ________ you usually do on weekends?—I usually play ________ soccer.A.are;the B.will;aC.do;/ D.can;an(B)4.Tome ________ goes to the park with his parents.A.sometime B.sometimesC.some time D.some times环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.exercise的用法(1)我每天都锻炼。I__exercise__every__day.(2)我爸爸总是做运动。My__father__always__does__exercise.(3)我们每天都做早操。We__do__morning__exercises__every__day.exercise可以作动词,意为“锻炼”;也可以作名词,意为“运动,锻炼”时为不可数名词,意为“习题,体操”时为可数名词,常和动词do搭配使用,且作“体操”讲时多用复数形式。常用词组:take/do exercise做运动,do morning exercises做早操,do eye exercises做眼保健操。2.hardly的用法他非常的累,几乎不能走路了。He__is__very__tired,he__hardly__walks.hardly“几乎不”,是个否定副词,表示否定意义,通常位于实际动词之前,系动词、助动词、情态动词之后。特别提示:hardly不是hard添加后缀构成的副词。3.频率副词的用法常见的频率副词有always,usually,often,sometimes,hardly__ever,never与疑问词how often对应。表示的频率由always向never递减。在句中位于实意动词之前,情态动词(can等)、助动词(do等)、连系动词(be等)之后。但sometimes也可在句首。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:once,twice,Internet,program,full,swing2.重点短语:once a week,twice a week,three times a week,use the Internet,swing dance3.重点句式:—How often do you watch TV?—Twice a week.—What's your favorite program?—Animal world.Next week is quite full for me.What kind of dance are you learning?I have to play tennis with my friends.1.重点单词,词组及句型2.How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语一、预习课本P10新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.一次__once__ 2.两次__twice__3.因特网__Internet__ 4.节目__program__5.忙的__full__ 6.秋千__swing__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.一周二次twice__a__week2.使用互联网use__the__Internet3.上钢琴课have__piano__lessons4.有空be__free5.怎么会呢?How__come?6.和朋友们一起打网球play__tennis__with__friends7.—你最喜欢的电视节目是什么?—动物世界。—What's__your__favorite__program?—Animal__world.8.对于我来说下周相当的忙。Next__week__is__quite__full__for__me.__9.你正在学什么种类的舞蹈?What__kind__of__dance__are__you__learning?10.我必须要和我的朋友去打网球。I__have__to__play__tennis__with__my__friends.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you like shopping?Student 1:Yes,I do.Teacher:How often do you go shopping?Student 1:I go shopping once a week.The student may not answer the question.The teacher may help answer the question.Then go on asking another student.……环节说明:通过师生互相问答,直接引出本节课要学习的语言目标,简洁明了。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.学生领读2a中的单词和短语,教师纠正读音。然后两人一组互相背诵提问单词或短语。(3分钟)2.认真听程涛做不同事情的频率的对话,把听到的活动按顺序排列,集体核对答案,完成2a。(3分钟)3.再听一遍录音,将他的活动和做这些活动的频率匹配。(3分钟)4.听第三遍录音,学生跟读。(3分钟)5.你多久做一次这些活动?根据自己的实际情况来完成2c表格,然后利用所填内容,两人一组仿照右边方框中的对话来编练新的对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:How often do you watch TV?B:I watch TV every day.A:What's your favorite program?B:Animal World.A:How often do you watch it?B:Twice a week.小结训练。(2分钟)(B)1.—________ do you visit your uncle?—Once a week,at least.A.How long B.How oftenC.How much D.How many(C)2.—What was the weather like?—It rained ________ and people could ________ go out.A.hardly;hard B.hard;hardC.hard;hardly D.hardly;hardly(A)3.—________ does your sister practice playing the piano?—She plays the piano every day.A.How often B.How longC.How many D.How far(D)4.—Do you know the famous player Kobe has said goodbye to NBA?—Yes,I'm afraid I will ________ see him on screen.A.sometimes B.oftenC.always D.seldom(C)5.—________ do you visit your grandfather?—Once a month.A.How many B.How soonC.How often D.How long环节说明:通过听说读写学习训练让学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,回答下面的问题:(1)判断正误,正确T,错误F;(2)回答问题;(3)英译汉。(5分钟)①Claire has piano lessons only on Wednesday.②What kind of dance is Claire learning?③How often does Claire have swing dance lessons?④How often do you have piano lessons?2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(3分钟)小结训练。(4分钟)(A)1.—________ do you go to the movies?—Twice a month.A.How often B.How soonC.How long D.How far(A)2.Ten days ________ too long for me.I don't want to wait for so long.A.is B.are C.was D.were(B)3.They are all ________,so they have no time to watch TV.A.free B.fullC.excited D.relaxing4.My parents often go to the movies with me twice a week.(two)5.Tom often goes shopping(shop) with his mother.6.How many times does your sister read the book?(time)环节说明:将对话以任务型阅读的形式呈现,既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解,而且还能让学生提早感受中考题型。Step 4 问题探究1.How often与How many times的用法区别(1)你多久上一次钢琴课?How__often__do__you__have__a__piano__lesson?(2)你一周上几次钢琴课?How__many__times__do__you__have__piano__lessons?How__often+助动词do(does或did)+主语+do sth.?是对频率(多久一次)进行提问。疑问词how often(在这里助动词do,does或did是起疑问的作用)与一般现在时或一般过去时连用,回答一般是用表示频率的副词always,usually,often,sometimes,never等或者是“次数+一段时间”,如once/twice a month,three times a month,three or four times a month等。也可以用every day,every year,every week等短语来回答。How__many__times对次数进行提问,其答语为once,twice,three times等表示次数的单词或短语。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:maybe,least2.重点短语:at least3.重点句式:—How often does he play soccer?—He plays at least twice a week.—How often do you go to the movies?—I go to the movies maybe once a month.1.频率副词的用法2.How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语3.一般现在时态1.频率副词的用法2.How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语一、预习课本P11新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.也许__maybe__ 2.最少__least__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.熬夜stay__up__late2.吃健康的早餐eat__a__healthy__breakfast3.至少at__least4.做运动play__sports5.早睡go__to__bed__early6.—你多久去看一次电影?—我大概一个月看一次电影。 —How often do you go to the movies? —I go to the movies maybe once a month. Step 1 情景导入Teacher:How often do you watch TV?Student 1:I watch TV every day.Teacher:How often do you exercise?Student 2:I exercise twice a week.Teacher:How often does he exercise?Student 3:She exercises twice a week.Now please practice the conversations like this with your partner.环节说明:通过对话练习复习了所学的知识点——How often引导的特殊疑问句及答语。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(3分钟) 环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好的来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a中1-6的句子,选用do或does来补全句子,小组内核对答案。(2分钟)2.认真读3a中的句子,将1-6句的问题和a-f的答语匹配,完成后集体核对答案,然后两人一组大声地熟读这些句子。(3分钟)3.认真观察3b中给出的单词,并且用这些单词来组成完整的句子,然后结对练习对话。参考案例A:How often do you help with housework?B:I help with housework twice a week.4.为了提高你的英语,你能做些什么呢?在表格中添加你学习英语的方法,然后就这些问题在小组内向你的同学提问,找出学英语的最好方法。(3分钟)A:How often do you read English books?B:I read English books about twice a week.小结训练。(5分钟)(C)1.He studies ________.He ________ plays with his friends after school.A.hard;hard B.hardly;hardlyC.hard;hardly D.hardly;hard(C)2.—How often do you exercise?—________.A.A time a weekB.Two time a weekC.Three times a weekD.One times a week(D)3.She goes to the movies ________ a month.A.three and four timesB.three times and fourC.three or four timeD.three or four times4.usually,soccer,play,I(.)I__usually__play__soccer.5.often,Katrina,does,TV,watch,How(?)How__often__does__Katrina__watch__TV?6.do,you,What,usually,weekends,on,do(?)What__do__you__usually__do__on__weekends?环节说明:通过本环节的学习,让学生掌握了频率副词及How often的用法,同时小结训练更是加深了对重要知识点的巩固深化。Step 4 问题探究( )1.—Where is Mike?—________ he is in the classroom.A.may be B.maybeC.May D.Maybe答案选择D,maybe是副词,意思是“也许,可能”,在句中作状语,相当于perhaps,常位于句首。在may be中,may是情态动词,be是动词原形,两者构成完整的谓语形式,与主语形成系表结构,意为“也许是,可能是”。( )2.—How many children do they have?—I think they have ________ two children.A.at little B.at lessC.at last D.at least答案选择D,根据句意知道至少是两个孩子。at least意为“至少”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。What__do__you__usually__do__on__weekends?(你周末通常干什么?)I always(总是)exercise(锻炼).What do they do__on__weekends(在周末)?They__often__help__with__housework.(他们经常帮着做家务。)What does she do on weekends?She__sometimes__goes__shopping.(她有时去购物。)How__often__do__you__go__to__the__movies?(你多久看一次电影?)I__go__to__the__movies__maybe__once__a__month.(我大概一个月看一次电影。)Do__you__go__shopping?(你去购物吗?)No,I__never__go__shopping.(不,我从来不去购物。)Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:junk,coffee,health2.重点短语:junk food,drink coffee3.重点句式:My mother wants me to drink it.She says it is good for my health.How often do you eat junk food?How many hours do you sleep every night?How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及答语一、预习课本P12新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.无用的东西__junk__2.咖啡__coffee__3.健康__health__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列短语和句型。1.垃圾食品junk__food2.喝牛奶drink__milk3.对……有好处be__good__for4.有好的习惯have__good__habits5.你多久吃一次垃圾食品?How__often__do__you__eat__junk__food?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you like junk food?Student 1:Yes,I do.Teacher:How often do you eat it?Student 1:I eat it three times a week.Teacher:I think it's a bad eating habit to eat junk food.You should eat less.Teacher:Do you like junk food?student 2:Yes,I do.Teacher:How often do you drink it?student 2:Every day.Teacher:Great,it is good for your health.…环节说明:通过这个环节的师生互动问题,既复习了所学的知识,又让学生明白了要养成健康的饮食习惯。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词和短语,教师纠正读音,然后两人一组互相提问单词和短语。(5分钟)2.认真观察图片中的食物,将单词和食物匹配,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.小组内结对练习1b中的对话,然后仿照该形式用1a中的物品来编练新的对话,并邀请几组学生展示对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:How often do you drink milk? Liu Fang?B:I drink milk every day.A:Do you like it?B:No.But my mother wants me to drink it.She says it's good for my health.小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.—What ________ do you like best?—Football.A.food B.subjectC.sport D.music(A)2.Eating more fruit is good ________ our health.A.for B.atC.with D.to(C)3.My mother wants me ________ the whole day.A.study B.studyingC.to study D.studied(C)4.________ eye exercises ________ good for your eyes.A.Doing;are B.Do;isC.Doing;is D.Do;are(A)5.________ people are there in your family?A.How many B.How muchC.How often D.How long环节说明:对话练习,习题精练相结合,使学生熟练掌握了本环节的知识点。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.认真听关于饮食习惯的采访录音,圈出每个问题的答案。(3分钟)2.认真阅读1d中的6个句子,然后听录音,写出Tina和Bill关于这些问题的答案,集体核对答案完成1c。(3分钟)3.再听一遍录音,并跟读,整体感知对话。(3分钟)4.一人扮演记者,另外一人扮演Tina或Bill,根据1d的听力结果仿照1e的形式来练习对话。然后转换角色再练习,邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:How often do you exercise?B:I exercise every day.A:And how often do you…?……小结训练。(对画线部分提问)(1分钟)1.I hardly__ever drink milk for breakfast.How__often__do__you__drink__milk__for__breakfast?2.They sleep nine hours every night.How__many__hours__do__they__sleep__every__night?3.I went to Beijing twice last year.How__many__times__did__you__go__to__Beijing__last__year?4.He watches TV for__two__hours every day.How__long__does__he__watch__TV__every__day?Step 4 问题探究( )1.—________ apples do you need?—Three.A.How much B.How manyC.How long D.How often答案选择B,how many对可数名词的数量进行提问。由答语Three可知是对数量进行提问,又因为apple是可数名词的复数,因此答案选择B。( )2.My sister is six years old.My father wants ________.A.she to go to schoolB.her go to schoolC.her to go schoolD.her to go to school答案选择D,想要某人做某事的句型是:want sb.to do sth.,其中want是动词,后面要用人称代词的宾格;去上学go to school是固定词组。( )3.The old man likes walking after supper.It's good ________ his health.A.for B.of C.at D.with答案选择A,由句意可知是“对他的健康有好处”,be good for对……有益。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:percent,online,television,through,although,mind,body,such,together,die,writer2.重点短语:in their free time,one to three times,go online,three or four times a week,the answers to our questions,such as3.重点句式:Last month we asked our students about their free time activities.Fortyfive percent exercise four to six times a week.And twenty percent do not exercise at all.Although many students like to watch sports,game shows are the most popular.It's good to relax by using the Internet or watching game shows,but we think the best way to relax is through exercise.Old habits die hard.1.重点短语和句型2.会用表示频率的词组来描述做事情的频率1.重点短语和句型2.会用表示频率的词组来描述做事情的频率一、预习课本P13-14新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.百分之……__percent__2.在线的__online__3.电视节目__television__4.尽管__although__5.凭借__through__6.头脑__mind__7.身体__body__8.这样的__such__9.在一起__together__10.消失__die__11.作家__writer__二、认真预习2a-2e,找出下列短语和句型。1.去乡下野营go__camping__in__the__country2.在他们的空闲时间in__their__free__time3.互联网的使用use__of__the__Internet4.百分之十五fifteen__percent5.一周四到六次four__to__six__times__a__week6.我们问题的答案the__answer__to__our__question7.例如such__as8.虽然许多学生喜欢看运动节目,但是游戏类节目是最受欢迎的。Although__many__students__like__to__watch__sports,game__shows__are__the__most__popular.9.通过上网或观看游戏类节目来放松是很好的,但是我们认为放松的最好的方式是通过锻炼。It's__good__to__relax__by__using__the__Internet__or__watching__game__shows,but__we__think__the__best__way__to__relax__is__through__exercise.10.身心健康be__healthy__for__the__mind__and__the__body11.旧习难改Old__habits__die__hard.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone!What do you do in your free time?(Let some students tell the other students about their activities)We did a survey about what No.5 High School students do in their free time.Do you want to know the result of the student activity survey?Now let's learn together.环节说明:由学生闲暇时间的活动延伸本节课的学习内容,自然过渡,顺理成章。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.大声的朗读2a中的短语,然后根据你认为学生做这些事情的频率的高低来对这些活动进行排序。(3分)2.认真阅读2b文章,然后完成14页上的圆形分格统计图表,完成后集体核对答案。(5分钟)3.再认真阅读一遍短文,然后回答2c中的5个问题,完成后让几位学生分别回答问题,教师点拨。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(A)1.—________ will you stay in Australia?—For two weeks.A.How long B.How soonC.How often D.How(A)2.He usually ________ newspapers in the morning.A.reads B.seesC.watches D.looks(D)3.His father left without ________ a word.A.say B.to sayC.said D.saying(C)4.My mother wants me ________ the whole day.A.study B.studyingC.to study D.studied(B)5.If you wants to be healthier,you must eat ________ junk food,I think.A.more B.lessC.fewer D.few(C)6.She often ________ TV in the morning.A.sees B.worksC.watches D.looks at(A)7.—Are you ________ tomorrow?—No,tomorrow is quite full for me.A.free B.fullC.busy D.tired环节说明:通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.再次认真阅读短文,根据短文内容和圆形分格统计图表用百分比和频率副词always,usually或者sometimes仿照2d中例句的形式来写句子。完成后小组内核对答案,教师邀请几位学生到黑板上书写答案。(5分钟)2.以小组为单位,每人轮流从2e左边方框中选择其中的一项课余活动,利用How often do you…句型向小组内其他成员提问,把询问的结果制成圆形分格统计图表展示给全班同学。(5分钟)Step 4 问题探究1.surprised的用法(1)我们对这个消息感到很意外。We__are__surprised__at__the__news.(2)我在这里见到你很意外。I__am__very__surprised__to__meet__you__here.surprised意为“惊奇的,意外的”,是形容词,经常用到的句型为:be__surprised__at…(对……感到惊奇),后面可以跟somebody,something或doing something;be__surprised__to__do__sth.(做某事感到惊讶);还有句型be surprised that+从句。( )2.China has many big cities,________ Beijing,Shanghai,Shenzhen and so on.A.such for B.asC.such as D.less than答案选择C,such as常用来列举同类人或物中的几个例子,不能穷尽,可与and so on连用。( )3.It's boring to watch TV.I don't like it ________.A.at least B.at mostC.at all D.at last答案选择C,根据句意可知看电视很无聊,我一点都不喜欢它。not…at all意为“根本不,一点也不”。( )4.Do you know the answer ________ the question?A.of B.at C.for D.to答案选择D,这是个固定用语,“回答”与“问题”是对应关系,要用介词to。( )5.I like listening to the music,but I can not spend much time ________ it.A.at B.in C.on D.to答案选择C,spend意为“花费”,其考查句型为:spend some time on sth./in doing sth.某人花费时间在某事上(做某事)。( )6.The old man makes a living by ________ vegetables.A.sells B.sellC.to sell D.selling答案选择D,by意为“通过……”,是介词,其后要跟动名词。( )7.The best way ________ English is using it.A.learn B.to learnC.learning D.learns答案选择B,the best way to do sth.做某事最好的方法,动词不定式作后置定语。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:dentist,magazine,however,than,almost,less,point2.重点短语:a 16yearold high school student,more than two hours a day,less than3.重点句式:She never goes to the dentist for teeth cleaning.Don't worry.1.How often引导的询问做事频率的特殊疑问句及用频率副词作答2.能用频率副词和表示频率的词组来表述自己的习惯能用频率副词和表示频率的词组来表述自己的习惯一、预习课本P15-16新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.牙医__dentist__ 2.杂志__magazine__3.然而__however__ 4.比__than__5.几乎__almost__ 6.较少__less__7.得分__point__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.去看牙医go__to__the__dentist2.一个16岁的高中生a__16yearold__high__school__student3.有许多好的习惯have__a__lot__of__good__habits4.一天两个多小时more__than__two__hours__a__day5.她从来不去看牙医清洗牙齿She__never__goes__to__the__dentist__for__teeth__cleaningStep 1 情景导入Teacher:We all have some habits.Some of them are good,but some of them are bad habits.The good habits can help us to be healthy and get more what we want to get.But the bad habits are bad for us.We should keep away from the bad habits.But do you know what good and bad habits Jane has?Let's begin our new class to find out the answers.环节说明:以习惯为话题引出了本节课要学习的内容,过渡自然,导入与课文内容衔接紧密。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.两人一组互相大声朗读3a表格中的词组,然后根据表格中的数字信息用表示频率的单词或词组来完成报告,完成后集体核对答案,并大声的朗读报告。(3分钟)2.用自己的信息来完成3b的表格,在最后一栏中用always,every day,twice a week和never等词来填写,完成后小组内互相交流。(3分钟)3.写一篇关于你自己的好习惯和坏习惯的报告,说明你自己多久做一次这些事情,可以参考3a的报告,写完后小组内互相交流纠错,教师抽查点评。完成3c。(10分钟)参考案例Hello,everyone.I am Tony.I have a lot of good habits.I always exercise and I read books for one hour every day.I usually help my mother with the housework and clean my room by myself.I eat fruit and vegetables every day.I hardly ever stay up late and get up too late.But I also have some bad habits.I like playing computer games.I play them for two hours a day.I like eating hamburgers,too.I eat hamburgers three to five times a week.It's bad for my health.But I can't get rid of it.4.以小组为单位,做健康小测试。根据自己的实际情况来选择问题的答案,选择完毕后,对照结果算出自己的得分,由此判断自己是否健康,然后将自己的结果和组内其他成员比较,比一比谁更健康。(3分)环节说明:通过这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力,同时也使学生对自己的日常习惯有了正常的认识。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.让学生根据自己和父(母)亲日常活动频率的高低来完成1的表格。然后根据自己所填的内容来写5句话,写完后小组内互相交流纠错,并请几位学生读出自己写的句子。(5分钟)2.认真阅读2中的对话,然后用本单元所学的知识来补全对话,完成后核对答案,学生大声地朗读对话。(5分钟)环节说明:这一环节训练,让学生对本单元的频率副词有了更深刻的理解。Step 4 问题探究( )1.My sister always goes to work on time and she is ________ late.A.sometimes B.usuallyC.hardly ever D.ever答案选择C,本题考查频率副词的运用,句首已经指明“我姐姐总是按时上班”,因此需选hardly ever相承接,其他频率副词与always相矛盾。( )2.—________does Amy go to the music club?—Three or four times a month.A.How many times B.How oftenC.How long D.How soon答案选择B,根据答语可以看出提问的是频率,而How often对频率进行提问,其它都不是对频率提问。( )3.The teacher is very kind to the students.He is ________ a father.A.likes B.like C.liking答案选择B,由句意可知“他像一位父亲”,be+like像……一样,like在此为介词。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 3I'm more outgoing than my sister.1.重点单词:outgoing,better,loudly,quietly2.重点句式:Sam has longer hair than Tom.Sam and Tom can play the drums,but Sam plays them better than Tom.That's Tara,isn't it?Tina is taller than Tara.And she also sings more loudly than Tara.1.形容词比较级的构成及用法2.能用比较级的基本句型来比较两人之间的不同1.形容词比较级的构成及用法2.能用比较级的基本句型来比较两人之间的不同一、预习课本P17新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.外向__outgoing__ 2.较好的__better__3.大声地__loudly__ 4.轻声的__quietly__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列句型。1.更加外向more__outgoing2.长/短发long/short__hair3.更大声more__loudly4.萨姆的头发比汤姆的头发长。Sam__has__longer__hair__than__Tom./Sam's__hair__is__longer__than__Tom's.5.我比我的妹妹更外向I'm__more__outgoing__than__my__sister.Step 1 情景导入Teacher shows some pictures of famous people,then compare the persons with Comparative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.环节说明:通过比较直接引入本节课的学习重点——形容词和副词的比较级。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词或词组,学生识记单词并用这些单词来写几个描写人物的句子,完成后小组内互相交流。(3分钟)2.大声朗读图片中的小对话,找出含有比较级的句子,通过例句小组讨论比较级的句子的构成及用法,然后根据教师所给例子总结形容词和副词比较级的变化规则,教师点拨。然后让学生把写的句子改写成比较级的句子。(3分钟)3.认真观察课本1a中的图片,然后听录音,把1a图片中的几对双胞胎按听到的顺序排序,完成课本上1b的听力任务。(3分钟)4.结对练习1a图片中的对话,然后根据其他双胞胎的情况来编练新的对话,并请几组同学表演出他们的对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:That's Tara,isn't it?B:No,it isn't.It's Tina.Tina is taller than Tara.And she also sings more loudly than Tara.小结训练。(3分钟)写出下列单词的比较级。high higher hungry hungrierthirsty thirstier beautiful more__beautifulbig bigger hot hotterthin thinner late laterwet wetter funny funnierlittle less good/well better用所给词的适当形式填空。My father has shorter(short) hair than my mother.My mother has longer(long) hair than my father.But my father is heavier(heavy) than my mother and more__outgoing(outgoing) than her.环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.形容词和副词比较级的构成(1)hard harder great greater(2)late later nice nicer(3)big bigger fat fatter(4)easy easier happy happier(5)beautiful more__beautifulinteresting more__interesting(6)good better many more一般情况在词尾直接加er;以字母e结尾的只加r;重读闭音节词尾只有一个辅音字母时,先双写该辅音字母,再加er;以辅音字母+y结尾的先变y为i再加er;在多音节和部分双音节词的词前加more(更多)或less(较少);此外还有一些不规则变化的单词,需要我们特殊背诵。2.比较级的用法(1)我比Lily瘦。I'm__thinner__than__Lily.(2)我跑得比Tom快。I__run__faster__than__Tom.当两种物体之间相互比较时我们要用形容词或副词的比较级,“A+be+形容词比较级+than+B”意为“A比B更……”。( )3.Lily is a good student,________ she?A.is B.doesn't C.isn't D.does答案选择C,本题考查反义疑问句,本题前面部分是肯定陈述句,所以后面要用否定简略疑问,并且前面是be动词,前后要保持一致,因此选择C。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:hardworking,competition,fantastic,which,clearly,win2.重点短语:run fast,jump high,work hard,the singing competition3.重点句式:Tara works as hard as Tina.—Which one was Lisa?—The one with shorter hair,I think she sang more clearly than Nelly.Everyone wants to win.But the most important thing is to learn something new and have fun.1.熟悉形容词和副词比较级的规则变法及用法2.“as…as”用于比较的使用方法,灵活交叉使用“as…as”等词及比较级来进行比较1.熟悉形容词和副词比较级的规则变法及用法2.“as…as”用于比较的使用方法,灵活交叉使用“as…as”等词及比较级来进行比较一、预习课本P18新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.工作努力的__hardworking__2.比赛__competition__3.极好的__fantastic__4.哪一个__which__5.清楚的__clearly__6.获胜__win__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.努力学习work__hard2.早起get__up__early3.歌唱比赛the__sing__competition4.学一些新的东西learn__something__new5.蒂娜和塔拉工作一样努力。Tina__works__as__hard__as__Tara.6.短头发的那个女孩是他的妹妹。The__girl__with__short__hair__is__his__sister.7.每一个人都想获胜,但是最重要的事情是学到一些新东西而且找到乐趣。Everyone__wants__to__win.__But__the__most__important__thing__is__to__learn__something__new__and__have__fun.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Good morning,everyone.I have a friend.We have the same age.But I have longer hair than him.He is taller than me.I am thinner than him,he is more outgoing than me.Do you know what I said?Now please say something about you friend like this to your partner.环节说明:通过生生互助既复习了上节课的内容,又锻炼了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.大声地朗读2a中的单词,然后在练习本上写出这些单词的比较级。(3分钟)2.听录音,核对你写的比较级的答案并大声朗读,然后将单词写在相对应的方框中。(3分钟)3.听第二遍录音,找出Tina和Tara的不同点,写在横线上。(5分钟)4.听第三遍录音,跟读并从整体上感知对话内容。(3分钟)5.两人结对练习2c对话,一人看18页2c右面的表格,另外一名学生看81页上的表格,两人仿照2c的形式来练习对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Is Tom smarter than Sam?B:No,he isn't.Sam is smarter than Tom.小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.My schoolbag is more beautiful than ________.A.your B.here C.his D.their(A)2.I think my sister is as ________ as Tina.A.popular B.more popularC.most popular D.the most popular(B)3.Tom sings well,________?A.does he B.doesn't heC.is he D.isn't he(C)4.Jack is much ________ than his brother.A.fun B.funningC.funnier D.funniest(D)5.—________ girl is your little sister?—The taller girl.She is very lovely.A.What B.Who C.Whose D.Which环节说明:通过听、说训练让学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,根据对话内容完成下列句子。(5分钟)(1)There was a singing__competition yesterday.(2)Julie thinks Lisa sang better than Nelly.(3)Anna thinks Nelly danced__better than Lisa.(4)The girl with__shorter__hair is Lisa.2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(D)1.I went to school on foot,________ it rained hard yesterday morning.A.but B.andC.because D.though(C)2.—What do you think of your English lessons?—They are very ________.I like them very much.A.boring B.difficultC.fantastic D.terrible(B)3.—Which subject do you like ________,math or Chinese?—Chinese.A.well B.betterC.best D.the best(D)4.Tom draws ________ better than his brother.A.more B.mostC.many D.much(C)5.He ________ the first prize in the singing competition.A.win B.beatC.won D.wins环节说明:将对话转化成填空题,这样能对所学的比较级起到复习巩固的作用。Step 4 问题探究1.as…as的用法(1)我和内莉一样高。I'm__as__tall__as__Nelly.(2)汤姆和萨姆跑得一样快。Tom__runs__as__fast__as__Sam.(3)莉莉不如露茜外向。Lily__is__less__outgoing__than__Lucy.as…as的含义为“和……一样”,用于形容词、副词的同级比较。两个as的词性和用法不一样,第一个as是副词,后面接形容词或副词的原级,第二个as多为连词。as…as的否定式为not as/so+adj./adv.+as,表示“不如……”,其中,第一个as可以用副词so替换,但第二个as则不能。2.win的用法(1)他是那个获胜者。He__is__the__winner.(2)他赢得了比赛。He__won__the__match.win意为“赢得、获胜”,充当win的宾语的是比赛、战争、奖品、金钱等名词,即match,war,prize,money等。( )3.The red bag is ________ than that blue one.A.much beautifulB.beautifulerC.a lot more beautifulD.beautiful答案选择C,本题中有than,因为可以判定要用形容词beautiful的比较级,又因为beautiful的比较级是加more来构成,所以排除A、B和D,C选项中的a lot是用来修饰比较级more beautiful的。除了a lot之外,much,a little,even,still等也可以修饰比较级,但是very,quite只能修饰原级。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点句式:Are you as friendly as your sister?Does Tara work as hard as Tina?—Who's more hardworking at school?—Tina thinks she works harder than me.—Who is smarter,your mother or your father?—I think my mother is smarter than my father.2.巩固练习形容词和副词的比较级1.复习本单元学过的单词和句型2.巩固练习形容词和副词的比较级1.复习本单元学过的单词和句型2.巩固练习形容词和副词的比较级认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列句型。1.你和你妹妹一样友好吗?Are__you__as__friendly__as__your__sister?2.Sam踢足球比Tom好。Sam__plays__football__better__than__Tom.3.Jack不如Tina跑得快。Jack__doesn't__run__as__fast__as__Tina.4.我现在比两年前更高了。I'm__taller__now__than__I__was__two__years__ago.5.在学校谁更勤奋?Who's__more__hardworking__at__school?6.你学习英语更努力吗?Do__you__study__English__harder?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to compare two things with Comparative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.Today we will go on learning it.环节说明:开门见山地提出本节课的学习目标——形容词和副词的比较级。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(3分钟)环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a例句,然后仿照其形式来完成剩余句子,完成后小组内核对答案,并大声地朗读句子,注意体会as…as的用法。(3分钟)2.对比现在的自己和两年前的自己,然后根据问题提示写出自己现在和两年前的不同,完成后小组内互相交流,熟练掌握比较级的用法。(3分钟)3.对比自己的父亲,完成3c表格内容,然后用who is…,your mother or your father?来询问你搭档父母的情况。A:Who is more outgoing,your mother or your father?B:I think my mother is more outgoing than my father.小结训练。(2分钟)(B)1.Bob never does his homework ________Mary.He makes lots of mistakes.A.so careful as B.as carefully asC.carefully as D.as careful as(C)2.Tina sings ________ than Tara.A.loud B.loudlyC.more loudly D.more loud(A)3.Which one is ________,soccer or basketball?A.more popular B.popularC.much popular D.most popular(A)4.—Is that Tina?—No,________ isn't.Tina is much ________.A.it;taller B.she;tallerC.it;tall D.she;tall(A)5.He works as ________ as his father.A.hard B.harderC.hardly D.more hard环节说明:通过本环节的学习,让学生更熟练地掌握了比较级的用法,小结训练更是加深了对重要知识点的巩固深化。Step 4 问题探究( )Which do you like ________,apple or bananas?A.good B.well C.better D.best答案选择C,在含有or的选择疑问句中,如果有两者供选择,前面的形容词要用比较级形式。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Is Tom smarter(聪明) than Sam?No,he__isn't.Sam is smarter than Tom.Is Tara more__outgoing(外向) than Tina?No,she isn't.Tina__is__more__outgoing__than__Tara.(蒂娜比塔拉外向。)Are you as friendly(友好) as your sister?No,I'm not.I'm friendlier(友好) than her.Does__Tara__work__as__hard__as__Tina?(塔拉工作和蒂娜一样努力吗?)Yes,she__does.Who's__more__hardworking__at__school?(谁在学校学习比较努力?)Tina__thinks__she__works__harder__than__me.(蒂娜认为她比我努力。)Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:talented,truly,care2.重点短语:care about3.重点句式:A good friend is talented in music.A good friend likes to do the same things as me.A good friend truly cares about me.A good friend makes me laugh.A good friend is good at sports.They are both tall.1.识记描述好朋友的词语2.学会使用比较级作比较1.如何描绘最好的朋友2.学会使用比较级作比较一、预习课本P20新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.有才能的__talented__2.真正__truly__3.关心__care__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列短语和句型。1.有酷的衣服have__cool__clothes2.在……有天赋be__talented__in3.和某人做同样的事情do__the__same__things__as__me4.关心care__about5.一个好的听众a__good__listener6.让我大笑make__me__laughStep 1 情景导入Teacher:Friends are very important to us,they can make us feel happy.They can also help us when we are in trouble.Do you have friends?Students:Yes,we do.Teacher:Do you think what kind of things is important in a friend?Please tell us your ideas.Student 1:I think a good friend can help me.Student 2:A good friend is very friendly.……环节说明:通过这个环节让学生各抒己见对朋友的不同标准,引起学生用英语表达的欲望,引出本节课的学习目标——描述好朋友。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1.什么是友谊中最重要的因素?让学生大声的朗读1a中的句子,然后把这些句子按照重要性的主次来排列顺序。完成后小组内互相交流,并且识记这些句子。(5分钟)2.以小组为单位互相谈论发表自己的观点:好朋友应该是什么样子的?然后邀请几位学生来发表自己的观点,说说好朋友的标准。(5分钟)参考案例A:A good friend is good at schoolwork.B:I think a good friend is very popular in school.C:For me,a good friend can help me with my study.D:A friend can let me learn something useful from him.小结训练。(4分钟)(D)1.His joke made all of us ________.A.laughing B.to laughC.laughed D.laugh(A)2.I think listening is just as ________as speaking in language learning.A.important B.more importantC.more difficult D.more interesting(C)3.My friend likes to do ________ thing ________ me.A.same;as B.the same;toC.the same;as D.same;to(B)4.Though,my friend Ruth and I have some differences,I don't ________ about them.A.like B.careC.believe D.know(B)5.Jack is ________ popular than his brother in our school.A.much B.moreC.many D.little(B)6.Are you better at ________ than your sister?A.play basketball B.playing basketballC.to play basketball D.plays basketball环节说明:学生通过这个环节的学习知道了好朋友是什么样子的,同时小结训练对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.Molly和Mary在哪些方面喜欢他们的好朋友呢?认真听录音,完成1c表格的第一栏,集体核对答案。(3分钟) 2.再听一遍录音,写出Molly和Mary在哪些方面和她们的好朋友是相同的,哪些方面是不同的,完成1c中表格中剩余的栏目,集体核对答案,完成1d。(5分钟)3.再听一遍录音,并跟读,整体感知对话。(3分钟)4.根据1c表格中听力信息内容,来谈论一下Molly和Mary以及她们朋友的情况。(5分钟)参考案例A:Molly studies harder than her best friend.B.Well,Mary and her best friend are both tall.…小结训练。(5分钟)1.我知道我的朋友真心地关心我。I know my__friend__really__cares__about__me.2.你必须要和我一样的衣服。You__must__have__the__same__clothes__as__me.3.他的话使我们很高兴。What he said makes__us__happy.4.这个男孩在舞蹈上有天赋。The boy is talented__in__dancing.5.我擅长游泳。I am__good__at__swimming.Step 4 问题探究make的用法(1)我无法使这匹马走动。I__can't__make__the__horse__walk.(2)他常常使我感到快乐。He__often__makes__me__feel__happy.make“使,促使”,在此是使役动词。当它作“使,让”讲时,常见结构是:(1)make+人(宾语)+动词原形(宾补);(2)make+宾语+形容词(宾补)。make构成的常用短语有:make faces做鬼脸;make mistakes犯错误;make friends with sb.和某人交朋友;make the bed整理床铺;make money赚钱;make a living谋生;make a telephone打电话;make up one's mind下决心。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:serious,mirror,kid,necessary,both,though,grade,should,saying,reach,hand,touch,heart,fat,break,arm,laugh,share,loud,similar2.重点短语:as long as,be different from,bring out,the same as,in fact,be similar to3.重点句式:That's why I like reading books and studying harder in class.It's not easy for me to make friends.Friends are like books—you don't need a lot of them as long as they are good.My best friend helps me bring out the best in me.Larry is much less hardworking.I don't really care if my friends are the same as me or different.A true friend reaches for your hand and touches your heart.My best friend is similar to Larry.1.重点短语和句型2.会运用比较级来描述朋友1.重点短语和句型2.会运用比较级来描述朋友一、预习课本P21-22新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.严肃的__serious__ 2.镜子__mirror__3.小孩__kid__ 4.必需的__necessary__5.两个都__both__ 6.然而__though__7.应该__should__ 8.成绩等级__grade__9.谚语__saying__ 10.伸手__reach__11.感动__touch__ 12.心脏__heart__13.现实__fact__ 14.损坏__break__15.手臂__arm__ 16.发笑__laugh__17.分享__share__ 18.响亮的__loud__19.相像的__similar__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.像一面镜子like__a__mirror2.那是……的原因That's__why……3.只要,既然as__long__as4.和……相同,与……一致be__the__same__as5.和……不同be__different__from6.使显现bring__out7.取得更好的成绩get__better__grades8.事实上in__fact9.对于我来说交朋友是不容易的。It's__not__easy__for__me__to__make__friends.10.朋友就像是书,你不需要有很多,只要他们是好的。Friends__are__like__books——you__don't__need__a__lot__of__them__as__long__as__they're__good.11.Larry帮助我展现出最好的一面。Larry__helps__to__bring__out__the__best__in__me.12.我真的不介意我的朋友和我相同还是不同。I__don't__really__care__if__my__friends__are__the__same__as__me__or__different.__13.一个真正的朋友是向你伸出手,触动你心灵的人。A__true__friend__reaches__for__your__hand__and__touches__your__heart.14.我最好的朋友和拉里很像。My__best__friend__is__similar__to__Larry.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We all have some friends. Should friends be the same or different?What about your ideas?Please say out your ideas in your group.Maybe different people have different ideas.Let's read three passages to know the writers' ideas about friends.环节说明:各抒己见对朋友的不同见解,引出本节课的学习重点。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.大声地朗读2a中的单词,然后写出这些单词的比较级,写完后小组内核对答案。(3分钟)2.用所写的形容词的比较级来写五个关于自己或朋友的句子,要求几位同学到黑板上板演句子,写完后小组内互相交流,教师点拨所写句子。(3分钟)3.认真阅读2b文章,在朋友之间不同的句子下面画横线,圈出朋友之间相同的句子,完成后集体核对答案。(5分钟)4.再认真阅读一遍短文,根据文章内容判断2c中的5个句子的正误,完成后分别让几位学生回答问题,教师点拨。(5分钟)5.再次仔细阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)6.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)7.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(A)1.________ our football team failed in the match,we did our best.A.Though B.But C.Because D.As(B)2.I'm more outgoing than ________,and my hair is longer than ________.A.her;her B.her;hersC.hers;her D.hers;hers(D)3.The actress is already 50,but she looks ________ than she really is.A.young B.more youngC.more younger D.much younger(A)4.—The dish is delicious!—Well,at least it's ________ the one I cooked yesterday.A.as good as B.worse thanC.as well as D.as bad as(A)5.—Have you seen the funny movie Let the Bullet Fly?—Yes,it made me ________ many times.A.laugh B.cryC.sleep D.sing(A)6.That book is not so ________ as this one.A.interestingB.more interestingC.most interestingD.the most interesting(A)7.I don't care about the price,________ the car is in good condition.A.as long as B.bring outC.in fact D.be similar to(C)8.He said he was sixteen years old.________,he is eighteen years old.A.On time B.At timesC.In fact D.In time环节说明:通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.你和你的朋友跟文章中的人物相比是什么样的?仿照给出的例句写出5个句子,完成后小组内交流答案,教师邀请几位学生读出所写的句子。(5分钟)2.熟读2e中的4句关于朋友的谚语,看看哪句谚语是你最喜欢的,当你读这句谚语时你会想起哪位朋友,为什么?告诉你的搭档,之后邀请几位学生发表自己的观点。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节的学习,既复习了本节课的重点句型又熟练巩固了比较级;通过2e环节让学生掌握了关于朋友的谚语,又锻炼了学生的口语。Step 4 问题探究1.both的用法(1)那两件裙子都很漂亮。Both__of__the__skirts__are__beautiful.(2)两个答案都对。Both__answers__are__right.(3)吉姆和萨姆都是学生。Both__Jim__and__Sam__are__students.both在(1)句中作名词使用,意为“双方,两者,二人”;在(2)句中both还可以用作形容词,意为“两者的,双方的”;在(3)句中构成both…and…意为“不仅……而且……”,可连接两个并列的成分,若连接两个并列的主语,谓语动词用复数形式。both经常用在情态动词、助动词或系动词be之后,实义动词之前。注意:both…and…的否定式为neither…nor…;both的反义词是neither,意为“两者都不”。2.as long as的用法(1)这条河与那条河一样长。This__river__is__as__long__as__that__one.(2)只要不下雨,我们就可以去。We__can__go__as__long__as__it__doesn't__rain.as long as有两个意思,一是用于本义,意为“与……一样长(久)”,在否定句中,也可说成(not) so long as;二是用于引申义,表示“只要,以……为条件”,用于此意时也可说成so long as(不管是肯定句、否定句还是疑问句)。( )3.My sister has the same skirt ________ me.A.like B.as C.at D.for答案选择B,根据句意“我妹妹和我有一样的裙子”,the same as...与……一样。( )4.________ he is badly ill,________ he always keeps working as usual.A.Though;but B.But;/C.Though;/ D.But;though答案选择C,though意为“虽然,即使”,相当于although,该词与but不能同时出现在一个句子中。( )5.I am similar ________ my father.We both like reading books.A.to B.with C.at D.at答案选择A,词组be similar to和……相像。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:primary,information2.重点短语:primary school,a friend who is similar to me,a friend who is different from me3.重点句式:Who do you think should get the job,Jenny or Jill?1.比较级的用法2.用比较级来描写人物用比较级来描写人物一、预习课本P23-24新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.最初的__primary__ 2.消息__information__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.长的直发long__straight__hair2.小学primary__school3.善于与……相处be__good__with4.拨打……的电话call__sb__at…5.你认为谁能得到这份工作,Jenny还是Jill?Who__do__you__think__should__get__the__job,Jenny__or__Jill?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned Comparative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.Today we will learn how to describe a person with Comparative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.环节说明:开门见山提出本节课的学习重点——用形容词和副词的比较级来描述人物,完成本单元的写作训练。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真朗读3a表格中的内容,根据Wang Lingling和Liu Lili的信息来写一篇关于二人对比的短文。完成后小组内互相交流,教师抽查点评。(7分钟 )参考案例Wang Lingling's best friend is Liu Lili.They are both tall.But Wang Lingling has longer hair than Liu Lili.Wang Lingling likes reading,but Liu Lili likes sports.They are both very popular at school.Because both of them are very outgoing.Wang Lingling is more serious than Liu Lili.So she is more hardworking than Liu Lili.But Liu Lili is funnier than Wang Lingling and she is smarter than Wang Lingling.2.在3b短文中记录你两个朋友的信息,一个朋友是与你相像的,另外一个朋友是与你不同的。然后根据所记录的信息写两段话分别来描述你的朋友,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查点拨。(7分钟)参考案例I have a good friend.Her name is Mary.She is a friend who is similar to me.We both have long straight hair.I am as quiet as her.She likes reading books in her free time.Me,too.We often read books together.Both of us are good at English.I have another friend.Her name is Tara.She is a friend who is different from me.She is more outgoing than me.She always makes me laugh.She has shorter hair than me.She is also better at math than me.But I am better at English.We often help each other.They are both my good friends.Though they are different,I love them very much.3.大声朗读4中的工作招聘,然后仿照右面方框中的对话讨论一下你的两个同学谁更适合这项工作。(3分钟)环节说明:通过这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力和口语表达能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.读1中的单词或短语,然后根据两栏要求分类,完成后集体核对答案。(2分钟)2.认真阅读2中的句子,用所给词的正确形式填空,完成后核对答案,学生大声地熟读句子。(5分钟)3.用比较级写出你和你的朋友两方面的相似之处和不同之处,完成后小组内交流纠错,借鉴好词好句。(5分钟)环节说明:这一环节通过训练,让学生对本单元的比较级有了更深刻的理解。Step 4 问题探究( )1.Don't worry.Your grandma will get ________.A.well and well B.better and betterC.well and better D.good and well答案选择B,表示“越来越……”可以采用“比较级+比较级”或“more and more+原级”的结构,如果是单音节的形容词或副词,采用前一结构;如果是多音节的词,则要用后一结构,因此本题的正确答案选择B。( )2.The ________ we eat,the fatter we'll get.A.many B.more C.much D.less答案选择B,本句的意思是“我们吃得越多就会越胖”。句式The+比较级,the+比较级表“越……,就越……”,因此选择B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 4What's the best movie theater?1.重点单词:theater,comfortable,seat,screen,close,ticket2.重点短语:comfortable seats,big screen,close to home,buy tickets quickly,short waiting time3.重点句式:What's the best movie theater?It has the most comfortable seats.It has the best sound.It's the closest to home.1.形容词最高级的构成及用法2.能用最高级的基本句型来描述人物能用最高级的基本句型来描述人物一、预习课本P25新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.戏院__theater__ 2.舒适的__comfortable__3.座位__seat__ 4.银幕__screen__5.接近__close__ 6.入场券__ticket__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.舒适的座位__comfortable__seats__2.大的银幕__big__screen__3.紧挨着家__close__to__home__4.买票快__buy__tickets__quickly__5.等候的时间短__short__waiting__time__6.最好的影院是哪一家?__What's__the__best__movie__theater?__7.它有最舒适的座位。__It__has__the__most__comfortable__seats.__8.它有最好的音效。__It__has__the__best__sound.__9.它离家最近。__It's__the__closest__to__home.__Step 1 情景导入(Ask three students to stand up.)Teacher:Jim is tall.Sam is taller than Jim.Peter is taller than Sam.So Peter is the tallest of the three.(Write “Peter is the tallest of the three”on the blackboard and let the students repeat.)Then go on saying:Sam runs fast.Peter runs faster than Sam.Jim runs faster than Peter.So Jim runs fastest of the three.(Write “Jim runs fastest of the three”on the blackboard and let the students repeat.)(Point at the two sentences on the blackboard).Teacher:Tallest and fastest are Superlative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.Today we will learn it.环节说明:由形容词和副词的比较级引出最高级,过渡自然,易于学生理解。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读单词或词组并且互相背诵,然后写出单词或词组中形容词和副词的比较级。(3分钟)2.你怎么选择去哪家影院?以重要性与不重要性为标准,把1a中的单词短语分类。(2分钟)3.大声朗读1b中的句子,总结形容词和副词最高级的变化规则,教师点拨。然后让学生把1a中的形容词的最高级写出来。(5分钟)4.听录音,把对影院的叙述和电影院匹配起来,在后面的空格中写上影院的名称。(3分钟)5.再听一遍录音,集体核对答案。然后熟读1b中的句子。(5分钟)6.练习1c中的对话。然后根据你所熟悉的影院编写新对话;小组内做对话练习并进行组与组之间的比赛,教师点评。(5分钟)参考案例A:What's the best movie theater?B.Sun Cinema.It's the cheapest.A:But I think Moon Theater has the most comfortable seats.小结训练。(5分钟)写出下面单词的最高级。high highest hungry hungriestthirsty thirstiest beautiful most__beautifulthin thinnest late latestwet wettest funny funniestlittle lest good/well best(D)1.—Lily has two sisters,doesn't she?—Yes.She's taller and older than her two sisters,but she is not ________ one of the three.A.the tallest B.youngestC.shortest D.the cleverest(C)2.—Which month has ________ days in a year?—February.A.few B.littleC.the fewest D.the least(D)3.—Who does homework ________,Tom,Jack or Bill?—Bill.A.more carefullyB.more carefulC.the most carefulD.the most carefully(A)4.I think you need to be close ________ your classmates.It's good for you.A.to B.from C.with D.about环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使学生熟练掌握最高级。Step 3 问题探究1.形容词和副词最高级的构成(1)hard hardest great greatest(2)late latest nice nicest(3)big biggest fat fattest(4)easy easiest happy happiest(5)beautiful most__beautifulinteresting most__interesting(6)good best many most一般情况在词尾直接加est;以字母e结尾的只加st;重读闭音节词尾只有一个辅音字母时,先双写该辅音字母,再加est;以辅音字母+y结尾的先变y为i再加est;在多音节和部分双音节词的词前加most或least;此外还有一些不规则变化的单词,需要我们特殊背诵。2.最高级的用法(1)我是我们班最高的。I'm__the__tallest__in__our__class.(2)他是三个人中跳得最高的。He__jumps__highest__of__the__three__people.表示三者或三者以上的人或事物的比较,其中一个在某方面超过其他几个时,我们要用形容词或副词的最高级,在句子的后面可以用of(in)短语来表示比较的范围,形容词的最高级前面一般要加定冠词the。副词最高级前面的the可以省去。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:worst,cheaply,song,DJ,choose,carefully,reporter,fresh,comfortably2.重点短语:so far,no problem3.重点句式:You can buy clothes the most cheaply there.They play the most boring songs.The DJs choose songs the most carefully.Why do you think so?How do you like it so far?1.熟记形容词和副词最高级的规则变法及用法2.会用形容词和副词的最高级进行事物的比较1.熟记形容词和副词最高级的规则变法及用法2.会用形容词和副词的最高级进行事物的比较一、预习课本P26新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.最差的__worst__ 2.便宜地__cheaply__3.小心地__carefully__ 4.记者__reporter__5.新鲜的__fresh__ 6.舒服地__comfortably__7.歌曲__song__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.迄今为止__so__far__2.没有问题__no__problem__3.你可以以最便宜的价钱买下衣服。You__can__buy__clothes__the__most__cheaply__there.__4.他们播放最无聊的音乐。They__play__the__most__boring__songs.__5.主持人最谨慎地选择音乐。The__DJs__choose__songs__the__most__carefully.__6.你为什么这么认为?Why__do__you__think__so?__7.迄今为止你认为它怎么样呢?How__do__you__like__it__so__far?__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Good morning,everyone.I have two friends.They are Jim and Sam.We have the same age.But I have the longest hair.Sam is the tallest of us.Jim is the thinnest.Do you know what I said?Now please say something about your friends like this to your partner.环节说明:通过这个环节既复习了上节课学习的内容,又练习了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.阅读2a中的问题和选项,然后听录音,圈出男孩关于两个问题的答案,集体核对答案。(3分钟)2.大声地朗读2b中的句子,然后再听一遍录音,将商店或电台的名字写在相对应的句子前面,小组内核对答案,教师展示答案。(3分钟)3.再听一遍录音,并且跟读体会最高级的用法。(3分钟)4.一人扮演记者,另外一人扮演2a、2b中的男孩,根据听力答案信息,仿照2c形式来编练对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Hello!I am a reporter.Can I ask you some questions?B:Sure.A:What's the best clothes store in town?B:I think Miller's is the best.A:Why do you think so?B:Well,Miller's has…小结训练。(4分钟)1.The theater has the__biggest(big) screens in town.2.It's the__most__popular(popular) here.3.His home is the closest(close) to our school in our class.4.Which is the__best(good) radio station in town?5.You can buy clothes the__most__cheaply(cheap) there.6.It has the__worst(bad) service in town.环节说明:通过听、说和小结训练让学生掌握了最高级的用法,同时学生的口语表达能力在对话练习中得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生快速阅读对话,了解对话大意,回答问题:What's the name of the newest cinema in town?2.学生认真自读对话,根据对话内容完成下列句子。(5分钟)(1)Greg is __new__ in town.(2)Greg thinks the neighborhood is __fantastic__.(3)The best supermarket is __on__center__street__.(4)Greg thanks Helen for __telling__ him something about the neighborhood.3.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟) 4.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.Mobile phones are very popular now and they are ________ than before.A.cheap B.cheaperC.cheapest D.the cheapest(C)2.Who jumped ________ of all?A.far B.fartherC.farthest D.the most far(D)3.Whose sweater is ________ of all?A.cheaper B.cheapC.cheapest D.the cheapest(C)4.—Which month has ________ days in a year?—February.A.fewer B.moreC.the fewest D.the most环节说明:将对话转化成填空题,这样能对所学的重要句型起到复习巩固的作用,同时也加深了对对话的理解。Step 4 问题探究1.How do you like…?的用法(1)你认为这本书怎么样?How__do__you__like__this__book?“How do you like…?”相当于What__do__you__think__of…?意思是“你觉得……怎么样?”,日常口语中用来询问对方对某一事物的看法或者判断。( )2.________ has the best clothes.A.The MillerB.Miller'sC.Miller clothes Shop答案选择B,Miller's是英语中常见的表示店铺或场所的说法,当名词所有格修饰的名词是商店、诊所、家时,名词所有格后面的名词通常省去。( )3.He is a ________ boy,and he can do it ________.A.careful;carefully B.carefully;carefulC.careful;careful D.carefully;carefully答案选择A,careful是形容词,carefully是副词。boy是名词,要用形容词修饰定语;do是动词,要用副词carefully来修饰。( )4.—It is fine weather tomorrow.—I think ________.A.it B.is C.not D.so答案选择D,so代词,代替上文已经出现过的整个分句或分句的一部分。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:worse,service,pretty,menu,act,meal2.重点短语:most cinemas3.重点句式:What's the best movie theater to go to?—What do you think of 970AM?—I think 970AM is pretty bad.It has the worst music.He is much better than other actors at finding the most interesting roles.形容词和副词的最高级的用法形容词和副词的最高级的用法一、预习课本P27新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.较差的__worse__ 2.服务__service__3.相当__pretty__ 4.菜单__menu__5.扮演__act__6.早(或午、晚)餐__meal__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.大多数的电影院__most__cinemas__2.能去的最好的影院是哪家?__What's__the__best__movie__theater__to__go__to?__3.—你认为调频970怎么样?—我认为调频970相当糟糕,它有最糟糕的音乐。—What__do__you__think__of__970__AM?__—I__think__970__AM__is__pretty__bad.__It__has__the__worst__music.4.他比其他的演员更擅长发现最有趣的角色。He__is__much__better__than__other__actors__at__finding__the__most__interesting__roles.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to compare things with Superlative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.Today we will do some practice to remember it well.环节说明:开门见山地提出本节课的学习目标——形容词和副词的最高级。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(3分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟) 环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a的句子,然后用括号内所给词的正确形式填空,请几位学生到黑板上写答案,完成后教师点拨核对答案,学生大声朗读句子,体会形容词和副词三个级别的用法。(2分钟)2.根据你们镇上的三个商店的实际情况来完成表格,并且根据表格中的信息仿照3b格式来写六个句子,让几个学生到黑板上写句子,完成后小组内互相交流,教师点评所写句子。(3分钟)3.考虑一下你们镇上的三个饭店,根据实际情况来完成表格填空,然后向搭档分别叙述三个饭店的情况,让搭档选择出最好的饭店。小结训练。(4分钟)1.Tina sings the__best(well) in her class.2.This book is more__interesting than any other one,It's the most__interesting(interesting).3.Of all the theaters,Town Cinema is the__closest(close) to home.4.Town Cinema has the__shortest__waiting(short,wait) time.5.Movie World has the__most__comfortable(comfortable) seats.环节说明:通过本环节的学习,使学生对前一阶段所学的知识起到了复习的作用。Step 4 问题探究( )1.Which city is ________,Beijing,Shanghai or Fuzhou?A.beautiful B.more beautifulC.most beautiful D.the most beautiful答案选择D,Beijing,Shanghai or Fuzhou提问的对象是三者,应该选择最高级。这里面包含了最高级经常用到的句型:特殊疑问句+be+the+最高级,A,B or C?( )2.The Yellow River is the second ________ in China.A.long B.longerC.longest D.the longest答案选择C,这个句型包含了最高级经常用到的句型:主语+be+the+序数词+最高级+名词单数+表示范围的短语。( )3.She is one of ________ girls in her class.A.tall B.tallerC.tallest D.the tallest答案选择D,这个句型包含了最高级经常用到的句型:主语+be+one of+the+最高级+复数名词+表示范围的短语。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。What's__the__best__movie__theater__to__go__to?(可以去的最好的影院是哪家?)Town Cinema.It's__the__closest__to__home.And__you__can__buy__tickets__the__most__quickly__there.(它离家最近,并且你能最快地买到票。)Which__is__the__worst__store__in__town?(镇上最差的服装店是哪家?)Dream Clothes.It is worse(差) than Blue Moon.It has the__worst(最差的) service.What do you think__of(认为) 970AM?I think 970AM is pretty bad(差).It has the worst music.Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:creative,performer2.重点句式:My cousin Li Jing is the funniest person I know.—Who was the best performer?—Eliza was the best performer.形容词和副词的最高级的构成及用法形容词和副词的最高级的构成及用法一、预习课本P28新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.有创造力的__creative__2.表演者__performer__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列句型。1.我表弟李靖是我认识的最有趣的人。My__cousin__Li__Jing__is__the__funniest__person__I__know.2.—谁是最好的表演者?—伊莉莎是最好的表演者。—Who__was__the__best__performer?__—Eliza__was__the__best__performer.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We all know many famous performers,like Zhao Benshan,Pan Changjiang,Huang Bo…Do you think who is the best performer?And do you think who is the funniest performer?Now please tell your partner about your ideas.环节说明:由谈论演员导入新课,引起学生的学习兴趣,激起学生用英语表达的积极性。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1.大声朗读1a中的短语并熟记。然后写出表格中单词的反义词,小组内核对答案。(5分钟)2.以小组为单位,用1a中的单词,仿照1b中的形式告诉你的搭档你所熟悉的人。(4分钟)参考案例A:My cousin Li Jing is the funniest person I know.小结训练。(2分钟)选出能代替画线部分的选项。(B)1.The cinema is close__to my home.A.far B.near C.next.(A)2.The boring TV play made us want to sleep.A.dull B.interesting C.beautiful(B)3.This question is not__difficult to answer.A.important B.easy C.not easy环节说明:通过本环节的学习使学生熟练掌握了形容词的用法。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.认真听人们谈论学校才艺表演的对话,将图片和演出者匹配。(3分钟)2.再听一遍录音,听人们对表演者的评价,用形容词来填写表格,集体核对答案,完成1d。(5分钟)3.再听一遍录音,并跟读,整体感知对话。(3分钟)4.根据1d表格中的听力信息,仿照1e形式来编练新的对话,并邀请学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Who is the best performer?B.Eliza was the best performer.小结训练。(2分钟)根据首字母提示完成单词。A:What a great talent show!B:Yeah!A:__Who__ do you think was the best performer?B:I think Eliza was the best.A:Yeah,she was great.And I think Steve __and__ his dog was the __funniest__.B:Me too! I __couldn't__ stop laughing!And how __about__ Vera?A:Oh,she was the __most__ creative performer.She __played__ the guitar upside down.B:Who do you think was the __worst__?A:Oh,Dennis!He was terrible.He can't juggle at all!B:I know.A:__What__ do you think of the Math Teachers?B:Well,they __were__ definitely the loudest.Step 4 问题探究( )1.Liu Xiang is a great ________ as a player.A.succeed B.successC.successful D.successfully答案选择B,a和great修饰名词,故选择名词success。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:common,beautifully,role,winner,prize,everybody,example,poor,seriously,give2.重点短语:have…in common,all kinds of ,be up to…,play a role,make up,for example,take…seriously3.重点句式:Some people are truly talented.Talent shows are getting more and more popular.All these shows have one thing in common.That's up to you to decide.When people watch the show,they usually play a role in deciding the winner.Some think that the lives of the performers are made up.If you don't take these shows too seriously,they are fun to watch.They give people a way to make their dreams come true.1.重点短语和句型2.会用最高级来描述人物1.重点短语和句型2.会运用最高级来描述人物一、预习课本P29-30新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.与……相同__common__2.漂亮地__beautifully__3.作用__role__4.获胜者__winner__5.奖品__prize__6.每人__everybody__7.实例__example__8.贫穷的__poor__9.认真地__seriously__10.提供__give__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.最有天赋的人the__most__talented__person2.有相同特征have__one__thing__in__common3.最好的歌手the__best__singers4.各种各样的all__kinds__of5.是……的职责be__up__to6.发挥作用play__a__role__in7.编造make__up8.认真对待take…seriously9.才艺表演越来越受欢迎。Talent__shows__are__getting__more__and__more__popular.10.所有的节目都有一个相同点。All__these__shows__have__one__thing__in__common.11.那由你来决定。That's__up__to__you__to__decide.12.当人们观看表演的时候,他们在决定获胜者方面发挥着作用。When__people__watch__the__show,they__usually__play__a__role__in__deciding__the__winner.13.一些人认为表演者的生活是编造的。Some__think__that__the__lives__of__the__performers__are__made__up.14.如果你不是那么认真地对待这些节目,他们看起来是有趣的。If__you__don't__take__these__shows__too__seriously,they__are__fun__to__watch.15.他们为人们的梦想的实现提供了途径。They__give__people__a__way__to__make__their__dreams__come__true.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Have you ever heard of China's Got Talent?Do you know about the program?Do you know anything about such programs?Today we will learn a passage about talent shows.环节说明:由《中国达人秀》引出本节课的学习重点,引起学生的学习兴趣。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.谁是你知道的最有才艺的人,他会做什么呢?利用两人对话的形式向你的搭档介绍这个人。(3分钟)参考案例A:I think…is the most talented person.B:What can he/she do?A:He/She can…2.阅读2b文章,找出文章中涉及的三个才艺表演节目,完成后集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.再认真阅读一遍短文,根据文章内容回答2c中的5个问题,完成后分别让几位学生回答问题,教师点拨。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(7分钟)(B)1.These three bags all look nice.I can't decide which one to ________.A.make B.choose C.decide D.see(A)2.—Mom,could I play soccer with my friends?—That's up ________ you.A.to B.for C.with D.of(D)3.This ________ has the biggest screen,so people like to see movies here.A.restaurant B.radio stationC.clothes store D.theater(D)4.Today is one of ________ days of the year.A.hot B.hottestC.hotter D.the hottest(A)5.—Dad,would you please drive ________?—No hurry.We have enough time before the plane takes off.A.faster B.more slowlyC.more carefully D.more careful(A)6.An Indian or Chinese meal?It's up ________ you.A.to B.at C.for D.in(D)7.Telephones are playing an important role ________ our daily life.A.to B.at C.for D.in(A)8.Can you ________ a new conversation according to the picture?A.make up B.put upC.stand up D.look up(A)9.You should ________ your mistakes seriously,or you will make much bigger mistakes.A.take B.bringC.make D.correct(A)10.—Can you give the book ________ your sister?—No problem.A.to B.at C.for D.in环节说明:通过对本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.再次阅读文章,画出所有的最高级的词组,然后仿照给出的例句至少用其中的四个写句子,完成后小组内交流答案,然后让几位学生在全班展示写出的句子。(5分钟) 2.以小组为单位做调查,谁是班上最有才艺的人。在每项才艺的后面写出同学的名字,然后弄明白多少人同意你的观点。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节的学习,既巩固了2b短文,又复习了最高级的用法。Step 4 问题探究1.比较级+and+比较级(1)越来越大bigger__and__bigger(2)越来越重要more__and__more__important比较级+and+比较级,意为“越来越……”,当形容词的比较级是通过加more构成时,则表示为:more+and+more+形容词原级。2.be up to的用法(1)该由我来擦黑板了。It's__up__to__me__to__clean__the__blackboard.(2)我们是否去公园由你哥哥定。Whether__we__go__to__the__park__is__up__to__your__brother.be up to后面跟sb.to__do__sth.,表示“由某人做某事”,常用it作形式主语;be up to后面还可以跟人,表示“由某人决定,随某人。”3.play a role的用法(1)他在这部电影中扮演了一个重要的角色。He__plays__an__important__role__in__this__movie.(2)对于这次比赛的胜利,他发挥了重要的作用。He__played__an__important__role__in__the__success__of__the__game.play a role in有两种意思:一种意思是“在……中扮演角色”;另外一种意思是“在……中发挥作用”。play a role in后面经常跟名词,动名词或代词。4.take…seriously的用法我们要严肃对待这件事。We__should__take__this__thing__seriously.take sb./sth.seriously意为“严肃对待某人或某事”,其中seriously是副词,修饰词take。5.give的用法你能帮助我把这本书给玛丽吗?Can__you__help__me__give__this__book__to__Mary?或Can__you__help__me__give__Mary__this__book?give意为“提供,给”,经常用到的句型是:给某人某物give__sb.sth.或把某物给了某人give__sth.to__sb.。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:crowded2.重点句式:Greenwood Park is the best place to go to on weekends.There is something for everyone at Greenwood Park.Which is the best city?You can get a big plate of dumplings for only five yuan.1.最高级的用法2.用最高级来描写一个地方用最高级来描写一个地方一、预习课本P31-32新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。拥挤的__crowded__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找到下列句型。1.绿林公园是周末最好的去处。Greenwood__park__is__the__best__place__to__go__to__on__weekends.2.在绿林公园有适合每一个人可做的事情。There__is__something__for__everyone__at__Greenwood__Park.3.哪座城市是最好的?Which__is__the__best__city?4.仅仅五元钱就能买到一大盘饺子。You__can__get__a__big__plate__of__dumplings__for__only__five__yuan.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned Superlative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.Today we will learn how to describe a place with Superlative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs.环节说明:开门见山提出本节课的学习重点,用形容词和副词的最高级来描述一个地方,完成本单元的写作训练。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真阅读3a中关于Greenwood Park的短文,用方框中形容词或副词的最高级形式来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,然后大声地朗读短文,体会形容词和副词最高级的用法。(7分钟)2.考虑一下你家乡最好的地方或东西,为什么它们是最好的,根据要求填写3b的表格,完成后小组内互相交流。(3分钟) 3.认真阅读3a短文,然后仿照3a的形式写一篇关于你的家乡最好的地方的一篇短文,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查点拨。(7分钟)参考案例The People's Library is the best place to go to on weekends.I always do my homework most quickly on Saturday.Because I want to go to the People's Library to read books as soon as I can.The library is the most relaxing place on weekends because many people read books quietly.Some people think they are boring.But I think they are the most relaxing.There you can read books that you like and spend time with books.There are some books for everyone.After reading books,you can go to the park near the library to relax.4.和你的搭档讨论一下中国的城市,然后告诉全班学生你认为最好的城市是哪个,在汇报过程中可以参考方框中的语句。(3分钟)环节说明:通过这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力和口语能力表达。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.读1中的5个句子,然后用方框中单词的最高级形式来补全句子,完成后集体核对答案。(2分钟)2.大声地朗读核对答案后的句子,体会最高级的用法。3.认真阅读2中信息,然后根据信息内容来改正1~5小题的错误,完成后核对答案。(5分钟)环节说明:这一环节通过训练,让学生对本单元的形容词和副词的最高级有了更深刻的理解。Step 4 问题探究( )1.School is a good place ________.A.study B.studiesC.studying D.to study答案选择D,动词不定式做后置定语。( )2.Everyone in the two schools ________ a dictionary.A.has B.have C.having D.had答案选择A,这句话的主语是不定代词everyone,不定代词做主语谓语动词用单三形式。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 5Do you want to watch a game show?1.重点单词:sitcom,news,soap2.重点短语:game show,talk show,soap opera,sports show3.重点句式:What do you want to watch?—What do you think of talk shows?—They're OK.I don't mind them.I can't stand them.1.询问他人对事物的观点2.学会正确表达自己的看法1.询问他人对事物的观点2.学会正确表达自己的看法一、预习课本P33新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.情景喜剧__sitcom__2.新闻节目__news__3.肥皂剧__soap__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.游戏节目__game__show__2.访谈节目__talk__show__3.连续剧__soap__opera__4.体育节目__sports__show__5.你想去看什么?What__do__you__want__to__watch?6.—你认为访谈节目怎么样?—它们很好,我不介意它们。—What do you think of talk shows?—They're OK. I don't mind them. 7.我无法忍受它们。I__can't__stand__them.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:There are many shows,such as talk shows,game shows,sports shows,soap operas and so on.What kind of shows do you want to watch?What do you think of them?Let's talk about the shows today.环节说明:由学生熟悉的电视节目入手,激起他们的学习欲望,有助于对学生学习兴趣的培养。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词或词组,教师纠正错误读音,然后两人一组互相提问单词或词组。(5分钟)2.认真观察图片的电视节目,将电视节目和相对应的图片匹配,集体核对答案。(2分钟)3.认真听录音,根据听到的节目顺序给他们标号,集体核对答案。(3分钟)4.再认真听一遍录音,并跟读,整体感知对话内容。(3分钟)5.练习1c中的对话,并请学生表演。(3分钟)6.利用1c左侧方框中的单词或词组,仿照右侧方框中的对话来编写新的对话,两人一组进行练习,并请几组学生表演对话。(3分钟)参考案例A:What do you want to watch?B:What do you think of talk shows?A:They're OK.I don't mind them.B:Then let's watch a talk show.小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.—What do you think of ________ and ________?—I love ________.A.sports show;sitcom,themB.sports shows;sitcoms,themC.sports shows;sitcom,itD.sports show;sitcom,it(C)2.What ________ he ________ of sports shows?A.do;think B.do;thinksC.does;think D.does;thinks(C)3.Her brother says he can't ________ the wallet.A.think B.like C.stand D.stands4.What do you think of Man and Nature?(改为同义句)How do you like Man and Nature?5.Her mother doesn't__mind action movies.(对画线部分提问)What does her mother think of action movies?环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.mind的用法(1)我不介意体育节目。I__don't__mind__sports__shows.(2)你介意打开门吗?Do__you__mind__opening__the__door?(3)你介意我帮助你吗?Do__you__mind__my__helping__you?mind表示“介意,反对”的意思时,通常用在否定句、疑问句中。经常用到的句型:介意做某事mind__doing__sth.;介意某人做某事mind__one's__doing__sth.。2.stand的用法(1)我不能忍受这部电影了,它太无聊了。I__can't__stand__this__movie,it__is__too__boring.(2)我不能忍受等候这么长时间。I__can't__stand__waiting__for__such__a__long__time.stand“顺利接受,忍受”,多用于否定句。经常用到的句型:不能忍受做某事can't__stand__doing__sth.。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:educational,plan,hope,discussion,stand,happen,may,expect2.重点短语:find out,around the world,one day3.重点句式:Do you plan to watch the news tonight?I hope to find out what's going on around the world.We had a discussion about TV shows.I like to follow the story and see what happens next.They may not be very exciting,but you can expect to learn a lot from them.I hope to be a TV reporter one day.1.掌握重点单词的用法2.谈论自己对事物的喜好并陈述原因1.掌握重点单词的用法2.谈论自己对事物的喜好并陈述原因一、预习课本P34新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.计划__plan__ 2.有教育意义的__educational__3.希望__hope__ 4.讨论__discussion__5.忍受__stand__ 6.发生__happen__7.也许__may__ 8.预料__expect__二、认真预习2a-2d找出下列短语和句型。1.在课堂上in__class2.我最喜欢的电视节目my__favorite__TV__shows3.期望做某事expect__to__do__sth.4.你今天晚上计划看新闻吗?Do__you__plan__to__watch__the__news__tonight?5.我想弄清全世界发生了什么事情。I__hope__to__find__out__what's__going__on__around__the__world.6.我们进行了关于电视节目的讨论。We__had__a__discussion__about__TV__shows.7.我喜欢跟着故事看接下来会发生什么事。I__like__to__follow__the__story__and__see__what__hoppens__next.8.它们也许不是非常令人兴奋,但是你能期待从它们那里了解到很多东西。They__may__not__be__very__exciting,but__you__can__expect__to__learn__a__lot__from__them.9.我希望有一天能成为一名电视记者。I__hope__to__be__a__TV__reporter__one__day.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:What do you think of game shows?Student 1:I like them very much.Teacher:Why do you like them?Student 1:Because they are very interesting.Teacher:What do you think of sports games?Student 2:I don't like them at all.Because they are very boring.I don't like sports.Now please ask and answer like this in groups.环节说明:通过师生对话练习和生生对话练习,既复习了上节课的重点句型,又为本节课的谈论喜好陈述原因做了铺垫。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.学生朗读单词或词组,为听力做好准备。(2分钟)2.认真听Lin Hui和Sally的对话录音,根据听到的顺序给电视节目标出序号,集体核对答案,完成2a。(3分钟)3.再听一遍录音,将句子补充完整,集体核对答案后熟读句子。(5分钟)4.让学生用2a中的信息两人一组仿照2c的形式来练习对话,对话内容要反映自己的真实信息。参考案例A:Do you plan to watch the news tonight?B:Yes,I like watching the news.I watch it every night.A:Why?B:Because I hope to find out what's going on around the world.小结训练。(2分钟)(C)1.Summer vacation is coming,and I plan ________ my grandparents in the country.A.visit B.visitingC.to visit D.visited(C)2.I hope you can help me ________ who helped me with my homework.A.find B.seeC.find out D.look for(B)3.—The picnic is only in three days.Have you made any ________?—Not yet.So let's discuss what to prepare.(准备)A.wishes B.plansC.mistakes D.friends(C)4.They all hope ________ on time next week.A.me to arrive B.me arriveC.I arrive D.I to arrive环节说明:通过听、说学习训练让学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升,小结训练让学生巩固练习了重点单词的用法。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,回答下面的问题。(5分钟)(1)What did Sarah do in class today?(2)Does Grace like soap operas?Why?(3)What does Sarah think of soap operas?(4)Why does Sarah like news and talk shows best?2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3. 邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.I don't ________ where to eat lunch.You can decide yourself.A.stand B.mindC.like D.want(C)2.Brazil has better players,So I ________ them to win.A.hope B.exceptC.expect D.prefer(B)3.—Would you like ________ to the movie tonight?—Sure,________.A.go;I'd love toB.to go;I'd love toC.going;I'd loveD.going;I'd love to(B)4.There is ________ about H7N9 on the Internet.A.a news B.some newsC.some newses D.many was环节说明:将对话问题化,既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。Step 4 问题探究1.plan的用法(1)制定一个计划make__a__plan(2)我们计划参观长城。We__plan__to__visit__the__Great__Wall.plan意为“计划,打算”既可以作为动词,又可以作为名词,常用的句型:计划做某事plan__to__do__sth.。2.hope的用法(1)我希望你能很快好起来。I__hope__you__can__get__well__soon.(2)我希望能很快见到你。I__hope__to__see__you__soon.hope意为“希望”,经常用到的句型为:希望做某事hope__to__do__sth.;hope后面还可以跟宾语从句,但是不能接双宾语。3.expect的用法(1)我期待着明天去北京。We__expect__to__go__to__Beijing__tomorrow.(2)我期待你能和我一起去北京。I__expect__you__to__go__to__Beijing__with__me.(3)我期待你能通过考试。I__expect__that__you__can__pass__the__test.expect意为“期待、盼望、预期”,其句型是:期待做某事expect__to__do__sth.;期待某人做某事expect__sb.to__do__sth.;此外expect后面还可以跟宾语从句。4.happen的用法(1)这个故事发生在2003年。This__story__happened__in__2003.(2)你怎么啦?What__happened__to__you?(3)昨天我在街上碰巧遇到了我的一个朋友。I__happened__to__meet__a__friend__of__mine__in__the__street__yesterday.表示“某地(某时)发生了什么事”,常用到happen__in/at__sp.这一结构来表达,此时主语应是事情。表示“某人出了某事(常指不好的事)”,要用“sth.+happen+to sb.”这一结构来表达。表示“某人碰巧做某事”,要用“sb.+happen+to__do sth.”这一结构来表达。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:joke,comedy2.重点短语:comedy shows3.重点句式:What do you plan to watch tonight?What comedy shows do you like to watch?询问他人对事物的观点询问他人对事物的观点一、预习课本P35新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.笑话__joke__ 2.喜剧__comedy__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.喜剧节目__comedy__shows__2.你今天晚上打算看什么?What__do__you__plan__to__watch__tonight?3.你喜欢看什么喜剧节目?What__comedy__shows__do__you__like__to__watch?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned some words and some important sentences.Do you remember them?First let's have a dictaion.Teacher lets the students write some important words and sentences,then check the answers in pairs.环节说明:通过听写检查,让老师了解学生对上节课所学知识的掌握情况,从而促使学生更加努力地去学这一节课的内容。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟) 环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.根据情景及所学知识来补全对话,完成后小组内互相交流答案,然后两人一组练习对话,并请学生表演对话。(5分钟)2.根据自己的实际情况来回答3b的四个问题,完成后小组成员互相交流答案,并朗读问题和答案。(3分钟)3.以小组为单位,询问小组成员3c表格中的问题,根据答案的结果将小组成员的名字写在相应的问题后面。(3分钟)参考案例A:Do you want to watch a movie?B:Yes,I do.A:Do you hope to watch a sitcom?C:Yes,I do.小结训练。(4分钟)连词成句。(1)don't,I,mind,shows,really,talk(.)I__really__don't__mind__talk__shows.(2)your,of,sitcoms,what,sister,does,think(?)What__does__your__sister__think__of__sitcoms?(3)what,expect,you,learn,news,do,from,to(?)What__do__you__expect__to__learn__from__news?(4)hope,world,I,the,to,around,find,on,out,going,what's(.)I__hope__to__find__out__what's__going__on__around__the__world.环节说明:通过本环节的学习,让学生练习询问他人对事物观点的句型,同时提高了学生的语言表达能力。Step 4 问题探究( )We can learn something important ________ the books.A.at B.to C.from D.in答案选择C,learn from是“从……得知,向……学习”,是指从某个地方或者某人学到知识,常用短语是learn from sb.向某人学习。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Do you want to__watch(watch) the news?Yes,I do./No,I don't.What__do__you__think__of__talk__shows?(你认为访谈节目怎么样?)I__can't__stand__them.(我不能忍受他们。)/I__don't__mind__them.(我不介意他们。)What do you plan to__watch(watch) tonight?I plan__to__watch Days of Our Past.What can you expect to__learn(learn) from sitcoms?We can learn some great jokes.Why__do__you__like__watching__the__news?(你为什么喜欢看新闻?)Because__I__hope__to__find__out__what's__going__on__around__the__world.(因为我想弄清世界发生了什么事情。)Section B(1a-1d)1.重点单词:meaningless,action,cartoon2.重点短语:action movie,scary movie3.重点句式:John wants to watch talk shows because they're enjoyable.1.用形容词描述电影和电视节目2.能够表达自己的喜好并陈述原因能够表达自己的喜好并陈述原因一、预习课本P36新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.毫无意义的__meaningless__2.行动__action__3.动画片__cartoon__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列短语和句型。1.动作电影__action__movie__2.恐怖电影__scary__movie__3.约翰想要看访谈节目因为它们令人愉快。John__wants__to__watch__talk__shows__because__they're__enjoyable.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you like action movies?Student 1:Yes,I do.Teacher:Why do you like them?Student 1:Because they are very exciting.Teacher:Do you want to watch news?Student 2:No,I don't.Teacher:Why don't you like them?Student 2:Because they are very serious.环节说明:通过对话练习复习巩固所学句型,练习了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材1a-1d的任务1.学生大声朗读1a中的单词,然后两人一组互相提问1a中的形容词。(2分钟)2.认真观察图片,从方框中选择合适的形容词来描述图片内容。(2分钟)3.听录音,在1a的方框中圈出所听到的形容词,完成1b。(3分钟)4.再听一遍录音,写出John和Mary形容电视节目或电影用到的形容词,集体完成1c表格。(3分钟)5.听第三遍录音,整体感知对话内容。(2分钟)6.根据1c中的信息,告诉你的搭档John和Mary喜欢看的电视节目或电影及原因,然后告诉你的搭档你喜欢看的电视节目或电影及原因,邀请几名学生来展示。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(1)The movie is educational(education).(2)Do you enjoy the enjoyable movie?(enjoy)(3)The movie is meaningless(meaning),I don't like it.(4)The boy often relaxes at the park.It's a relaxing place to go.(relax)(5)We are all excited about the exciting movie.(excite)环节说明:通过听说训练,让学生更熟练地掌握语言交际用语,通过小结训练,让学生熟练掌握了形容词的用法。Step 3 问题探究He likes ________ (enjoy) movie.答案为enjoyable,movie是名词,要用形容词来修饰,enjoy是动词,其形容词形式为enjoyable。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:famous,appear,become,rich,successful,might,main,reason,film,unlucky,lose,ready,character2.重点短语:think of,over 80 years ago,come out,one of the main reasons,such as,more than3.重点句式:When people say “culture”,we think of art and history.We all know and love the black mouse with two large round ears—Mickey Mouse.It was the first cartoon with sound and music.He always tried to face any danger.Mickey was unlucky and had many problems such as losing his house or girlfriend.He was always ready to try his best.Today's cartoons are usually not so simple as little Mickey Mouse,but everyone still knows and loves him.1.重点短语和句型2.了解Mickey Mouse的历史重点短语和句型一、预习课本P37-38新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.文化__culture__ 2.著名的__famous__3.出现__appear__ 4.变成__become__5.富有的__rich__ 6.有成就的__successful__7.可能__might__ 8.主要的__main__9.理由__reason__ 10.电影__film__11.不幸的__unlucky__ 12.失去__lose__13.愿意的__ready__ 14.人物__character__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.想起艺术和历史think__of__art__and__history2.因……而著名be__famous__for3.在美国文化中in__American__culture4.80多年前over__eighty__years__ago5.在卡通片中出现appear__in__the__cartoon6.出版,发行come__out7.主要的原因之一one__of__the__main__reasons8.像一个普通人be__like__a__common__man9.在他的早期电影中in__his__early__films10.这是第一部配有声音和音乐的卡通片。It__was__the__first__cartoon__with__sound__and__music.11.他总是尽力面对任何困难。He__always__tried__to__face__any__danger.12.米奇是不幸的,他遇到了很多问题,例如,失去了他的房子和女朋友。Mickey__was__unlucky__and__had__many__problems__such__as__losing__his__house__or__girlfriend.13.他总是乐意尽自己最大的努力。He__was__always__ready__to__try__his__best.14.今天的卡通已不止小米鼠老那么简单,但每个人仍然知道他是谁并且爱他。Today's__cartoons__are__usually__not__so__simple__as__little__Mickey__Mouse,but__everyone__still__knows__and__loves__him.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you like cartoons?What cartoon characters do you know?Do you know a black mouse with two large round ears?Do you know what his name is?Yes,his name is Mickey.He is an unlucky but a very brave mouse.He always tried to face any danger.We all want to be like Mickey.But do you want to know more about the mouse?Today we will learn more about him.环节说明:以大家喜爱的卡通人物Mickey导入本课学习内容,引起学生的好奇心,激发他们的学习兴趣。Step 2 完成教材2a-2b的任务1.小组内互相讨论2a中的三个问题,然后邀请几个学生谈谈自己的想法。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2b短文,了解短文大意,完成38页上面的时间轴。(2分钟)3.再次仔细阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)4.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)5.熟读短文,背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(C)1.When did this cartoon ________?A.came out B.come inC.come out D.came in(C)2.—When was David born?—He was born ________ June 12,1989.A.at B.in C.on D.for(B)3.Do you know the girl ________ long hair?A.has B.with C.had D.have(D)4.China is famous ________ the Great wall.A.on B.at C.with D.for(A)5.He always tries ________ any danger.A.to face B.facing C.faces D.face(A)6.When I see the photo,I will ________ my sister.A.think of B.think overC.think out D.think on(D)7.One of my friends ________ Canada.A.comes in B.comes toC.come from D.comes from环节说明:通过本环节的学习锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2c-2e的任务1.认真阅读课文,根据Mickey的历史信息来完成2c的表格,完成后请几位学生回答问题,教师点拨。(5分钟)2.再次阅读课文,然后和搭档来讨论2d中的4个问题,然后就其中的一两个问题让学生发表自己的观点。(5分钟)3.两人一组互相提问背诵2e中的短语,然后将这些短语在课文中画出来,并且用这些短语来编写新的句子,请几位学生到黑板上板书自己的句子,完成后小组内互相交流,教师点拨黑板上写的句子。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(1)当你离开的时候,你会想起我吗?Will__you__think__of__me__when__you__are__away?(2)他想再次出现。He__wants__to__appear__again.(3)我们能做很多运动,例如跑步、打篮球。We__can__do__many__kinds__of__sports__such__as__running,playing__basketball.(4)他非常乐意去帮助我学英语。He__is__ready__to__help__me__study__English.环节说明:2c环节的学习让学生对课文有了更深刻的理解,同时锻炼了学生的阅读能力;2d环节让学生发表自己的观点,同时锻炼了学生的口语;2e环节和小结训练让学生对本节课的重点短语进行了巩固练习。Step 4 问题探究( )1.I want to try my best ________ it well.A.do B.to doC.does D.doing答案选择B,try one's best to do sth.尽某人最大的努力去做某事。( )2.He ________ the movie two years ago.A.watch B.is watchingC.watched D.watches答案选择C,因为有two years ago两年以前,这是一般过去时态的标志词,所以选watched。( )3.The girl ________ English these days.A.tries she best to learnB.is trying her best learningC.is trying her best to learnD.tries her best to learn答案选择C,these days这些天,是现在进行时态的标志词,而try one's best to do sth.是尽某人最大的努力去做某事,所以答案选择C。4.famous的用法(1)一个著名的歌手a__famous__singer(2)周杰伦因为他的歌曲而出名。Jay__Chou__is__famous__for__his__songs.(3)周杰伦作为一名歌手而出名。Jay__Chou__is__famous__as__a__singer.famous意为“著名的,出名的”,经常用到的句型:因为……而出名be__famous__for…;作为……而出名be__famous__as…请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:army2.重点短语:dress up,take one's place,do a good job3.重点句式:She dresses up like a boy and takes her father's place to fight in the army.The other actors are also fantastic and they did a good job in the movie.1.学会问他人对事物的看法2.会介绍影片会用学过的知识来介绍影片一、预习课本P38-39新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。军队__army__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.乔装打扮__dress__up__2.替代某人的位置__take__one's__place__3.干得好__do__a__good__job__4.她打扮成一个男人,替她父亲在军队里打仗。She__dresses__up__like__a__boy__and__takes__her__father's__place__to__fight__in__the__army.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you know the story about Mulan?She is a girl,but she dresses up like a boy and takes her father's place to fight in the army.A film has been made according to the story.Now let's see the movie reviews to know something more about the movie.环节说明:由花木兰替父从军,引起学生的学习兴趣;由《花木兰》的影视评论,引出影视评论的写法,过渡自然。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真阅读3a中关于《花木兰》的短文,选用方框中的单词来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,然后大声地朗读短文。(5分钟)2.根据要求写出你自己的电影评论的注解。(3分钟)3.根据3b填写的内容来写你自己的电影评论,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查点拨。(7分钟)参考案例Lost on Journey is my favorite movie.It's a comedy movie.In the movie,there are two important persons.They are the boss,Li Chenggong and the young worker out of home.Niu Geng.Li Chenggong wants to go to Wuhan to spend the Spring Festival with his family.But Niu Geng wants to go to Wuhan to ask his boss for his money.They meet on the way.The journey to Wuhan is full of hardships.They come across many unexpected hardships.But they get them over and get to Wuhan at last.The movie is very funny.It always makes me laugh.The actor plays Niu Geng's role very well.The other actors also play very wonderfully.I like the movie very much.The movie shows that Niu Geng's kind and lovely.If you want to watch a movie and plan to watch something funny,choose Lost on Journey.4.两人一组利用What do you think of…?句型互相提问对电影或电视节目的看法,然后把描述电视节目或电影的形容词写在4的表格中,完成后小组内互相交流。(5分钟)小结训练。(1分钟)(D)1.We all ________ as all kinds of animals at the party yesterday.A.get dressed B.get dressC.dress up D.dressed up(B)2.You are very important in the team.No one can ________.A.takes your place B.take your placeC.take you place D.takes you place环节说明:这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力和口语表达能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.根据括号内的提示完成对话,完成后集体核对答案。(5分钟)2.大声地朗读核对答案后的句子,然后两人一组练习对话。(3分钟)3.认真阅读2中的5个句子,在你同意的句子后面打勾,在你不同意的句子后面打叉。然后给出你同意或不同意的理由,小组内交流自己的观点。(5分钟)环节说明:通过1环节的学习,学生牢固掌握了本单元的重点单词和句型,2环节的学习使学生能充分发表自己的观点,同时锻炼了口语表达能力。Step 4 问题探究( )1.He dressed up ________ Harry Potter.A.in B.like C.for D.as答案选择D,dress sb.up…as把某人打扮成……的样子。( )2.Tom is ill,Sam will ________ to do it.A.take place B.take his placeC.take him place答案选择B,根据句意可知“汤姆生病了,萨姆将替他做这件事”,应该选择take his place,意为“代替”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 6I'm going to study computer science.1.重点单词:cook,doctor,engineer,violinist,driver,pilot,pianist,scientist2.重点短语:grow up,computer programmer,bus driver,basketball player3.重点句式:—What do you want to be when you grow up?—I want to be a basketball player.—How are you going to do that?—I'm going to practice basketball every day.1.重点词组和句型2.用be going to句型来谈论将来的打算1.be going to的用法2.用be going to句型来谈论将来的打算一、预习课本P41新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.厨师__cook__ 2.医生__doctor__3.工程师__engineer__ 4.小提琴手__violinist__5.司机__driver__ 6.飞行员__pilot__7.钢琴家__pianist__ 8.科学家__scientist__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.学习电脑科技study__computer__science2.成长,长大grow__up3.编程人员a__computer__programmer4.上表演课take__acting__lessons5.练习篮球practice__basketball6.努力学数学study__math__really__hardStep 1 情景导入Teacher:There are many jobs in the world,such as teachers,doctors,workers and so on,people who do different jobs play different roles in society.Now I am a teacher.I want to be a doctor.What do you want to be?Student 1:I want to be a movie star.Teacher:What do you want to be?Student 2:I want to be a singer.……环节说明:从社会上的不同职业以及自己的理想职业入手,在师生问答中自然而然导入新课。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词或词组,教师纠正错误读音,然后两人一组互相提问背诵单词或词组。(5分钟)2.你认为这些工作有趣吗?请把他们按1~12的顺序排列,1是最有趣的,12是最没趣的,完成后小组内互相交流,互相了解对方对职业的看法。(2分钟)3.认真听录音,完成1b的填空。(3分钟)4.再认真听一遍录音,完成匹配。(3分钟)5.听第三遍录音,学生跟读。(2分钟)6.学生两人一组练习图片中的对话,然后运用1b中的信息仿照图片对话形式进行对话练习,邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:What do you want to be when you grow up?B:I want to be a basketball player.A:How are you going to do that?B:I'm going to practice basketball every day.小结训练。(5分钟)(D)1.—What are you ________ when you grow up?—Well,I'm going to be an engineer.A.going B.beC.to do D.going to be(A)2.—________ are you going to do that?—I'm going to study really hard.A.How B.Why C.What D.When(D)3.There is going to ________ a football game this afternoon.A.have B.has C.is D.be(C)4.Does Tom want ________ a bus driver?A.to B.beC.to be D.to do(B)5.His father is ________ engineer.A.a B.an C.the D.×(A)6.—What does your sister want to be?—She wants to be a teacher when she ________.A.grows upB.grow upC.is going to grow upD.grew up环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.be going to的用法(1)我打算每天练习说英语。I__am__going__to__practice__speaking__English__every__day.(2)我不打算明天去上表演课。I__am__not__going__to__have__acting__lessons__tomorrow.(3)你明天去弹钢琴吗?Are__you__going__to__play__the__piano?(4)你打算怎么去做呢?How__are__you__going__to__do__that? be going to是一般将来时态的一种表达方式,表示打算做某事,其结构为:主语+be going to+do__sth.,其中be随主语的人称和数的变化而变化。当主语是第三人称单数时用is,主语是第二人称及复数时用are,主语是I时用am;变否定句时,在am,is,are的后面加not;一般疑问句是把be动词提到主语前面,特殊疑问句由疑问词+be__going__to构成。( )2.My mother is a singer,she practices ________ every day.A.sing B.singsC.to sing D.singing答案选择D,practice doing sth.练习做某事。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:熟练掌握P42的单词2.重点短语:be sure about,make sure3.重点句式:I know why you're so good at writing stories.—How are you going to become a writer?—I'm going to keep on writing stories.I'm not sure about that.Just make sure you try your best.Then you can be anything you want!1.重点短语及句型2.会用be going to句型来描述将来的职业打算1.重点短语及句型2.会用be going to句型来描述将来的职业打算认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.确信__be__sure__about__ 2.确保__make__sure__3.我知道你为什么如此擅长写故事了。I__know__why__you're__so__good__at__writing__stories.4.—成为一名作家,你将怎样做?—我将继续坚持写作。—How are you going to become a writer?—I'm going to keep on writing stories.5.我还不确定。I'm__not__sure__about__that.7.确保你是尽力了,你就能做你想做的任何职业。Just__make__sure__you__try__your__best.__Then__you__can__be__anything__you__want!Step 1 情景导入Teacher:What do you want to be when you grow up?Student 1:I want to be an engineer.Teacher:How are you going to do that?Student 1:I am going to study science hard.Teacher:What does he(student 1) want to be when he grows up?Student 2:He wants to be an engineer.Teacher:How is he going to do that?Student 2:He is going to study science hard.Now please practice conversations like this in groups.……环节说明:通过对话练习既复习了上节课的重点句型,同时改编的对话让学生对单三形式进行了练习。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.认真听录音,在程寒想做的职业的图片方框内打勾并核对答案,完成2a。(3分钟)2.再听一遍录音完成2b表格填空,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.听第三遍录音,并跟读录音。(3分钟)4.根据听力信息中程寒的计划,两人一组练习对话,并邀请多组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:What does Cheng Han want to be?B:He wants to be…小结训练。(4分钟)(1)你的弟弟想做什么工作?What__does__your__brother__want__to__be?(2)我打算明天去拜访我的老师。I'm__going__to__visit__my__teacher__tomorrow.(3)他将怎样做才能说好英语呢?How__is__he__going__to__speak__English__well?环节说明:通过听说读写学习训练,学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,回答下面的问题。(5分钟)(1)What is Ken doing?(2)What does Ken want to be?(3)How is Ken doing to become a writer?(4)Does Andy want to be a doctor?2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.Look,the girl ________ English stories.A.read B.is readingC.reads D.is going to read(C)2.________ your sister good at ________ stories?A.Does;writing B.Is;writeC.Is;writing D.Does;write(C)3.After a short break,he keeps on ________.A.work B.to workC.working D.worked(D)4.I hear we are going to have a test,but I am not sure ________ it.A.in B.on C.at D.about环节说明:将对话问题化,既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解;小结训练巩固练习了重要知识点。Step 4 问题探究1.sure的用法(1)我对这个答案有把握。I'm__sure__about__this__answer.(2)我确信能做好这件事情。I'm__sure__to__do__this__thing__well.(3)我确信他会努力学习的。I'm__sure__he__will__study__hard.(4)—你能关上门吗?—当然可以。—Would__you__please__close__the__door?—Sure.(5)他确定他已经关上窗户了。He__makes__sure__that__he__has__closed__the__window.(1)be sure+of/about+名词或动名词,意为“确信……”;“对……有把握”。(2)be sure+不定式,表示说话人对句子主语作出的判断,认为句子主语“必定”、“必然会”、“准会”如何如何。(3)be sure+宾语从句,表示主句主语对宾语从句中所涉及的事物作出的判断,意为“确信某事一定会……”。(4)主要用于口语,此时的“Sure”相当于“OK”或“Certainly”。(5)sure经常用到的短语是make sure,有弄清、确保之意,经常跟“宾语”从句。( )2.He is very tired,but he keeps on ________ after a short rest.A.walk B.walksC.walking D.to walk答案选择C,keep on doing sth.继续做某事。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:college,education,medicine,university,London,article,send2.重点短语:a race car driver,a fast car,a cooking school,take acting lessons3.重点句式:—Where are you going to work?—I'm going to move to Shanghai.—When are you going to start?—I'm going to start when I finish high school and college.He's going to take acting lessons.I'm going to study medicine at a university.I'm going to write articles and send them to magazines and newspapers.1.重点单词和句型2.熟练运用be going to句型询问他人对事物的观点一、预习课本P43新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.学院__college__ 2.教育__education__3.医学__medicine__ 4.大学__university__5.伦敦__London__ 6.文章__article__7.邮寄__send__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.搬到……move__to…2.高中和大学毕业finish__high__school__and__college3.一位赛车手a__race__car__driver4.上声乐课take__singing__lessons5.学习教育学study__education6.上烹饪学校go__to__a__cooking__school7.—你将什么时候动身呀?—当我读完高中和大学的时候就动身去。—When are you going to start?—I'm going to start when I finish high school and college.8.我将去上表演课。He's__going__to__take__acting__lessons.9.我将去大学学医。I'm__going__to__study__medicine__at__a__university.10.我将写文章并把它们寄到杂志社或报社。I'm__going__to__write__articles__and__send__them__to__magazines__and__newspapers.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We learned some words and some important sentences.Do you remember them?First let's have a dictation.Teacher lets the students write some important words and sentences,then check the answers in pairs.环节说明:通过听写检查,老师了解了学生对上节课所学知识的掌握情况,从而促使学生更加努力地去学这一节课的内容。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a左右两组句子,然后将句子搭配,完成后小组内互相交流答案,然后熟读句子。(3分钟)2.认真阅读3b中的对话,根据所学知识补全对话,完成后小组成员互相交流答案,然后两人一组练习对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)3.完成3c表格,然后和你的搭档仿照方框中的对话进行练习。(3分钟)参考案例A:What do you want to be when you grow up?B:I want to be a reporter.A:How are you going to do that?B:I'm going to write articles and send them to magazines and newspapers.小结训练。(2分钟)(A)1.The old man worked at ________ university.A.a B.an C.any D./(B)2.She is going to be a doctor when she ________ up.A.grow B.growsC.is going to grow D.grew(D)3.He is in Beijing now,but he ________ London next year.A.moves to B.is going to moveC.moved to D.is going to move to(B)4.—Can you help me send the books ________ Jim?—No problem.A.for B.to C.at D.with环节说明:通过本环节的学习,学生练习掌握了be going to句型,同时提高了语言表达能力。Step 4 问题探究1.send的用法你能把这本书送给Jim吗?Can__you__send__this__book__to__Jim?或Can__you__send__Jim__this__book?send意为“邮寄,赠送”,把某东西送给某人send__sb.sth.或send__sth.to__sb.( )2.I am going to tell him about it when I ________ him.A.see B.am going to seeC.is seeing D.saw答案选择A,when意为“当……的时候”,引导时间状语从句,主句用一般将来时态,从句用一般现在时态,be going to是将来时态的一种形式,因此答案选择A。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。What__do__you__want__to__be__when__you__grow__up?(长大之后你想干什么?)I__want__to__be__an__engineer.(我想成为一名工程师。)How__are__you__going__to__do__that?(你打算怎么去做呢?)I'm__going__to__study__math__really__hard.(我将努力学习数学。)Where__are__you__going__to__work?(你将去哪里工作?)I'm__going__to__move__to__Shanghai.(我将搬到上海去。)When__are__you__going__to__start?(你将什么时候动身?)I'm__going__to__start__when__I__finish__high__school__and__college.(当我读完高中和大学的时候就动身去。)Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:resolution,team,foreign2.重点短语:make the soccer team,get good grades,get lots of exercise3.重点句式:I'm going to learn another foreign language .Sounds like a good plan.用be going to句型来制定新年计划用be going to句型来制定新年计划一、预习课本P44新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.决定__resolution__ 2.队,组__team__3.外国的__foreign__二、认真预习1a-1e,找出下列短语和句型。1.组建足球队make__the__soccer__team2.新年决心New__Year's__resolutions3.学习弹钢琴learn__to__play__the__piano4.吃更健康的食物eat__healthier__food5.多锻炼get__lots__of__exercise6.学习另一门外语learn__another__foreign__language7.听起来像是一个好计划Sounds__like__a__good__planStep 1 情景导入Teacher:New Year is coming,many people make their New Year's resolutions.Some people are going to visit some interesting places.Some people are going to take more exercise to keep healthy.Some people are going to study hard to learn a lot.What about your New Year's resolutions?Now please say something about your New Year's resolutions to your partner.环节说明:由新年到来,人们制定新年计划入手,让学生们谈论自己的新年计划,过渡自然,激起学生用英语表达的欲望,同时又锻炼了学生的口语表达能力。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1. 大声朗读1a的句子,然后将句子和图片匹配,集体核对答案。(3分钟)2.熟读并背诵句子,然后两人一组互相提问。(5分钟)3.两人一组互相练习1b的对话,然后以此对话形式谈谈你明年的打算。参考案例A:What are you going to do next year?B:Well,I'm going to take guitar lessons.I really love music.A:Sounds interesting.I'm going to learn another foreign language.B:Are you?Great!But foreign languages are not for me.小结训练。(3分钟)(1)你打算组建足球队吗?Are__you__going__to__make__a__soccer__team?(2)我不打算学另外一种外语。I'm__not__going__to__study__a__foreign__language.(3)我想学弹吉他。I__want__to__learn__to__play__the__guitar.(4)明年你的爸爸打算干什么?What__is__your__father__going__to__do__next__year?环节说明:通过这个环节的对话和习题练习,学生熟练地掌握了be going to句型和一些重要的词组。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.听录音,在1a中圈出所听到的新年计划,集体核对答案,完成1c。(3分钟)2.再听一遍录音,写出人们将如何去实现他们的工作计划,核对答案,完成1d。(3分钟)3.听第三遍录音,学生跟着大声朗读。(3分钟)4.让学生们列一个计划及如何去实施计划的清单,然后小组内成员仿照1e的对话形式讨论一下彼此的清单内容,并邀请几组学生表演自编对话。(5分钟) 小结训练。(2分钟)(D)1.He ________ when he was four years old.A.learn to ride a bikeB.learned to ride bikeC.learned riding a bikeD.learned to ride a bike(B)2.—What is her New Year's ________?—She is going to study a lot.A.think B.resolutionC.idea D.food(A)3.—I am going to learn the piano when I grow up.—That sounds ________ a good idea.A.like B.as C.about D.of(C)4.—Is Mr.Brown living here?—No,he moved ________ last week.A.to anywhere quietB.somewhere quietC.to somewhere quietD.to quiet somewhere环节说明:通过听说训练,学生更熟练地掌握了语言交际用语;通过小结训练,语言目标得以强化。Step 4 问题探究( )1.There ________ a basketball match tomorrow.A.isB.is going to haveC.is going to beD.there is going to答案选择C,there be结构的一般将来时态是There is going to be或there will be,因此答案选择C。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:question,meaning,discuss,promise,beginning,improve,physical,selfimprovement,hobby,weekly,schoolwork,agree2.重点短语:be able to,most of the time,make promises,get back,make resolutions,at the beginning of,write down,different kinds of,have to do with,take up,a weekly plan,agree with3.重点句式:When we make resolutions at the beginning of the year,we hope that we are going to improve our lives.Many resolutions have to do with selfimprovement.Sometimes the resolutions may be the too difficult to keep.The best resolution is to have no resolutions.The start of the year is often a time for making resolutions.1.重点短语和句型2.了解关于计划的一些内容(计划的含义、种类以及实施过程中出现的问题)重点短语和句型一、预习课本P45-46新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.怀疑__question__ 2.意义__meaning__3.讨论__discuss__ 4.承诺__promise__5.开端__beginning__ 6.改进__improve__7.身体的__physical__ 8.自我改进__selfimprovement__9.业余爱好__hobby__ 10.每周的__weekly__11.学校作业__school__work__ 12.同意__agree__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.对某人许下诺言make__promises__to__sb.2.整理某人的房间tidy__one's__room3.从学校回来get__back__from__school4.在一年开始的时候at__the__beginning__of__the__year5.提高我们的生活improve__our__lives6.身体健康状况physical__health7.开始一项运动项目start__an__exercise__program8.少吃快餐eat__less__fast__food9.与自我提升有关have__to__do__with__selfimprovement10.开始培养一个爱好take__up__a__hobby11.当我们在一年的开始制订计划的时候,我们希望能够改善我们的生活。When__we__make__resolutions__at__the__beginning__of__the__year,we__hope__that__we__are__going__to__improve__our__lives.12.许多计划和自我改进有关系。Many__resolutions__have__to__do__with__selfimprovement.13.有时这些计划也许太难了而不能坚持。Sometimes__the__resolutions__may__be__too__difficult__to__keep.14.最好的计划就是没有计划。The__best__resolution__is__to__have__no__resolutions.15.年初经常是制定计划的时间。The__start__of__the__year__is__often__a__time__for__making__resolutions.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Each of us often makes resolutions for many things.But do you know what resolutions are?Do you know the kinds of resolutions?And Do you know what difficulties you may face?If you want to know the answers to the questions,please let's learn from 2a to 2e together.环节说明:针对制订计划这个话题,向学生提出问题,引起学生的好奇心,激发他们的学习欲望。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.小组内互相讨论2a中的问题,然后教师邀请几个学生谈谈自己的想法。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2b短文,了解短文大意,选出每个段落的段意,并且画出帮助你选择段意的单词或短语。(3分钟)3.认真阅读短文,将2c中的4个句子放在文章中适合的位置,使文章完整,完成后集体核对答案。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(7分钟)(C)1.I ________ swim next year.A.canB.am able toC.am going to be able toD.could(D)2.We all make some resolutions ________ the year.A.at beginning of B.the beginning ofC.in the beginning of D.at the beginning of(C)3.Here is my telephone number.Please ________.A.write down it B.write them downC.write it down D.write down them(B)4.I read a book last week,and the book has to do ________ earthquake.A.to B.with C.in D.on(B)5.I like playing the piano,and I am going to ________ from now on.A.take up B.take it upC.take up it D.take off it(C)6.His idea sounds good,we all agree ________ him.A.in B.to C.with D.at(B)7.Eating vegetables ________ good for your health.A.am B.is C.are D.be(C)8.The old man is ________ work.A.very old to do B.too old onC.too old to finish D.very old to finish环节说明:本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.认真阅读课文,根据短文内容回答问题,教师找学生到黑板上板演答案,并点拨。(5分钟)2.两人一组互相提问背诵2e中的短语,然后将这些短语在课文中画出来,并且用这些短语来编写新的句子,请几位学生到黑板上板演句子,完成后小组内互相交流,教师点拨黑板上写的句子。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节让学生对文章有了更深刻的理解;2e环节让学生熟练掌握并灵活运用了重点短语.Step 4 问题探究1.write down的用法(1)写出你的名字write__down__your__name(2)把它写下来write__it__downwrite down是动词+副词结构,如果宾语是人称代词的宾格要放到中间。如果宾语是名词既可以放到中间也可以放到后面。2.too…to的用法(1)他年龄太小,不能参军。He__is__too__young__to__join__the__army.(2)这道数学题太难我解不出来。This__math__problem__is__too__difficult__for__me__to__work__it__out.或This__math__problem__is__not__easy__for__me__to__work__it__out.或This__math__problem__is__so__difficult__that__I__can't__work__it__out.too…to…句型形式上是肯定的,但是它在意义上却是否定的,表示“太……而不能……”。too的后面接副词或形容词的原级,to的后面接动词原形。too…to…句型是简单句。当too…to…句型中动词不定式所表示的动作的执行者与整个句子的主语不是同一人或物时,需要在动词不定式前加上一个逻辑主语,常用for__sb.。too…to…结构与enough…to…结构及so…that…结构可以相互转换,将too…to…结构转换为enough…to…结构时,要注意:(1)enough前的形容词或副词应是too前面形容词或副词的反义词;(2)enough…to…句式须用否定式;(3)too…to…结构有逻辑主语时,enough…to…结构也要加上逻辑主语。将too…to…结构转换为so…that…结构时,要注意:(1)so…that…结构是复合句,so的后面接形容词或副词的原级,that的后面接从句。(2)that后面的从句要用否定形式。3.agree的用法(1)我同意你的意见。I__agree__with__your__suggestion.(2)我同意他们的安排。I__agree__to__their__arrangements.(3)我同意买这辆汽车。I__agree__to__buy__the__car.agree意为“同意”,表示同意某人或某人的意见、想法、分析、解释等(即持同一观点)时,用agree with…;agree to…主要用来表示一方提出一项建议、安排、计划等,另一方同意协作;agree to__do sth.表示同意做某事。( )4.He ________ sing this song in English in a few hours,too.A.will canB.canC.is going to be able toD.be able to答案选择C,can与be able to都可以表示能力,但两者在用法上有点差异:be able to强调通过努力而获得的能力,而can则强调自身已具有的能力;be able to可以有各种时态,而can只有一般现在和一般过去两种时态。根据句意“几小时之后,他也能用英语唱这首歌”可知,这句话强调的是通过努力可获得的能力,并且是几小时之后,因此要用be able to的一般将来时态,所以答案选择C。此外can可用于表示可能性、推测、允许等情况,而be able to通常不这样用。( )5.He is a doctor.So most of his reports ________ medicine.A.take up B.have to do withC.agree with答案选择B,根据句意“他是一个医生,他的大多数报告跟医学有关系”可知,要用句型have to do with sth.“与……有关”,因此答案选择B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:own,personal,relationship2.重点短语:finish high school,go to university3.重点句式:They may help to make you a better person and to make your life easier.I think singing is a great activity so I am going to learn to sing.I think this will also make my family happy.1.询问他人对事物的看法2.会介绍影片会用学过的知识点来介绍影片一、预习课本P47-48新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.自己的__own__ 2.个人的__personal__3.关系__relationship__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.高中毕业__finish__high__school__2.去上大学__go__to__university__3.他们也许使你成为一个更好的人,而且使你的生活更轻松。They__may__help__to__make__you__a__better__person__and__to__make__your__life__easier.4.我认为唱歌是一项很好的活动,因此我将去学唱歌。I__think__singing__is__a__great__activity__so__I__am__going__to__learn__to__sing.5.我想这将使我的家人高兴。I__think__this__will__also__make__my__family__happy.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Resolutions are promises to yourself.They may help to make you a better student and to make your life easier.Are you going to make some resolutions?What are your resolutions and why do you make the resolutions?Please say something about your resolutions and why you make them.环节说明:让学生知道制订计划的好处,在互相交流中锻炼学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真阅读3a中的短文 ,选用方框中的单词来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,然后大声地朗读短文 。(5分钟)2.根据要求写出自己在身体健康、改善家人和朋友关系以及学业方面的计划,完成后小组内互相交流,完成3b。(3分钟)3.根据3b填写的内容来写三段关于自己的计划,并且每一段中都要写出自己将要做的事情以及原因,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师批阅点拨。(7分钟)参考案例The second resolution is about improving my physical health.Next year I am going to do more exercise.I think running slowly is a great activity.So I am going to run slowly for half an hour every morning.I think it will make me healthier and healthier because I am a little fat now.If I get thinner,I am going to be healthier.The third resolution is about improving my relationship with my family and my friends.Next year I am going to get along better with my family and my friends.I think communication is a good way.I will talk more to my family about my study and what I think.I am going to try my best to help my friends when they are in trouble.I think these will make them happy,and let them think I am their good child and good friend.The last resolution is about how to do better at school.I am going to study harder than before.I am going to listen to the teacher more carefully in class.After class I will do my homework more carefully,too.If I have any questions,I am going to ask the teacher and the students.I will be not lazy no longer.I think this will make my parents happy,and I am going to get good grades.4.假设你在你的城市工作,想一个使它更清洁更绿色环保的计划,写出来,完成后小组内互相交流答案,纠正错误。(3分钟)小结训练。(2分钟)(1)这本书和音乐有关。The__book__has__to__do__with__music.(2)我非常喜欢游戏,我将去从事它。I__like__swimming__very__much.I'll__take__it__up.(2)这对双胞胎有很多共同点。The__twins__have__many__things__in__common.环节说明:这个教学环节锻炼了学生的写作能力和口语表达能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.朗读1表格中表示职业和学科的单词,然后将职业和与之相配的学科匹配。(3分钟)2.认真阅读2中的对话,根据所学知识将对话补充完整,集体核对答案,两人结对练习对话。(5分钟)3.根据要求写出你的计划,完成后小组成员互相交流。(3分钟)环节说明:本环节的学习使学生复习了本单元的对话及be going to句型的用法。Step 4 问题探究( )1.Watching TV too much ________ bad for your eyes.A.is B.areC.be D.sound答案选择A,这句话的主语是Watching TV too much,属于动名词做主语,谓语动词用单三形式,因此答案选择A。( )2.The good news makes us ________.A.happy B.be feel happyC.happily D.feel happily答案选择A,本题考查make的用法,make sb.do sth.使某人做某事,make+宾语+形容词,又因为feel是系动词,后面应跟形容词,所以答案选择A。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 7Will people have robots?1.重点单词:paper2.重点短语:in their homes,in 100 years,on computer,on paper3.重点句式:—Do you think there will be robots in people's homes?—Yes,there will.Kids won't go to school.They will study at home on computers.People will live to be 200 years old.—Will people use money in 100 years?—No,they won't.Everything will be free.1.will构成的一般将来时态的肯定句、否定句、一般疑问句及回答2.做预言,用will来讨论未来发生的事情做预言,用will来讨论未来发生的事情一、预习课本P49新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。纸张__paper__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.在他们的家中__in__their__homes__2.100年之后__in__100__years__3.通过电脑__on__computer__4.在纸上__on__paper__5.—你认为在人们的家中会有机器人吗?—是的,将会有。—Do you think there will be robots in people's homes?—Yes,there will.6.孩子们不用去上学,他们将在家里通过电脑学习。Kid's__won't__go__to__school.__They__will__study__at__home__on__computers.7.人们将会活到200岁。People__will__live__to__be__200__years__old.8.—100年后人们会用钱吗?—不,不会的。一切东西都是免费的。—Will people use money in 100 years?—No,they won't. Everything will be free.Step 1 情景导入(Show a picture of a robot)Teacher:What's this?Students:It's a robot.Teacher:Do you have a robot?Students:No.Teacher:We don't have robots now.But I think I will have a robot in the future.Will people have robots in the future?Today we will learn “Unit 7 Will people have robots?”.Students:Will people have robots?(read it three times)Teacher:In this unit,we will talk about “How to make predictions?”.环节说明:利用图片导入新课,学生的兴趣比较浓厚,告知学生本单元的语言目标,学生学习起来能够做到心中有数,可以更好地帮助学生去学习新课。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.在今后的100年里世界将会有怎样的不同呢?阅读1a中的预言,同意请在A处打勾,不同意请在D处打勾,完成后小组内互相交流。(3分钟)2.熟读1a中的句子,并两人一组互相背诵句子。(5分钟)3.以小组为单位,结合图片和1a中的句子,小组讨论一般将来时态的各种句型的构成,教师点拨。(5分钟)4.认真听录音并在1a中圈出你所听到的预测,集体核对答案,完成课本上1b的听力任务。(3分钟)5.再听一遍录音,并跟读对话。(2分钟)6.仿照1c中的对话,两人一组来对1a中的活动进行对话练习,并邀请一些小组表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Will people use money in 100 years?B.No,they won't.Everything will be free.Will people live to be 200 years old?A:Yes,they will.小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.Lucy went to New York last week,and she will be back ________ two weeks.A.at B.in C.for D.after(A)2.There ________ a football game tomorrow afternoon.A.will be B.is going to haveC.has D.will have(D)3.The students will study ________ home ________ computers.A.at;at B.at;inC.on;at D.at;on(A)4.—Who will be on duty tomorrow?—Susan ________.A.will B.is C.be D.does(C)5.There ________ a talk show on CCTV-2 at eight this evening.A.will have B.is going to haveC.will be D.is having(B)6.There ________ some paper on the table.A.am B.is C.are D.be环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达了语言目标,结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.will表示将来的用法(1)他们将有个愉快的寒假。They__will__have__a__pleasant__winter__holiday.(2)他们将不会有一个愉快的寒假。They__won't__have__a__pleasant__winter__holiday.(3)他们将有个愉快的寒假吗?是的,会有。/不,不会有。Will__they__have__a__pleasant__winter__holiday?Yes,they__will./No,they__won't.一般将来时态表达将来某一时间要发生或将要发生的动作或状态。其陈述句构成为:主语+will+动词原形(当主语为第一人称时,一般用shall代替will;当主语为其他人称时,用will,但主语为第一人称时,也可以用will)。否定句:主语+will+not+动词原形.一般疑问句:Will+主语+动词原形?肯定回答:Yes,主+will.否定回答:No,主+will+not(可以缩写成won't)2.in+一段时间的用法(1)他三个小时以后回来。He'll__come__back__in__three__hours.“in+一段时间”表示时间段之后,常用于将来时态中,对此短语提问用How__soon。( )3.Would you mind giving me ________ to write on?A.a paper B.some papersC.a piece of papers D.two pieces of paper答案选择D,根据句意,在本句中paper是纸张的意思,因此它是不可数名词,故排除A和B。当纸张前面加了可数词组piece of的时候,变复数,只在piece后面加s,paper后面不加,因此排除C答案。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:pollution,prediction,future,pollute,environment,planet,earth,plant,part2.重点句式:People will use the subways less.What's your prediction about the future?I think there will be more pollution.I don't think so.I think there will be fewer trees.It's a book about future.What will the future be like?The environment will be in great danger.Will we have to move to other planets?Everyone should play a part in saving the earth.1.用助动词will来表达将来时,并能熟练运用there be句型表达将来时2.明确区分可数名词和不可数名词;正确使用more,less,fewer1.用助动词will来表达将来时,并能熟练运用there be句型表达将来时2.明确区分可数名词和不可数名词;正确使用more,less,fewer一、预习课本P50新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.污染物__pollution__ 2.预言__prediction__3.将来__future__ 4.污染__pollute__5.环境__environment__ 6.行星__planet__7.地球__earth__ 8.植物__plant__9.参加__part__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列句型。1.人们将会更少地用地铁。People__will__use__the__subways__less.2.你对未来的预言是什么?What's__your__prediction__about__the__future?3.我认为将会有更多的污染。I__think__there__will__be__more__pollution.4.我认为不是这样的。我认为将会有更少的树。I__don't__think__so.__I__think__there__will__be__fewer__trees.5.它是一本关于未来的书。It's__a__book__about__future.6.未来将会是什么样子呢?What__will__the__future__be__like?7.环境将会面临很大的危险。The__environment__will__be__in__great__danger.8.我们必须要搬到另外一个行星上吗?Will__we__have__to__move__to__other__planets?9.每个人都要参与到拯救地球的活动中来。Everyone__should__play__a__part__in__saving__the__earth.Step 1 情景导入(Show some pictures to the students)Teacher:This is our earth in 100 years.What will the earth be like?Now please say some sentences according to the pictures like this:There will be more cars.There will be fewer people.There will be less water……环节说明:情景导入激发了学生用英语表达的欲望,同时又引出了本节课的重点句型,对提高学生的口语表达能力也起到了较好的效果。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.大声朗读2a中的句子,为听力做好准备。(2分钟)2.听录音,圈出括号中你所听到的单词,完成2a。(3分钟)3.朗读2b中的句子,然后再听一遍录音,圈出你所听到的预言,完成2b。(4分钟)4.听第三遍录音,学生跟读对话。(2分钟)5.两人一组根据2a、2b中的信息来练习对话谈论预言。(5分钟)参考案例A:What's you prediction about the future?B.I think there will be more pollution.A:Really?I don't think so.But I think there will be fewer trees.6.结合2a-2c中的句子,小组内讨论there be,less,more,fewer的用法,教师点拨重难点。(5分钟)小结训练。(4分钟)(B)1.Five years ago,Sally ________ soccer,but today she ________ soccer,she ________ basketball in five years.A.play;isn't play;will playB.played;doesn't play;will playC.plays;won't play;will playD.played;doesn't play;plays(C)2.We'll try our best to do the work with ______ money and ________ people.A.few; little B.a few; a littleC.less; fewer D.fewer; less(B)3.I am happy because I have ________ homework to do today than yesterday.A.more B.less C.few D.fewer(D)4.There ________ an English speech contest tomorrow afternoon in our school.A.will have B.will isC.is going to have D.will be(D)5.In ten years Joe ________ an astronaut.A.is B.was C.will is D.will be(C)6.He is very happy,because he ________ in a big apartment next year.A.live B.livesC.will live D.will living环节说明:通过听、说、读、写训练让学生掌握了解了语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,回答下面的问题:(1)Jill is reading a book about the cities and environment.( )(2)What's Jill's prediction about the future?________________________________________________________________________(3)Does Jill want to live on the earth or other planets?________________________________________________________________________(4)Everyone should play a part in saving the earth.________________________________________________________________________2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.—Do you like the books ________ history?—Yes,I do.A.at B.for C.about D.in(C)2.—What ________ your father ________?—He is very kind.A.does;like B.does;likesC.is;like D.is;likes(B)3.I think many famous predictions ________.A.come true B.will come trueC.came true D.comes true(B)4.Trees are very important in our life.We all should play a part in ________ trees.A.plant B.plantingC.to plant D.planted(A)5.The river is dirty.________ people go to swim in it.A.Few B.A few C.Little D.A little环节说明:将对话以任务型阅读的形式呈现,这样不仅能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解;对话练习还能提高学生的语言表达能力。Step 4 问题探究1.There be句型的一般将来时(1)在人们的家里将会有机器人。There__will__be__robots__in__people's__homes.(2)明天不会有一个会议。There__won't__be__a__meeting__tomorrow.(3)一百年后将会有更少的污染吗?是的,会有。/不,不会有。Will__there__be__less__pollution__in__one__hundred__years?Yes,there__will./No,there__won't.There be句型的一般将来时的构成:肯定句:There will be+名词+其他成分。【温馨提示】无论后面是单数名词还是复数形式,be都必须用原形。否定句:在will后面加not;一般疑问句:把will提到there之前,回答:Yes,there__will./No,there__won't__to.2.few,a few,little,a little,much,many(1)几乎没有朋友few__friends(2)一些朋友a__few__friends(3)几乎没有水little__water(4)一点水a__little__water(5)许多水much__water(6)许多学生many__studentsfew和a few修饰或代替可数名词,few表示否定意义,a few表示肯定意义;little和a little修饰或代替不可数名词;little表示否定意义,a little表示肯定意义。可数名词和不可数名词前都可用some,any,a lot of,lots of等修饰。可数名词表示不确定数量时,用a few,few,many修饰,询问数量时用How__many;不可数名词表示不确定数量时,用a little,little,much修饰,询问数量时,用How__much。3.more,less,fewer的用法(1)史密斯先生想挣更多的钱。Mr.Smith__wants__to__make__more__money.(2)那个杯子里的水更少。There__is__less__water__in__that__glass.(3)在那所学校里我有较少的朋友。I__have__fewer__friends__in__that__school.more是many和much的比较级,其后既可以跟可数名词复数,也可以跟不可数名词,意思是“更多”。less是little的比较级,其后只接不可数名词,意思是“更少的,较少的”。fewer是few的比较级,其后只接可数名词的复数形式,意思是“更少的,较少的”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:peace,sea,sky2.重点短语:in the future,fresh water,in the country3.重点句式:Will there be world peace?There will be more pollution.There will be less free time.1.用助动词will来表达将来时,并能熟练运用there be句型表达将来时2.明确区分可数名词或不可数名词;正确使用more,less,fewer1.用助动词will表达将来时,并能熟练运用there be句型表达将来时2.明确区分可数名词和不可数名词;正确使用more,less,fewer一、预习课本P51新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.和平__peace__ 2.海洋__sea__3.天空__sky__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.在未来__in__the__future__2.淡水__fresh__water__3.在乡下__in__the__country__4.世界将会拥有和平吗?Will__there__be__world__peace?__5.将会有更多的污染。There__will__be__more__pollution.__6.将会有更少的空闲时间。There__will__be__less__free__time.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned Simple Future Tense.Now please make some predictions with you partner.You can use “will do sth.”or “there will be” to make sentences.环节说明:通过这个环节的练习,学生复习巩固了一般将来时态的用法及构成,同时又锻炼了口语表达能力。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a中的句子,然后用more,less或fewer填空,完成后小组内互相交流答案。(3分钟)2.熟读3a的句子,然后两人一组用more,less或fewer互相提问。(3分钟 )3.你认为将来会发生什么事情呢?用你的预测来完成预言,完成后小组内互相交流。(5分钟)4.画一幅画来描绘一下你想象中的未来的城市是什么样子的。然后向全班同学描述你所画的图片。(3分钟)小结训练。(2分钟)(C)1.We should use ________ plastic bags to protect our environment.A.more B.lessC.fewer D.much(C)2.I hope people ________ to be 200 years old ________ the future.A.would live;from B.lived;forC.will live;in D.live;to(D)3.He ________ very busy this week,but he ________ free next week.A.will be;is B.is;isC.will be;will be D.is;will be(D)4.—________ you ________ free tomorrow?—No,I ________ free the day after tomorrow.A.Are;going to;willB.Are;going to be;willC.Are;going to;will beD.Are;going to be;will be环节说明:通过3a的学习,学生练习掌握了more、less和fewer的用法;3b的学习让学生巩固练习了一般将来时态。Step 4 问题探究( )There ________ a talk show on CCTV-2 at eight this evening.A.will have B.is going to beC.is having D.have答案选择B,There be的将来时态有两种:There will be…和There is/are going to be…。句意为“今天晚上八点钟,中央台第二频道有一个访谈节目。”故选B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。What__will__the__future__be__like?(将来是什么样子的?)Cities will be more__polluted(更多的污染).And there will be fewer__trees(更少的树).Will__people__use__money__in__100__years?(100年后人们将使用钱吗?)No,they won't.Everything__will__be__free.(一切将是免费的。)Will__there__be__world__peace?(世界将会和平吗?)Yes,I__hope__so.(我希望如此。)Kids__will__study__at__home__on__computers.(孩子们将会在家通过电脑学习。)They__won't__go__to__school.(他们将不用去上学。)Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:astronaut,apartment,rocket,space2.重点短语:space station3.重点句式:—Where do you live?—I live in an apartment.I will fly rockets to the moon.1.掌握关于职业、交通的单词2.巩固一般过去时态、一般现在时态和一般将来时态的用法区别巩固一般过去时态、一般现在时态和一般将来时态的用法区别一、预习课本P52新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.宇航员__astronaut__ 2.公寓__apartment__3.火箭__rocket__ 4.空间__space__二、认真预习1a-1e,找出下列短语和句型。1.太空站__space__station__2.—你住在哪里?—我住在一套公寓里。—Where do you live?—I live in an apartment.3.我将乘火箭去月球。I__will__fly__rockets__to__the__moon.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned many words about jobs,transportation and places to live.Can you say some words?(Let some students say some words that we have learned about jobs,transportation and places to live.)Today we will go on learning some new words about them.Now let's learn new words about them.环节说明:由复习学过的表示职业、交通和居住地方的单词引出本节课的新单词,过渡自然,易于引起学生的学习兴趣。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b任务1.学生领读1a单词或词组,两人一组互相提问单词。(3分钟)2.将1a方框中的单词或词组分类,完成后集体核对答案。(2分钟)3.在1a中的各个方框中填写更多的同类单词,完成后小组内互相交流答案,并大声地朗读这些单词。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(1)My family live in a big apartment in a big city.(2)I want to go to a space station.(3)My uncle is a computer programmer.(4)Yang Liwei is an astronaut.(5)People will fly rockets to the moon one day.环节说明:通过本环节的学习,学生掌握了表示职业、交通和居住地方的单词。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.听Alexis和Joe的对话,按听到的顺序给图片标号,集体核对答案,完成1c。(3分钟)2.再听一遍录音,用正确的单词来补全句子。(3分钟)3.再细心听录音,并跟读以整体感知对话。(3分钟)4.一个学生扮演Alexis,另外一个学生扮演Joe,来谈论Joe现在、十年前和十年后的生活,邀请几组学生来展示对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Where do you live?B:I live in an apartment.小结训练。(5分钟)(1)People will use money in 100 years.(变为一般疑问句,并作否定回答)Will__people__use__money__in__100__years?No,they__won't.(2)Kids will go to school every day.(变为否定句)Kids__won't__go__to__school__every__day.(3)He returned home an hour ago.(用in an hour改写)He__will__return__home__in__an__hour.(4)There will be robots in our homes.(改为一般疑问句)Will__there__be__robots__in__our__homes?(5)I will fly rockets to__the__moon.(对画线部分提问)Where__will__you__fly__rockets?环节说明:通过听力训练和对话练习,学生掌握了一般过去时态、一般现在时态和一般将来时的用法区别;小结训练让学生熟练巩固了一般将来时态的用法。Step 4 问题探究My uncle often flies to London.(改为同义句)________________________________________________________________________根据句意“我叔叔经常乘飞机去伦敦”可知,fly to…飞往……=go…by air/plane。因而答案为:My uncle often goes to London by air/plane.请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:even,human,servant,dangerous,already,factory,simple,believe,able,disagree,shape,fall,possible,impossible,side2.重点短语:over and over again,get bored,hundreds of,fall down,look for,at some point3.重点句式:They are usually like human servants.They help with the housework and do jobs like working in dirty or dangerous places.There are already robots working in factories.Some scientists believe that there will be more robots in the future.Scientists are now trying to make robots look like humans and do the same things as we do.For example,scientist James White thinks that robots will never be able to wake up and know where they are.They think that robots will even be able to talk like humans in 25 to 50 years.If buildings fall down with people inside,these snake robots can help look for people under the buildings.1.重点短语和句型2.会用will来谈论将要发生的事情重点短语和句型一、预习课本P53-54新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.甚至__even__ 2.人的__human__3.仆人__servant__ 4.危险的__dangerous__5.已经__already__ 6.工厂__factory__7.简单的__simple__ 8.相信__believe__9.能够__able__ 10.不同意__disagree__11.形状__shape__ 12.倒塌__fall__13.可能的__possible__ 14.不可能的__impossible__15.一方__side__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.多次__over__and__over__again__ 2.厌烦__get__bored__3.许多__hundreds__of__4.倒塌__fall__down__5.寻找__look__for__6.在某些时候来说__at__some__point__7.他们通常就像是人类的仆人。They__are__usually__like__human__servants.8.他们帮着做家务,帮着做一些在肮脏和危险的环境下的工作。They__help__with__the__housework__and__do__jobs__like__working__in__dirty__or__dangerous__places.9.已经有机器人在工厂里工作了。There__are__already__robots__working__in__factories.10.一些科学家相信在将来会有更多的机器人。Some__scientists__believe__that__there__will__be__more__robots__in__the__future.11.如今科学家们正在设法使机器人看起来更像人类,并且使得它们能和我们做同样的事情。Scientists__are__now__trying__to__make__robots__look__like__humans__and__do__the__same__things__as__we__do.12.例如,科学家James White认为机器人永远不会醒来并且知道他们在哪里。For__example,scientist__James__White__thinks__that__robots__will__never__be__able__to__wake__up__and__know__where__they__are.13.他们认为25到50年后机器人将会像人一样说话。They__think__that__robots__will__even__be__able__to__talk__like__humans__in__25__to__50__years.14.如果倒塌的建筑物里面有人,蛇形机器人能够帮助寻找建筑物下面的人。If__buildings__fall__down__with__people__inside,these__snake__robots__can__help__look__for__people__under__the__buildings.Step 1 情景导入(Show some pictures of robots to the students)Teacher:Do you know what they are?Yes,they are robots.In some science fiction movies,we often see many robots.Can you tell us what they look like and what they can do?Can you also tell us something else about the robots?环节说明:由机器人的图片入手,向学生提出问题,引起学生的好奇心,激发他们求知的欲望,为本课的学习做好铺垫。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.小组内互相交流各自知道的机器人,他们看起来像什么,他们能做什么。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2b短文,了解短文大意,完成2b中的填空,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.认真阅读短文,写出3项未来机器人能够完成的工作,完成后小组内交流答案。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(7分钟)(B)1.There are many people ________ in the park.A.walk B.walkingC.to walk D.walked(C)2.The old man is very kind,he always helps with ________ the children.A.look after B.looking forC.looking after D.looks after(B)3.I ________ believe he ________ come back in two days.A./;won't B.don't;willC.don't;won't D.isn't;will(B)4.I think it is possible ________ the students ________ English well.A.of;learning B.for;to learnC.of;to learn D.for;earning(C)5.It's eight o'clock.Please ________.A.wake up he B.wake up himC.wake him up D.wake his up(C)6.I lost my bike yesterday.I ________ it now.But I can't ________ it.A.look for;find B.finding;look forC.am looking for;find D.looking for;finding(C)7.There are ________ people in the cinema watching the new movie.A.two hundred of B.two hundredsC.hundreds of D.two hundreds of(C)8.The house might ________ in a few months.A.fall behind B.fall offC.fall down D.fall for环节说明:本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.认真阅读短文,根据短文内容回答,完成2d短文填空,集体核对答案,并大声朗读短文。(5分钟)2.认真观察2e中的机器人,想象一下他们能够帮助你或你的家庭做什么工作。把你的想法写出来,然后小组内交流讨论。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节的学习让学生对文章有了更深刻的理解;2e环节让学生灵活运用了一般将来时态,并锻炼了学生的想象力和书面表达能力。Step 4 问题探究1.wake up的用法(1)他每天早上6点钟醒来。He__wakes__up__at__6:00__every__morning.(2)他妈妈每天早晨6点钟把他叫醒。His__mother__wakes__him__up__at__6:00__every__morning.wake up意为“醒来,叫醒”,是动词+副词结构。如果宾语是人称代词的宾格要放到中间;如果宾语是名词既可以放到中间也可以放到末尾。( )2.—How many birds can you see in the trees?—I can see ________ birds in them.A.hundreds of B.five hundredsC.hundred of D.five hundreds of答案选择A,hundred“百”,当前面有具体数字的时候,其后不加s,不和of连用。若表示一个不确定的数目时,前面没有具体的数字时,其后要加s,而且与of连用。故正确答案为A选项。( )3.There are some boys ________ in the swimming pool.A.swim B.to swimC.swiming D.swimming答案选择D,本句含有固定句型:There is/are+sb./sth.+doing sth.表示“有某人/某物在做某事”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)—self Check1.重点单词:probably,during,holiday2.重点短语:as a reporter,during the week,the meaning of the word,both…and…3.重点句式:In 20 years,I think I'll be a newspaper reporter.As a reporter,I'll meet a lot of interesting people.My apartment will be no good for pets because it'll be too small.I'll look less smart but I'll be more comfortable.I will take a holiday in Hong Kong when possible.Nobody knows what the future will be like.I want to fly up into the sky.1.重点单词和句型2.能用will句型描述将来的生活能用will句型描述将来的生活一、预习课本P55-56新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.大概__probably__ 2.在……期间__during__3.假日__holiday__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.作为一名记者__As__a__reporter__2.在这一周期间__during__the__week__3.这个单词的意思__the__meaning__of__the__word__4.……和……__both...and...__5.二十年之后,我认为我将成为一名新闻记者。In__20__years,I__think__I'll__be__a__newspaper__reporter.6.我将接触到很多有趣的人。I__will__meet__a__lot__of__interesting__people.7.我的公寓对我的宠物是没有好处的,因为它太小了。My__apartment__will__be__no__good__for__pets__because__it'll__be__too__small.8.我看上去不那么整齐,但是我将更舒服。I'll__look__less__smart__but__I'll__be__more__comfortable.9.当有可能的时候,我将去香港度假。I__will__take__a__holiday__in__Hong__Kong__when__possible.10.没有人知道将来是什么样子的。Nobody__knows__what__the__future__will__be__like.11.我想飞上天空。I__want__to__fly__up__into__the__sky.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:The world is changing faster and faster,the life in 20 years is different from the life now.What do you think you life will be like in the future?Can you imagine the life in 20 years?Now please say something about life in the future to your partner.环节说明:让学生互相交流20年后的生活,发挥了学生的想象力,练习了一般将来时态,同时在互相交流过程中锻炼了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真阅读3a中关于Jill的未来是什么样子的短文,选用方框中的单词来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,然后大声地朗读短文。(5分钟)2.想象一下你自己20年后的生活是什么样子的,根据3b的要求项目来完成表格,你可以添加更多的内容,完成后小组内互相交流,完成3b。(3分钟)3.根据3b填写的内容仿照3a的形式来写一写20年后的生活,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师批阅点拨。(7分钟)参考案例In 20 years,I think I will be a doctor.I'll live in Beijing.Because it is the capital of China and it is a beautiful city.As a doctor,I think I will be busy to save people's lives.In the future,people will have more time to enjoy the life.So will I.I will exercise every day.I will run in the morning,and have a walk with my family after supper.I will listen to music to make me relaxed.I will play basketball with my friends on weekends.It will make me fit and happy.I will go to many countries to take vacations.In 20 years,our neighborhood will be more beautiful,there will be more parks.In the parks there will be more trees and grass.We can relax in the parks.We will also do less housework.Because we will have robots in our homes,the robots can help us do all the housework.The life in 20 years will be very good.4.以小组为单位讨论未来机器人在学业方面怎样帮助学生,把你们小组的见解写下来,然后画一幅机器人的图片。(5分钟)环节说明:通过这个教学环节,学生灵活运用了一般将来时态并锻炼了写作能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.朗读1表格中的单词,然后将这些单词按要求分类。(3分钟)2.认真阅读2中的对话,根据所学知识将对话补充完整,集体核对答案,两人结对练习对话。(5分钟)环节说明:通过本环节的学习,学生复习了more、fewer和less的用法及本单元的语法。Step 4 问题探究( )1.________ Jim ________ Tara like playing chess.A.Neither;nor B.Either;or C.Both;and答案选择C,neither...nor...和either...or...连接的词做主语时,谓语动词用单三形式,因此答案选择C( )2.He works ________ a teacher in a school.A.like B.as C.is答案选择B,like常用介词“像……一样”;as介词,意为“作为”。该句的意思是“它作为一名教师在一所学校工作”,因此选择B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 8How do you make a banana milk shake?1.重点单词:shake,blender,peel,pour2.重点短语:milk shake,turn on,cut up3.重点句式:How do you make a banana milk shake?Turn on the blender.Cut up the bananas.Pour the milk into the blender.Peel three bananas.1.学习询问和描述食物的制作过程2.能正确理解和运用祈使句描述食物的制作过程一、预习课本P57新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.摇动__shake__ 2.食物搅拌器__blender__3.剥皮__peel__ 4.倒出__pour__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.奶昔__milk__shake__2.接通__turn__on__3.切碎__cut__up__4.你怎么制作香蕉奶昔?How__do__you__make__a__banana__milk__shake?5.接通搅拌机的电源。Turn__on__the__blender.6.切碎香蕉。Cut__up__the__bananas.7.把牛奶倒进搅拌机内。Pour__the__milk__into__the__blender.8.剥香蕉皮。Peel__three__bananas.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We all know that milk shake is very delicious.I believe that most of us like it.But do you know how to make a banana milk shake?环节说明:由美味可口的奶昔引出它的做法,激起了学生的学习兴趣。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中的单词和词组,学生识记并且互相提问这些单词和词组。(3分钟)2.认真观察图片,将这些单词和词组填在图片中的横线上,集体核对答案。(5分钟)3.大声地朗读图片中的句子,为听力做好铺垫。(2分钟)4.听录音,按听到的顺序给句子排序,师生共同核对答案。(3分钟)5.熟读制作奶昔的过程,并且三分钟背诵下来。(4分钟)6.两人一组练习对话,向大家介绍奶昔的制作过程,然后邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:How do you make a banana milk shake?B.First,peel the bananas…小结训练。(3分钟)1.Turn(turn) on the blender before you use it.2.I spent two minutes cutting(cut) up the bananas.3.Don't__drink(not drink) the orange milk shake too much.4.He put(put) on his coat and went out.5.Don't turn__on(打开) the radio,the baby is sleeping.6.Please pour__the__milk__into__the__blender(把牛奶倒进果汁机中)。7.If you want to make fruit salad,please cut__up(切碎) the fruit first.8.How do you make a banana milk__shake(奶昔)?9.Put the bananas and icecream in(把……放进) the blender.环节说明:1a-1c听说环节让学生掌握了奶昔的制作过程,小结训练巩固练习了本节课重要知识点。Step 3 问题探究1.turn on的用法(1)打开灯turn__on__the__lightturn on打开(电器等的电源),其反义词是turn__off关上。这种由“动词+副词”构成的短语中,当宾语是名词时,可置于动副词短语后面,也可以在动词和副词中间。但当宾语是代词时,则只能放在动词和副词中间。类似用法的短语还有:调高(声音)turn__up;调低turn__down;切碎cut__up等。( )2.Can you help me pour some water ________ the cup?A.in B.into C.at D.to答案选择B,pour…into…意为“把……倒入到……”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:yogurt,honey,watermelon,spoon,pot,add,finally,salt2.重点短语:another ten minutes,one more thing3.重点句式:How many bananas do we need?—How much yogurt do we need?—We need one cup of yogurt.I want to make Russian soup for a party on Saturday.Don't forget to add some salt.1.How many和How much对可数名词与不可数名词的数量进行提问2.学会用first,next,then,after that,finally描述程序学会用first,next,then,after that,finally描述程序一、预习课本P58新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.酸奶__yogurt__ 2.蜂蜜__honey__3.西瓜__watermelon__ 4.勺__spoon__5.锅__pot__ 6.增加__add__7.最后__finally__ 8.食盐__salt__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.再有十分钟__another__ten__minutes__2.还有一件事__one__more__thing__3.我们需要多少香蕉?How__many__bananas__do__we__need?4.—我们需要多少酸奶?—我们需要一杯酸奶。—How much yogurt do we need?—We need one cup of yogurt.5.我想为星期六的聚会做罗宋汤。I__want__to__make__Russian__soup__for__a__party__on__Saturday.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to make a banana milk shake.I believe we all know how to make it.Who can tell me how to make a banana milk shake?(Ask some students to describe how to make a banana milk shake.)Today I will teach you how to make Russian soup—a kind of delicious soup.Then you can make it for your parents.Let them taste the delicious soup.Do you like to learn it?Students:Yes.Teacher:OK.Let's learn how to make Russian soup together.环节说明:这个环节既让学生复习了上节课学到的知识,又引出了本节课的学习内容,一举两得。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.大声朗读2a图片中的单词并两人一组互相背诵单词。(3分钟)2.认真听录音,按要求填写2a表格,小组内核对答案并且讨论how many和how much的用法区别。(5分钟)3.再听一遍录音,在每种材料的下面写出所需要的数量,集体核对答案,完成2b。(3分钟)4.再听一遍录音,并跟读以整体感知对话内容。(3分钟)5.根据2b中的听力信息,两人一组练习对话怎样制作水果沙拉,邀请几组学生展示对话内容。参考案例A:Let's make fruit salad.B:OK,good idea.How much yogurt do we need?A:One cup.B:How many apples do we need?A:Let me think…We need two apples.B:OK,and how much…小结训练。(4分钟)用how many,how much填空。1.How__much yogurt do we need?2.How__many apples do we need?3.How__much water does he need?4.How__much salt does she want?5.How__many watermelons do they have?对画线部分提问。6.We need two spoons of honey.How__many spoons of honey do you need?7.We need two__spoons__of honey.How__much honey do you need?环节说明:本环节的学习锻炼了学生的听力和口语能力,小结训练更是巩固练习了how many和how much的用法。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.认真阅读2d对话,然后回答下列问题:(1)Does Anna have a party on Saturday?(2)How many ingredients do we need if we make Russian soup?(3)How long does it take to make Russian soup?(4)When do we add the salt when making Russian soup?2.学生自读2d对话,然后结对练习对话,并请几组学生来表演该对话。小结训练。(D)1.—________ do you make fruit salad?—First,cut up the apples,bananas and pears.A.When B.WhereC.Why D.How(B)2.Don't ________ the milk into the cup,It's full.A.peel B.pourC.leave D.drink(C)3.Please give me two ________.A.glass of apple juiceB.glasses of apple juicesC.glasses of apple juiceD.glasses apple juice(A)4.Please ________ the ingredients to the noodles.A.add B.coffeeC.cut D.pour(C)5.Today is Jim's tenth birthday.There are eight candles,so we still need ________.A.two another candlesB.more two candlesC.two more candlesD.another two candle环节说明:本环节的学习不仅让学生知道了罗宋汤的做法,更重要的是让学生掌握了用first,next,then,after that,finally描述事物的程序。Step 4 问题探究1.first,…then,…after__that,…finally,...首先,……然后,……接着,……最后,……这是英语中表达做某事的步骤的一种说法。通常你会听到英语国家的人在说first,next,then,finally和后面的内容时,他们会做一些停顿,这样就能提前告诉听者接下来讲的是一系列的步骤。这一点在朗读和听力中应特别注意。2.(1)一块面包a__piece__of__bread(2)两杯水two__glasses__of__water在不可数名词前可加much、little、some、lots__of等词修饰,还可以用“数量词+of+不可数名词”来表示不可数名词的数量。其中数量词可以用单数,也可以用复数。( )3.If you add 4________3,you will get 7.A.on B.toC.at D.for答案选择B,add…to…意为“把……加到……上”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:cheese,popcorn,corn,machine,dig,hole2.重点短语:plant a tree,make beef noodles,get a book from the library3.重点句式:Do you know how to plant a tree?1.How many和How much对可数名词与不可数名词的数量进行提问2.学会用first,next,then,after that,finally描述程序1.How many和How much对可数名词与不可数名词的数量进行提问2.学会用first,next,then,after that,finally描述程序一、预习课本P59新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.干酪__cheese__ 2.爆米花__popcorn__3.玉米__corn__ 4.机器__machine__5.挖__dig__ 6.洞__hole__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列短语和句型。1.植树__plant__a__tree__2.做牛肉面__make__beef__noodles__3.从图书馆借书__get__a__book__from__the__library__4.你知道怎么种树吗?Do__you__know__how__to__plant__a__tree?Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to make Russian soup.I believe we all know how to make it.Who can tell me how to make Russian soup?(Ask some students to describe how to make Russian soup.)Today I will teach you how to make popcorn.Then you can make it for your parents.Let them taste the popcorn you make.Do you like to learn it?Students:Yes.Teacher:OK.Let's learn how to make popcorn together.环节说明:这个环节既让学生复习了上节课学到的知识,又引出了本节课的学习内容,一举两得。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a中的句子,然后圈出每个问题中正确的单词,完成后小组内互相交流答案。(3分钟)2.熟读3a的句子,然后两人一组互相提问how many和how much的用法。(3分钟)3.认真阅读3b中1-5和a-e中的句子,然后根据所学的知识补全句子,完成后请学生说出答案,教师点拨。(3分钟)4.让学生认真观察3b右侧的图片,根据图片提示把3b中的句子排序,完成爆米花的制作过程。(2分钟)5.两人一组根据图片提示分别叙述爆米花的制作过程,并邀请几名学生来叙述此过程。(5分钟)6.从3c方框中选出一件事情,来叙述它的完成过程并且把过程写下来,完成后小组内互相交流,并邀请几名学生来展示所写的内容,教师点评。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(C)1.There are some bananas here.Let me help you ________.A.cut up them B.to cut them outC.cut them up D.cutting them up(B)2.—________ butter do we need for a sandwich?—Two teaspoons should be enough.A.How many B.How muchC.How long D.How far(D)3.I walked a long way,________ I got there.A.first B.nextC.then D.finally(A)4.Please ________ the ingredients to the noodles.A.add B.put C.cut D.pour(A)5.—I'm going to Hainan with my aunt next week.—________!A.Have a good timeB.Best wishes to youC.CongratulationsD.Please go(D)6.________ cross the road until the traffic lights turn green.A.Not B.Won'tC.Doesn't D.Don't环节说明:通过3a学习,让学生练习掌握了how many和how much的用法;3b、3c的学习让学生巩固练习了如何描述程序。Step 4 问题探究( )Could you please ________ the radio a bit?It's too loud.A.turn up B.turn downC.turn off D.turn on答案选择B,本题考查turn的短语。turn up开大音量;turn down调低音量;turn off关掉;turn on打开。根据It's too loud声音太大了,确定把音量调低,所以答案选择B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。How__do__you__make__a__banana__milk__shake?(你怎么制作香蕉奶昔?)First,peel the bananas.Next,put the bananas in the blender.Then,pour the milk into the blender.Finally,turn__on the blender.How__many bananas do we need?We need three bananas.How__much yogurt do we need?We need two__cups__of__yogurt.(两杯酸奶).Section B(1a-1e)1.重点单词:sandwich,butter,turkey,lettuce,piece2.重点短语:in my sandwich,a piece of bread3.重点句式:—Do you like lettuce in a sandwich?—Yes,I do.First,put some butter on a piece of bread.1.可数名词与不可数名词2.学会描述三明治的制作工序学会描述三明治的制作工序一、预习课本P60新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.三明治__sandwich__ 2.黄油__butter__3.火鸡__turkey__ 4.生菜__lettuce__5.片,段__piece__二、认真预习1a-1e,找出下列短语和句型。1.在我的三明治中__in__my__sandwich__2.一片面包__a__piece__of__bread__3.你喜欢三明治里的生菜吗?Do__you__like__lettuce__in__a__sandwich?4.首先将一些黄油放到一片面包上。First,put__some__butter__on__a__piece__of__bread.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Good morning,everyone.Do you like sandwiches?Students:Yes,we do.Teacher:But do you know the story about sandwiches?Today I will tell you the story.Then tell the story about sandwiches to the students.环节说明:通过三明治由来的故事,引起学生的学习兴趣。Step 2 完成教材1a-1b的任务1.学习1a中的单词,学生识记并且两人一组互相提问。(3分钟)2.列一个清单,写出三明治中你喜欢的食物,完成后小组内互相交流。(2分钟)3.两人一组仿照1b的形式练习对话,弄清楚对方喜欢的三明治里的食物,然后邀请几组学生展示对话。(3分钟)参考案例A:Do you like lettuce in a sandwich?B:Yes,I do.A:Do you like tomatoes?B:No,I don't.小结训练。(2分钟)1.I often have some bread(面包).2.Many children like sandwiches(三明治).3.How much butter(黄油) do you need?4.My father likes to have tomato(西红柿) soup.环节说明:本环节的学习让学生熟练掌握了可数名词和不可数名词,同时也锻炼了学生的口语。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.听录音,在1a图片中圈出所听到的单词,集体核对答案,完成1c。(3分钟)2.再认真听一遍录音,按你听到的顺序写出制作三明治的原料,完成1d对话填空,教师核对答案。(3分钟)3.认真听第三遍录音,然后跟读复述三明治的制作方法。(4分钟)4.仿照1d听力形式,两人一组来练习对话,告诉搭挡你最喜欢的三明治的制作过程。(5分钟)参考案例A:First,put some butter on a piece of bread.B:How much butter?A:About one spoon.……小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.—________ there any lettuce in the bowl?—Yes,there is.A.Were B.Is C.Are D.Have(D)2.Put some butter ________ a piece of bread.A.over B.at C.in D.on(C)3.—Would you like some butter?—Yes,but ________.A.few B.little C.a little D.a few(D)4.Do you like lettuce ________ hamburgers?A.to B.with C.at D.in(D)5.How much ________do you want?A.butter B.relishC.onion D.A and B环节说明:这个环节的学习让学生熟练掌握了三明治的制作工序,同时也锻炼了学生的听力和口语表达能力。Step 4 问题探究1.put…on…与put on(1)在面包上放一些黄油。Put__some__butter__on__the__bread.(2)穿上你的大衣,外面很冷。Put__on__your__coat.It's__cold__outside.put…on…意为“把……放在……上”;put__on意为“穿上”,是动词+副词构成的动词短语,当宾语是人称代词时要放在中间,它的反义词是put__off。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:Thanksgiving,traditional,autumn,traveler,England,celebrate,mix,pepper,fill,oven,plate,cover,gravy,serve,temperature2.重点句式:In most countries,people usually eat traditional food on special holidays.It is a time to give thanks for food in the autumn.At this time,people also remember the first travelers from England who came to live in America about 400 years ago.These travelers had a long,hard winter,and many of them died.In the next autumn,they gave thanks for life and food in their new home.These days,most Americans still celebrate this idea of giving thanks by having a big meal at home with their family.The main dish of this meal is almost always turkey.Fill the turkey with this bread mix.Place the turkey on a large plate and cover it with gravy.Cut the turkey into thin pieces and eat the meat with vegetables like carrots and potatoes.1.重点短语和句型2.了解感恩节的历史及火鸡的做法1.重点短语和句型2.了解感恩节的历史及火鸡的做法一、预习课本P61-62新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.感恩节Thanksgiving 2.传统的traditional3.秋天autumn 4.旅行者traveler5.英格兰England 6.庆祝celebrate7.混合mix 8.甜椒pepper9.填满fill 10.烤箱oven11.盘子plate 12.遮盖cover13.肉汁gravy 14.接待serve15.温度temperature二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列句型。1.在大多数的国家,人们在特殊的节日通常吃传统的食物。In__most__countries,people__usually__eat__traditional__food__on__special__holidays.2.这是一个感恩秋天粮食收获的时间。It__is__a__time__to__give__thanks__for__food__in__the__autumn.3.在这个时候人们也纪念来自英国的第一批旅行者,他们400年前来到美国居住。At__this__time,people__also__remember__the__first__travelers__from__England__who__came__to__live__in__America__about__400__years__ago.4.这些旅行者渡过了一个漫长艰苦的冬季,很多人逝去了。These__travelers__had__a__long,hard__winter,and__many__of__them__died.5.在第二年秋天,他们在他们的新家感恩生活和粮食的收获。In__the__next__autumn,they__gave__thanks__for__life__and__food__in__their__new__home.6.现在,大多数的美国人仍然通过和家人一起在家共进丰盛的大餐来庆祝感恩这个想法。These__days,most__Americans__still__celebrate__this__idea__of__giving__thanks__by__having__a__big__meal__at__home__with__their__family.7.这顿饭的主要菜肴几乎总是烤火鸡。The__main__dish__of__this__meal__is__almost__always__turkey.8.用这些面包混合物填满火鸡。Fill__the__turkey__with__this__bread__mix.9.用火鸡放置到一个大盘子上,然后用肉汁覆盖它的全身。Place__the__turkey__on__a__large__plate__and__cover__it__with__gravy.10.把烤火鸡切成薄片,和胡萝卜、土豆等蔬菜一起吃。Cut__the__turkey__into__thin__pieces__and__eat__the__meat__with__vegetables__like__carrots__and__potatoes.Step 1 情景导入Teacher:There are many traditional holidays in China,like the Dragon Boat Festival,the Midautumn Day,the Spring Festival and so on.On the special holidays,we often eat traditional food.Do you know what we eat on the holidays?(Let the students answer the questions)These are all our traditional holidays in China.Do you know thanksgiving?Do you know the story about the festival?Do you know what they eat on the special holiday?Today we will learn an article about these.环节说明:由中国的传统节日以及节日饮食入手引出Thanksgiving,引起学生的学习兴趣,为本课的学习做好铺垫。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.小组内互相交流中国的传统节日及这些传统节日的饮食。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2b短文,了解短文大意,根据烤火鸡的制作步骤,将图片排序,集体核对答案。(3分钟)3.认真阅读短文,回答2c中的五个问题,完成后请学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(B)1.—Don't take pictures here,please.—________.A.No way B.Sorry,I won'tC.Here you are D.It's a pleasure(D)2.—________ salt do you want?—Two teaspoons of ________.A.How many;salts B.How many;saltC.How much;salts D.How much;salt(C)3.Do you have ________ to eat?A.delicious anything B.good somethingC.anything delicious D.bad something(D)4.Paul made a nice cage ________ the little sick bird till it could fly.A.keep B.keptC.keeping D.to keep(A)5.We have no ________ in the fridge.Let's go to buy some peas,carrots and cabbages.A.vegetables B.eggsC.meat D.fruit环节说明:本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.认真阅读短文有关火鸡烹饪的方法的段落,然后结合2d的提示要求,用First,Next,Then和Finally完成填空,集体核对答案,并大声朗读短文。(5分钟)2.两人一组互相提问2e中的问题,然后根据问题的答案将其整理成一篇介绍中国传统节日及饮食的小短文,完成后小组内互相交流短文。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节让学生对烤火鸡的制作步骤有了更深刻的理解;2e环节锻炼了学生的口语表达能力和书面表达能力,同时让学生对中国的传统节日有了更深刻的理解。Step 4 问题探究1.fill的用法(1)用水把杯子装满。Fill__the__bottle__with__water.(2)杯子里装满了水。The__bottle__is__filled__with__water.fill意为“装满”,经常用到的句型:用……装满……fill…with…;……被……充满…be__filled__with…2.cover的用法(1)用报纸盖住食物。Cover__the__food__with__the__newspaper.(2)食物被报纸覆盖了。The__food__is__covered__with__the__newspaper.cover意为“覆盖”,经常用到的句型:用……盖住……cover…with…;……被……盖住:…be__covered__with…。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:rice noodles,one by one2.重点句式:Cut the chicken into pieces.It's time to enjoy the rice noodles.1.复习巩固所学过的重要单词、短语和句型2.会叙述食物的制作过程会用学过的知识点来介绍食物的制作过程一、预习课本3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.米线__rice__noodles__2.逐一__one__by__one__3.把鸡肉切成片。__cut__the__chicken__into__pieces.__4.享受米线的时间到了。__It's__time__to__enjoy__the__rice__noodles.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone.We all know that there are many kinds of delicious food in China.Rice noodles are very popular in Yunnan.Many people like to eat them.I'm sure most of us have eaten them.But do you know how to make rice noodles?Do you want to make them for your family and yourself?Today we will learn a short passage about how to make rice noodles.I hope you can make some rice noodles for yourself.环节说明:由人人爱吃的米线,引出它的做法,激起了学生的学习兴趣,为课堂学习做好铺垫。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.认真阅读3a中关于米线的烹饪方法的短文,选用方框中的单词来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,然后大声地朗读短文。(5分钟)2.想一种你喜欢的食物的烹饪方法,然后把所用到的材料列出一个清单,完成3b。(3分钟)3.根据3b填写的内容仿照3a的形式来介绍一种你最喜爱的食物的烹饪方法,然后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查,点拨。(7分钟)参考案例Beef Stew with tomatoesIn my town,the people all like eating beef stew with tomatoes.It's very delicious.Now let me tell you how to cook it.To make this special food,you need to have some beef and some tomatoes.First,cut two tomatoes and some beef into small pieces.Then,place some oil into a pan and heat.After that,put tomatoes and beef into the pan to fry a few minutes.And then add some bowls of water into it and cook it for about two hours.At last,put some salt and seasoning.Now it's time for you to enjoy it.4.和你的搭档一起编一个离奇的食谱,然后告诉另外一组搭档这种离奇食物的烹饪方法,他们将根据你们的描述把它画下来。(5分钟)环节说明:这个教学环节让学生熟练掌握了食物制作过程的表达,同时练习了本单元的写作并锻炼了学生的写作能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.认真阅读做西红柿蛋汤的步骤,将这些步骤按正确的顺序排列,然后用左侧方框中的单词补全句子,集体核对答案,并大声的朗读西红柿鸡蛋汤的做法。(4分)2.根据提示内容利用所学的知识完成2中的问句答语,邀请几位学生到黑板上板演答案,教师点评。(5分钟)环节说明:本环节的学习让学生掌握了本单元的重要句型及first,next,then,after that,finally描述程序的用法。Step 4 问题探究( )Please retell the story ________.A.over and over again B.one by oneC.day and day答案选择B:over and over again意为“多次,反复的”;day and day意为“一天又一天”;one by one意为“一个接一个”。根据句意“一个接一个地复述故事”,故选择B。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 9Can you come to my party?1.重点单词:prepare,exam,flu2.重点短语:prepare for an exam,have the flu3.重点句式:—Can you come to my party on Saturday afternoon?—Sure,I'd love to./Sorry,I can't.I have to prepare for an exam. /I'm sorry,too.I must go to the doctor.1.会用“Can you…?”来对别人发出邀请2.学会接受和拒绝对方的邀请1.熟练掌握情态动词can的用法2.学会有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请一、预习课本P65新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.准备__prepare__ 2.考试__exam__3.流感__flu__二、认真预习1a-1c,找出下列短语和句型。1.准备考试__prepare__for__an__exam__2.去看医生__go__to__the__doctor__3.患流感__have__the__flu__4.来参加我的舞会__come__to__my__party__5.——你能在星期六的下午参加我的聚会吗?——当然了,我非常乐意去。/抱歉我不能。我必须要准备考试。/我也很抱歉,我必须去看医生。 —Can you come to my party on Saturday afternoon?—Sure,I'd love to./Sorry,I can't.I have to prepare for an exam. /I'm sorry,too.I must go to the doctor. Step 1 情景导入Teacher:I'm very happy today,because it is my birthday tomorrow,and I am going to have a birthday party.Would you like to come to my party?Students:Yes,we'd love to.Teacher:Welcome to my party.But do you know another way of saying “Would you like to come to my birthday party”? You don't need to be worried,today we will learn it.Now let's learn “Unit 9 Can you come to my party?”环节说明:由过生日邀请学生参加生日聚会引出将要学习的新句型,过渡自然,简洁明了。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.教师教读65页的新词组,学生领读1a中的词组,两人一组背诵并互相提问。(5分钟)2.教师抽查学生的背诵情况,之后让学生认真观察图片中人物的活动并把短语和图片匹配,集体核对答案,完成1a。(3分钟)3.请学生大声朗读1a图片中的对话,了解大意,为听力做好铺垫。(2分钟)4.听录音,根据录音内容,把1b中的人物名字写在1a图片中相应的学生旁边,集体核对答案。(3分钟)5.再听一遍录音,并大声地跟读对话。(3分钟)6.利用1a中的短语,仿照1c中的形式小组内练习发出、接受或拒绝邀请的对话,邀请几组学生来展示对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(D)1.I usually watch TV with parents ________ Sunday evening.A.in B.at C.for D.on(C)2.—What is your mother doing?—She is preparing ________ dinner for us.A.in B.at C.for D.to环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.can表示邀请的用法——你能参加我们的英语联欢会吗?——当然,我非常愿意。/对不起,我不能。—Can__you__come__to__our__English__party?—Sure,I'd__love__to./Sorry,I__can't.Can you…?是向对方发出邀请或请求时所用的句型,肯定回答用Yes,I'd__love__to,它是I would love to的缩略形式,等于I__would__like__to。否定回答用Sorry,but…,在表示拒绝时,口气应该委婉,先用“对不起”,然后用but引出要陈述的理由。2.prepare的用法(1)他爸爸正在为会议做准备。His__father__is__preparing__for__the__meeting.(2)吉姆正准备去旅行。Jim__is__preparing__to__travel.(3)你必须为他们准备好食物。You__must__prepare__food__for__them.(4)父亲在为我小弟弟上学做准备。Father__is__preparing__my__little__brother__for__school.prepare意为“准备”,经常用到的句型:(1)为……做准备,for是准备的目的prepare__for…;(2)准备做某事prepare__to__do__sth.;(3)为……准备某事prepare__sth.for…;(4)使某人准备做某事prepare__sb.to__do__sth.请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:available,until,hang,catch2.重点短语:another time,go bike riding,last fall,hang out3.重点句式:I'm not available.I have too much homework this weekend.Thanks for askingI remember we went bike riding together last fall when he visited you.Sam isn't leaving until next Wednesday.Can you hang out with us on Monday night?Catch you on Monday.1.can的用法2.学会有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请1.can的用法2.学会有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请一、预习课本P66新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.有空的__available__ 2.到……时__until__3.悬挂__hang__ 4.抓住__catch__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.别的时间__another__time__2.骑自行车旅行__go__bike__riding__3.去年秋天__last__fall__4.闲逛__hang__out__5.我没有时间,这个周末我有太多的作业。__I'm__not__available,__I__have__too__much__homework__this__weekend.__6.我记得去年秋天他来看你时我们一起骑自行车旅行。__I__remember__we__went__bike__riding__together__last__fall__when__he__visited__you.__7.萨姆直到下周三才离开。__Sam__isn't__leaving__until__next__Wednesday.__8.你周一晚上和我们一起随便逛逛吗?__Can__you__hang__out__with__us__on__Monday__night?9.周一联系你。__Catch__you__on__Monday.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Would you like to come to my birthday party?Student 1:Sure,I'd love to.Student 2:I'm sorry.I have to prepare for my English exam.Student 3:I'm sorry,too.I have the flu.Teacher:Now please practice the conversations like this with your partners in group.环节说明:通过师生对话、生生对话,既复习了上节课的语言目标——发出、接受及拒绝邀请,又练习了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.认真阅读2中的句子,为听力做好准备。(2分钟)2.认真听录音,根据听力内容圈出can或can't。(3分钟)3.认真听一遍录音,写出谁不能参加聚会及其原因,完成2b中的表格。(3分钟)4.再听一遍录音订正2a和2b的答案。(4分钟)5.认真阅读2b表格中的原因,再添加更多的原因,然后两人一组仿照2c对话形式来练习对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(2分钟)(B)1.—Would you like to play basketball with us?—Yes,I'd love to.________I'm afraid I have no time.A.So B.But C.Or D.And(C)2.—Harbin is really a beautiful city and there're many places of interest.—So it is.Why not stay here for ________ two days?A.other B.othersC.another D.the other环节说明:通过读、写、听、说学习训练让学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,回答下面的问题。(5分钟)(1)Who is going to Jeff's house on Saturday?(2)Did Sam visit Jeff last year?(3)Why doesn't Nick go to Jeff's house?(4)When is Sam leaving?(5)What will Jeff do on Monday night?2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)(B)1.He won't go home until he ________ his homework.A.finish B.finishesC.will finish D.is finishing(D)2.Tomorrow is Saturday.I have nothing to do.What about ________?A.hang out B.to hang outC.hangs out D.hanging out3.Can you go to the movies with me?(肯定回答)Sure,I'd__love__to.4.Can you come to my house for dinner?(否定回答)Sorry,I__can't.环节说明:将对话问题化,既能锻炼学生的思维能力又能加深对课文的理解。Step 4 问题探究1.hang的用法(1)她把衣服挂在了晾衣绳上。She__hung__the__clothes__on__the__line.(2)这个女人昨天晚上自杀了。The__woman__hanged__herself__last__night.Hang表示“悬挂”的意思时,是不规则动词,过去式和过去分词都是hung;表示“吊死、绞死”的意思时,是规则动词,过去式和过去分词均为hanged。2.until的用法(1)我会一直工作到他叫我停下来为止。I__will__keep__working__until__he__asks__me__to__stop.(2)她直到做完作业,才去睡觉。She__didn't__go__to__bed__until__she__finished__homework.(3)我们要直到雨停了才回家。We__won't__go__home__until__the__rain__stops.until是中考英语试题中常考的词汇之一,它既可以用作介词,又可用作连词。作介词时,后面要接具体的名词;作连词用时,后面要接从句。在until引导的时间状语从句中,如果句子(主句)的谓语动词是持续性动词(即动作可以延续一段时间的动词),那么这个句子(主句)常常用肯定式,表示动作一直延续到until所表示的时间为止。这时until可译作“直到……为止”。在until引导的时间状语从句中,如果句子(主句)的谓语动词是短暂性动词(即动作一会儿就结束的动词),常常要用否定式,表示某一动作到until所表示的时间才发生。not…until…意为“直到……才……”。until用作连词引导时间状语从句时,主句用将来时(或主句是祈使句时),until引导的时间状语从句要用一般现在时。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:invite,accept,refuse2.重点句式:—Can you go to the movies tomorrow night?—I'm afraid not.I have the flu.They might have to meet their friends.When will you finish the science homework?Are you free to come to my place on Saturday?1.情态动词might的用法2.学会有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请1.情态动词might的用法2.学会有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请。一、预习课本P67新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.邀请__invite__ 2.接受__accept__3.拒绝__refuse__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列句型。1.——你明天晚上去看电影吗?——恐怕不能,我感冒了。 —Can you go to the movies tomorrow night?—I'm afraid not. I have the flu. 2.我们也许必须要去见朋友。__They__might__have__to__meet__their__friends.__3.你将什么时候完成你的科学作业?__When__will__you__finish__the__science__homework?4.你星期六有空来我这里吗?__Are__you__free__to__come__to__my__place__on__Saturday?__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to make an invitation,we also have learned how to accept and refuse an invitation.Now please make conversations with your partner about what we have learned.环节说明:这个环节的学习既让学生复习了上节课学到的知识,又引出了本节课的学习内容,锻炼了学生的口语表达能力。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a中5组对话,然后用might和方框中的其中一个短语来写出问题的答案。完成后老师让几名学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(3分钟)2.两人一组大声地朗读3a中的对话。(3分钟)3.根据要求和括号内所给的提示词,来完成3b中的句子,邀请几名学生到黑板上板演答案,完成后小组互相交流答案,教师点拨黑板上学生所写的句子。(5分钟)4.在3c的表格中填写出下周每天你要做的事情,选择其中的一天的某个时间举行一个聚会,然后仿照3c的对话形式来邀请你的同学参加你的聚会。参考案例A:Can you come to my party?B:When is it?A:Next week,on Thursday night.B:I'm sorry.I have to study for a math test.小结训练。(2分钟)1.Thank you for inviting me.(改为同义句)Thanks__for__asking__me.2.Jeff can join the baseball game.(改为否定句)Jeff__can't__join__the__baseball__game.3.She has to go to school.(改为一般疑问句)Does__she__have__to__go__to__school?4.Can you come to my house for dinner?(肯定回答)Sure,I'd__love__to.5.I am going to the movies with my__parents.(对画线部分提问)Who__are__you__going__to__the__movies__with?环节说明:通过3a环节的学习,学生练习掌握了情态动词might的用法;3b和3c环节的学习让学生熟练掌握了发出、接受和拒绝邀请的句型。Step 4 问题探究1.might的用法(1)我可以问你一个问题吗?Might__I__ask__you__a__question?(2)史密斯先生或许是对的。Mr.Smith__might__be__right.(3)你可以请他帮忙嘛。You__might__ask__him__for__help.might意为“或许,可能”,主要有以下用法:might表示请求允许。但“Might I…?”比“May I…?”更客气,但是不如“May I…?”常用;might表示说话人的推测,其把握性比may小;might用于委婉地提出建议、责备等。2.invite的用法(1)谢谢你的邀请。Thanks__for__your__invitation.(2)我的老师上周邀请我去他家。My__teacher__invited__me__to__his__home__last__week.(3)我的朋友经常邀请我去看电影。My__friends__often__invite__me__to__go__to__the__movies.invite意为“邀请”,是动词,其名词为invitation。作为动词经常用到的句型为:(1)邀请某人去某地invite__sb.to__sw.(2)邀请某人做某事invite__sb.to__do__sth.( )3.I ________ a gift from my classmate yesterday,but it's very valuable.So I can't ________ it.A.receive;acceptB.accept;receiveC.received;acceptD.accepted;receive答案选择C,accept意为“收到并接受”,而receive只是“收到”,不一定“接受”。根据本题句意“我昨天收到了来自我朋友的礼物,但是它太贵重了,我不能接受。”判断第一个空填receive,第二个空填accept,又根据yesterday和can't判定最终答案为C。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Can__you__come__to__my__party__on__Saturday?(你星期六能参加我的聚会吗?)Sure,I'd__love__to./Sorry,I must study for a math test.Can__you__go__to__the__movies__tomorrow__night?(你明天晚上能去看电影吗?)Sure.That sounds great./I'm__afraid__not.I__have__the__flu.(我恐怕不能去,我得感冒了。)Can__he__go__to__the__party?(他能参加聚会吗?)No,he__can't.He has to help his parents.Can__she__go__to__the__baseball__game?(她能去参加棒球比赛吗?)No,she's__not__available.She__must__go__to__the__doctor.(她没有空,她必须要去看医生。)Can__they__go__to__the__movies?(他们能去看电影吗?)No,they are not free.They__might__have__to__meet__their__friends.(他们也许必须要去见他们的朋友。)Section B(1a-1f)1.重点单词:weekday2.重点短语:the day before yesterday,the day after tomorrow,look after3.重点句式:—What's today?—It's Monday the 14th.1.熟悉对星期的询问及回答;学会日期的表达法2.灵活地将星期和日期用到发出或接受邀请的谈话中以丰富交际能力1.熟悉对星期的询问及回答;学会日期的表达法2.灵活地将星期和日期用到发出或接受邀请的谈话中以丰富交际能力一、预习课本P68新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。工作日__weekday__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列短语和句型。1.前天__the__day__before__yesterday__2.后天__the__day__after__tomorrow__3.照料__look__after__4.——今天几号,星期几?——今天14号,星期一。—What's today?—It's Monday the 14th. Step 1 情景导入Teacher:This is a calendar.Now please look at it.What's the date today?Students:It's…Teacher:What day is it today?Students:It's…Teacher:Very good.Do you know how to answer the question “What's today”? It's very easy.Today we will learn how to answer it.环节说明:由学过的询问日期和星期的句型入手,既复习了学过的知识又为本节课的学习做好准备。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生领读1a中表示星期的单词,教师纠正读音。然后学生背诵识记并且两人一组互相检测。(4分钟)2.在1a表格中填写这周的日期,完成后小组内互相交流。(2分钟)3.学生朗读并识记1b中的单词或词组,两人一组互相提问。然后在1a日历上的相应日期下面写下这些单词,小组交流,完成1b。(3分钟)4.两人一组,用1a中的日期仿照1c的对话形式来做问答练习,然后邀请几组学生展示对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:What's today?B:It's Monday 14th.小结训练。(对画线部分提问)(2分钟)1.It's Monday today.What__day__is__it__today?2.It was January__21st yesterday.What__was__the__date__yesterday?3.It is Sunday__the__12th.What's__today?环节说明:本环节的学习让学生熟练掌握了星期、日期的询问方法及答语。Step 3 完成教材1c-1e的任务1.朗读1d中的短语,并在小组内互相提问。(3分钟)2.认真听录音,根据内容回答问题:Can Vince play with Andy?圈出正确答案Yes或No,集体核对答案,完成1d。3.再认真听一遍录音,将1d表格中的活动和日期连起来,集体核对答案,完成1e。(2分钟)3.细心听录音,并跟读,整体感知对话。(2分钟)4.分角色表演对话,学生A扮演Andy,学生B扮演Vince。Andy邀请Vince去打网球,就此情景两人练习对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Hi,Vince.Can you play tennis with me?B:When?A:Today.B:Sorry,I can't.I…小结训练。(2分钟)(B)1.—What's the ________ today?—It's September 12,2009.A.day B.date C.month D.week(C)2.—What day ________ it the day before yesterday?—It was Friday.A.is B.are C.was D.were环节说明:听说读写相结合,全方位训练学生的能力,使学生牢固掌握语言目标。Step 4 问题探究1.——今天几号,星期几?——今天23号,星期二。—What's today?—It's Tuesday the 23rd.本句用来询问星期和日期,回答通常为星期和日期,星期在前,日期在后。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:invitation,reply,forward,delete,print,sad,goodbye,glad,preparation,glue,without,surprised,housewarming.2.重点短语:accept an invitation,make an invitation,turn down an invitation,take a trip,at the end of,help out,look forward to,hear from3.重点句式:What a great idea!She helped me to improve my English so much.The party is the best way to say “Thank you and goodbye.”I already have a great idea about how to do that.My family is taking a trip to Wuhan at the end of this month to visit my aunt and my uncle.Let me know if you need my help.To show how much we're going to miss her,let's have a surprise party for her next Friday the 28th.Bring Ms.Steen to the party without telling her so that she can be surprised.I look forward to hearing from you all.1.重点短语和句型2.会向他人发出邀请,并且会接受和拒绝对方的邀请1.重点短语和句型2.会向他人发出邀请,并且会接受和拒绝对方的的邀请一、预习课本P69-70新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.邀请__invitation__ 2.回复__reply__3.发送__forward__ 4.删除__delete__5.打印__print__ 6.悲伤__sad__7.再见__goodbye__ 8.高兴__glad__9.准备__prepare__ 10.胶水__glue__11.没有without 12.惊奇的surprised13.乔迁聚会__housewarming__二、认真预习2a-2e的内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.接受邀请__accept__an__invitation__2.发出邀请__make__an__invitation__3.拒绝邀请__turn__down__an__invitation__4.去旅行__take__a__trip__5.在……的末尾__at__the__end__of__6.帮助__help__out__7.盼望__look__forward__to__8.收到来信__hear__from__9.真是一个好主意!__What__a__great__idea!__10.她帮助我很大地提高了我的英语水平。__She__helped__me__to__improve__my__English__so__much.__11.这个聚会是最好的道谢和送别的方式了。__The__party__is__the__best__way__to__say__“Thank__you__and__goodbye.”__12.我已经有了一个怎么去做它的很好的想法了。__I__already__have__a__great__idea__about__how__to__do__that.__13.我的一家人要在这个月底去武汉旅行并看望我的叔叔和婶婶。__My__family__is__taking__a__trip__to__Wuhan__at__the__end__of__this__month__to__visit__my__aunt__and__my__uncle.__14.让我知道你是否需要我的帮助。__Let__me__know__if__you__need__my__help.__15.为了表明我们是多么的想念她,让我们在28号下周五举行一个惊喜派对。__To__show__how__much__we're__going__to__miss__her,let's__have__a__surprise__party__for__her__next__Friday__the__28th.__16.在没有告诉Ms.Steen的情况下把她带去参加聚会,以便使她感到意外。__Bring__Ms.Steen__to__the__party__without__telling__her__so__that__she__can__be__surprised.__17.我期待收到你们所有人的来信。__I__look__forward__to__hearing__from__you__all.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to make a conversation about making,accepting and turning down an invitation.But do you know how to write something about the invitation?Today we will learn it.环节说明:由对话发出、接受和拒绝邀请过渡到文字写作发出、接受和拒绝邀请,开门见山,直奔主题。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.小组内互相交流聚会的种类,然后在2a的横线上写下来。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2a短文,了解短文大意,把人们写文章的原因与每篇短文匹配。(3分钟)3.认真阅读2a的短文,回答2c中的五个问题,完成后请学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的疑难问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(D)1.I'll invite some classmates ________ to the English evening.A.come B.comingC.to coming D.to come(B)2.Will you please ________ to my email by Saturday?A.answer B.replyC.delete D.print(C)3.I was ill.That's ________ I didn't go to your party.A.because B.whereC.why D.what(D)4.—What's the weather like ________?—The radio says it is going to be raining.A.yesterdayB.last SundayC.the day before yesterdayD.tomorrow(A)5.There are trees on ________ side of the street.A.each B.allC.both D.many环节说明:本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.认真阅读69页的信息,用信息中的单词和短语来补全2d的邀请,完成后集体核对答案,并大声朗读短文。(5分钟)2.两人一组互相提问2e中的问题,然后根据问题的答案将其整理成一篇为老师送行的派对计划。完成后小组内互相交流短文。(5分钟)环节说明:2d环节让学生对邀请函的写法有了更深刻的理解,2e环节锻炼了学生的口语表达能力和书面表达能力。Step 4 问题探究( )1.We will have an exam ________ this month.A.in the end B.at the end ofC.by the end of D.to the end of答案选择B,at the end of意思是“在……尽头(末端)”,后面可接地点或时间名词,通常与一般过去时或一般将来时连用;by the end of意思是“到……为止”,仅指时间,指某一动作在某时间点以前或到某一时间段为止就已发生或完成,多用于过去完成时。若后面接的是将来时间,句子要用将来时态;in the end意为“最终、最后”,与at last或者finally同义。( )2.The best way ________ is to work hard.A.to succeed B.succeedC.succeeding D.succeeded答案选择A,the best way to do sth.意为“做某事的最好的方法”,其中动词不定式to do作后置定语。( )3.We will go to the beach tomorrow.But do you know ________?A.when will we startB.when we startC.when we will startD.when to start答案选择C,本句是含有宾语从句的复合句,A选项语序不对,B选项时态不对,D选项是“疑问词+动词不定式”在句子中充当宾语成分。( )4.The boy was very angry,he went out ________ saying anything.A.with B.withoutC.at D.for答案选择B,根据句意“这个男孩很生气,什么都没有说就出去了”可知应该表示否定意思,故选择without,without意为“没有”,是介词,其后要跟动名词。( )5.I haven't seen him for a long time.I look forward to ________ him soon.A.see B.seeingC.to see D.saw答案选择B,look forward to doing sth.期待做某事。( )6.I often write to my friend and I also ________ him.A.hear of B.hear aboutC.hear from答案选择C,根据句意“我经常给我的朋友写信,我也收到他的来信”可知应该选择hear from,意为“收到某人的来信”,hear from的宾语是人。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:opening,concert,daytime,headmaster,event,guest,calendar2.重点短语:reply to the invitation3.重点句式:I would like to invite you to the opening of our new library at No.9 High school.I would also like to invite each parent to bring one book as a gift for the new library.Please reply in writing to this invitation by Friday,December 20th.1.会写邀请函2.复习有礼貌地发出、接受和拒绝对方的邀请会写邀请函一、预习课本P71-72新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.开幕仪式__opening__ 2.音乐会__concert__3.白天__daytime__ 4.校长__headmaster__5.大事__event__ 6.客人__guest__7.日历__calendar__二、认真预习3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.回复邀请__reply__to__the__invitation__2.我想邀请您参加第九中学图书馆的开幕仪式。__I__would__like__to__invite__you__to__the__opening__of__our__new__library__at__No.9__high__school.__3.我也想邀请每一位父(母)亲带来一本书作为送给新图书馆的礼物。__I__would__also__like__to__invite__each__parent__to__bring__one__book__as__a__gift__for__the__new__library.__4.请在12月20日,星期五之前写信回复这个邀请。__Please__reply__in__writing__to__this__invitation__by__Friday,__December__20th.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:There is an opening of a new library at a school,you want to invite some parents to come to the school and let them bring some gifts,do you know how to write an invitation to the parents?Do you know how to write invitations about other events?Today we will learn to write invitations about events.环节说明:由询问学生新图书馆开幕式的邀请函的写法引出重大事件的邀请函,明确了本节课的学习任务——邀请函的写法。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.快速阅读3a短文,了解短文大意。(2分钟)2.认真阅读短文,回答3a中的六个问题,完成后请学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(5分钟)3.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作总结邀请函的写法。(5分钟)4.教师点拨邀请函的写法。(3分钟)5.认真阅读3b中的问题,根据问题提示仿照3a的形式来写一个聚会或其它重大事件的邀请函,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查,点拨。(7分钟)参考案例Dear classmates of Class Four,I would like to invite you to my birthday party.The party will be on the evening of Friday at 7:00.We will have it at my house.You needn't bring anything,but I think you should prepare some funny stories or English songs for the party.You should dress casually.We will play some games at the party.I would like to see you all at the party.If you want to come to the party,please reply in writing to this invitation by Wednesday.Jim6.两人一组互相回复对方的邀请,完成后互相交流借鉴。(5分钟)参考案例Dear Jim,I would like to come to your birthday party,but I'm not available.My uncle will come back from the UK.I am going to see him at the airport on Tuesday,and show him around the city.However,thanks for inviting me to you party all the same.I hope you all have a good time.7.两人一组按要求完成4的对话练习,学生A看右侧的日程安排,学生B看81页的日程安排表,然后通过对话的形式来找出两个人都能去购物的时间,并邀请学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Can you go shopping with me next week?B:Sure,I'd love to.When?A:Well,what are you going to do on Monday evening?B:I must study for the English test.What about Tuesday evening?……环节说明:3a-3b教学环节让学生熟练掌握了邀请函的写法,同时练习了本单元的写作并锻炼了学生的写作能力;4环节练习了学生的口语表达能力。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.认真阅读1中的对话,根据所学的知识将对话补充完整,集体核对答案,然后让学生们4人一组练习对话并邀请学生展示对话。(4分钟)2.认真阅读2中的邀请句型,然后写出拒绝邀请的句型及理由,邀请几位学生到黑板上板演答案,教师点评。(5分钟)环节说明:本环节的学习让学生熟练掌握了本单元的语言目标——发出、接受和拒绝邀请。Step 4 问题探究( )Would you like to come to the ________ of the new school?A.open B.openedC.opening D.opens答案选择C,the opening of…意为“……的开幕仪式”,opening为名词。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(1a-1c)Unit 10If you go to the party,you'll have a great time!重点句式:If you go to the party,you'll have a great time.I think I'll wear jeans to the party.Who will you go with?1.学习if引导的条件状语从句2.能用“I think I'll…”来表达作出的决定if引导的条件状语从句认真预习1a-1c,找出下列句型。1.如果你参加聚会,你就会玩得愉快。__If__you__go__to__the__party,__you'll__have__a__great__time.2.我想我将穿着牛仔裤去参加聚会。__I__think__I'll__wear__jeans__to__the__party.__3.你将和谁一起去?__Who__will__you__go__with?__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone,are you happy?I'm very happy.If I am happy,I will listen to the tape.Do you want to listen?Now let's listen to If You Are Happy together.(Play the song If You Are Happy to the students.)环节说明:用歌曲If Your Are Happy导入新课,让学生在歌声中轻松的进入学习状态,且切入学习主题,并在歌声中提前感知if的用法。Step 2 完成教材1a-1c的任务1.学生认真观察1a图片,将句子与图片搭配,集体核对答案。(2分钟)2.大声朗读1a中的小对话,为听力做好准备。(2分钟)3.认真听录音,完成1a中的句子,集体核对答案,完成课本上1b的听力任务。(3分钟)4.再听一遍录音,大声跟读整体感知对话内容。(3分钟)5.根据1a图片中的内容信息,两人一组仿照1c的形式来编练新对话,并请一些学生表演出他们的对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:Are you going to the party tomorrow night?B:Yes,I am.A:Who will you go with?B:I think I'll go with Karen and Anna.A:If you do,you'll have a great time.小结训练。(3分钟)1.If he goes(go) to the movies,he won't finish his work.2.If I become(become) a doctor,I can help others.3.If we have(have) time,we will go to the park tomorrow.4.If you shout(shout) at the party,you will__have(have) to leave.5.If I go to college,I will__be(be) a college student.6.If I like(like) the ball,I will__buy(buy) it.7.If Tom gets(get) good grades,his parents will__be(be) happy.8.If it doesn't__rain(not rain) tomorrow,he will__go(go) to the mountains.环节说明:听说结合,第一时间向学生传达语言目标,通过结对对话练习和小结训练,使语言目标得以强化。Step 3 问题探究1.If引导的条件状语从句(1)如果明天不下雨,我就去公园。If__it__doesn't__rain__tomorrow,I'll__go__to__the__park.(2)如果想取得好成绩,你必须努力学习。If__you__want__to__get__good__grades,you__must__study__hard.(3)如果你有问题请举手。If__you__have__some__questions,please__hands__up.if意为“如果”,引导的句子在复合句中表示条件,在做主句的条件状语,称为条件状语从句。从句可以放在主句前或主句后,从前主后用逗号隔开,主前从后if连接。if引导的条件状语从句与主句的时态:(1)主将从现:如果主句是一般将来时,从句则用一般现在时表将来。(2)主情从现:主句含有must,may,can等情态动词,从句用一般现在时表将来。(3)主祈从现:如果主句是祈使句,从句用一般现在时表将来。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(2a-2d)1.重点单词:meeting,video,organize,chocolate2.重点短语:talk about,a class meeting,watch a video,half the class,potato chips3.重点句式:What will happen if they watch a video at the party?What will Mark organize?When is a good time to have the party?For the party next week,should we ask people to bring food?If we ask people to bring food,they will just bring potato chips and chocolate because they'll be too lazy to cook.Do you think we should give people some small gifts if they win?The games will be more exciting.1.熟练运用if引导的条件状语从句2.运用What对if引导的句子所产生的结构进行提问1.熟练运用if引导的条件状语从句2.运用What对if引导的句子所产生的结构进行提问一、预习课本P74新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.会议__meeting__ 2.录音带__video__3.组织__organize__ 4.巧克力__chocolate__二、认真预习2a-2d,找出下列短语和句型。1.谈论__talk__about__2.一次班会__a__class__meeting__3.看录像__watch__a__video__4.一半的学生__half__the__class__5.炸薯条__potato__chips__6.如果他们在聚会上看录像将会发生什么事情?__What__will__happen__if__they__watch__a__video__at__the__party?__7.马克将组织什么?__What__will__Mark__organize?__8.什么时间举行聚会好呢?__When__is__a__good__time__to__have__the__party?__9.对于下周的聚会,我们应该让人们带食物吗?__For__the__party__next__week,should__we__ask__people__to__bring__food?__10.如果我们让人们带食物,他们将只会带炸薯条和巧克力因为他们太懒了而不去做。__If__we__ask__people__to__bring__food,they__will__just__bring__potato__chips__and__chocolate__because__they'll__be__too__lazy__to__cook.__11.如果人们获胜了,你认为我们应该给他们一些小礼物吗?__Do__you__think__we__should__give__people__some__small__gifts__if__they__win?__12.游戏将会更令人兴奋。__The__games__will__be__more__exciting.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:We have learned how to make sentences with “If” yesterday.Now please make sentences with “if” like this:If it is sunny tomorrow,I will go to the zoo.I will visit my grandparents if I have enough time.……环节说明:通过用if来编写句子复习上节课的内容,并且为新课的学习做好了铺垫。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.认真阅读2a中的句子,然后听录音,根据录音内容圈出正确的答案来完成1a中的句子,完成后集体核对答案。(4分钟)2.认真阅读2b中的句子,然后听录音,根据录音内容选择正确的答案来回答每一个问题,核对答案后大声朗读句子。(4分钟)3.听第三遍录音,跟读并从整体上感知对话内容。(2分钟)4.根据2b的听力信息,分角色表演Nelly和Mark的对话,并邀请几组学生表演对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:OK,when is a good time to have the party?B:Let's have it today.A:Hmm.If we have it today,half the students won't come.小结训练。(2分钟)(C)1.It's a good time ________ Hainan Island in autumn.A.visit B.visitingC.to visit D.visits(B)2.—I wonder if it is going to rain next week.—If it ________,I have to stay at home.A.is B.does C.do D.will(B)3.If we ________ pay attention to the safety of food,our health ________ in danger.A.isn't;is B.don't;will beC.won't;is D.isn't;will be(D)4.What ________ if we don't work hard?A.is happened B.will happenedC.was happening D.will happen(D)5.________ you work hard,you will do well in English.A.Until B.BeforeC.Why D.If环节说明:通过听、说学习训练让学生掌握了解了要掌握的语言目标,学生的口语表达能力和听力在这一环节得到提升。Step 3 完成教材2d的任务1.学生自读对话,根据对话内容完成下列句子。(5分钟)(1)Jeff and Ben will have a party ________.(2)They will give people ________ if they win.(3)Ben thinks people will bring potato chips and chocolate because ________.2.大声朗读2d对话,读熟后与同伴结对练习,分角色表演对话。(3分钟)3.邀请三组学生来表演对话。(5分钟)小结训练。(3分钟)1.Please ask the children not__to__play(not play) in the street.2.Let's ride(ride) our bikes to the open air.3.The students will go to the Summer Palace if it doesn't__rain(not rain) tomorrow.4.The teacher took(take) his phone away when he was sending messages in class.5.If you bring snacks to school,the teacher will__be(are) angry.6.I want to__have(have) a class party.7.What will__happen(happen) if you have a meeting tomorrow?8.What should we do(do) if they can't come on time?9.We are all excited about the exciting news.(excite)环节说明:将对话转化成填空题,这样能对所学的重要句型起到复习巩固的作用。Step 4 问题探究( )1.I have a lot of homework ________.A.do B.doing C.did D.to do答案选择D,本题考查动词不定式做定语,常常放在被修饰词之后,故正确答案为D选项。( )2.If you have a headache,you should ________ a doctor.A.see B.to see C.seeing D.saw答案选择A,should意为“应该”,是情态动词,后面跟动词原形,所以答案选择A。3.half的用法(1)半个小时half__an__hour(2)这个苹果一半是坏的Half__of__the__apple__is__bad.(3)三个半小时three__hours__and__a__half/three__and__a__half__hourshalf作形容词,意为“一半的”,一般要放在名词、代词之前。“half+名词”作主语时,谓语动词的单、复数形式由所接名词的单、复数形式来决定,名词是中心词。half还可作名词,意为“半,一半”,其复数形式为halves。“……个半……”可表达为“数词+名词+and a half”或“数词+and a half+名词(复数)”。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section A(Grammar Focus-3c)1.重点单词:upset,taxi,advice2.重点句式:—I think I'll take the bus to the party.—If you do,you'll be late.I don't know what to do about going to Mike's birthday party tomorrow night.Can you give me some advice please?I will not have enough time to study.熟练运用if引导的条件状语从句熟练运用if引导的条件状语从句一、预习课本P75新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.难过__upset__ 2.出租车__taxi__3.建议__advice__二、认真预习Grammar Focus-3c,找出下列句型。1.——我想我将要乘公共汽车去参加聚会。——如果你那样,你将会迟到。—I think I'll take the bus to the party.—If you do,you'll be late.2.关于明天晚上参加迈克的生日聚会,我不知道该做些什么。__I__don't__know__what__to__do__about__going__to__Mike's__birthday__party__tomorrow__night.__3.你能给我一些建议吗?__Can__you__give__me__some__advice__please?__4.我将没有足够的时间来学习。__I__will__not__have__enough__time__to__study.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:What should you do if your classmate invites you to his birthday party?Student 1:If he invites me to his birthday party,I will go to the party.Teacher:But your parents think you should study for the test.If you go to the party,your parents will be upset.What should you do?Tina has the same problem.Can you give her some advice?环节说明:师生回答,引出了本节课的学习内容,锻炼了学生的口语表达能力及思维能力。Step 2 完成教材Grammar Focus的任务1.学生大声朗读Grammar Focus的句子。(2分钟)2.小结训练。(2分钟)环节说明:通过对Grammar Focus句型的填空练习能够使学生更好地来理解掌握本单元的重点语法和句型。Step 3 完成教材3a-3c的任务1.认真阅读3a中短文,然后用括号中所给单词的正确形式来填空,完成后老师让几名学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(3分钟)2.大声地熟读3a中的短文,体会if引导的条件状语从句的用法及时态。(3分钟)3.阅读3b中的句子,然后用自己的想法来补全每一个句子,注意所补充句子的时态。让几名学生到黑板上板演答案,完成后教师点拨。(5分钟)4.小组成员一起在一张纸上写一个故事。第一个人用“I think I'll…”给故事开头,组里其他成员用“if”添加句子。把这张纸在小组里传两遍,然后读出这个故事。(5分钟)参考案例I think I will go to the movies tonight.If I go to the movies,I won't finish my homework.If I don't finish my homework,the teacher won't be happy.If the teacher is not happy,she will tell my parents…小结训练。(2分钟)(B)1.My brother likes reading but half of his books ________ in English.A.is B.are C.have D.has(C)2.We'll easily become unhappy ________ we solve our problems.A.because B.ifC.unless D.although环节说明:通过3a-3c的学习,让学生练习掌握了if引导的条件状语从句的用法。Step 4 问题探究( )Can you give me ________.A.some advicesB.an adviceC.two piece of adviceD.some pieces of advice答案选择D,advice是不可数名词,some advice是指一些建议。而我们通常说“他给了我一个(则)建议”,不能说成an advice,而应该说成a piece of advice,又因为advice是不可数名词,所以两个(则)建议,我们通常说two pieces of advice。注意piece要用复数,advice不可数,但piece可数。因此,我们也可以说为some pieces of advice。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。I__think__I'll__take__the__bus__to__the__party.(我想我将乘公共汽车去参加聚会。)If you do,you will__be__late.(如果那样,你将迟到。)I__think__I'll__stay__at__home.(我想我将待在家里。)If__you__do,you'll__be__sorry.(如果那样,你将很遗憾。)What__will__happen__if__they__have__the__party__today?(如果他们今天举行聚会,将会怎么样?)If__they__have__it__today,half__the__class__won't__come.(如果今天举行,一半的学生将不能来。)Should__we__ask__people__to__bring__food?(我们应该让人们带来食物吗?)If__we__ask__people__to__bring__food,they__will__just__bring__potato__chips__and__chocolate.(如果我们让人们带来食物,他们将会只带来炸薯条和巧克力。)Section B(1a-1d)1.重点单词:travel, agent2.重点短语:travel around the world,go to college,make a lot of money,get an education3.重点句式:If you work really hard,you will travel around the world.What do you think I should do?If I go to college,I'll never become a great soccer player.1.进一步学习if引导的条件状语从句2.会用if来谈论自己感兴趣的话题会用if来谈论自己感兴趣的话题一、预习课本P76新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.旅行__travel__ 2.代理人__agent__二、认真预习1a-1d,找出下列短语和句型。1.环球旅行__travel__around__the__world__2.上大学__go__to__college__3.挣很多钱__make__a__lot__of__money__4.接受教育__get__an__education__5.如果你努力工作,你就能环游世界。__If__you__work__really__hard,you__will__travel__around__the__world.__6.你认为我该怎么办?__What__do__you__think__I__should__do?__7.如果我去上大学,我就不会成为一名很棒的足球运动员。__If__I__go__to__college,I'll__never__become__a__great__soccer__player.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,boys and girls.Now I ask you a question:What will you do if you have a million dollars?Student 1:If I have a million dollars,I will buy a big house with a beautiful garden for my parents.Student 2:I will buy a car if I have a million dollars.Student 3:I will travel around the world.……环节说明:以假如你有一百万美元为话题导入新课,引起了学生的学习兴趣,激起了学生表达英语的欲望,引出了新课的学习,同时也练习了学生的口语。Step 2 完成教材1a-1d的任务1.学生领读1a中的词组,教师纠正读音错误,然后两人一组互相提问词组。(4分钟)2.圈出三件对于你来说最重要的事情,小组内互相交流答案。(2分钟)3.看1a中的词组,认真听录音,在足球经纪人谈到的内容前写“A”,在Mike的父母谈到的内容前写“P”,集体核对答案。(5分钟)4.认真阅读1c中的句子,再听一遍录音,将左右两组句子匹配,完成1c中的句子,集体核对答案。(3分钟)5.听第三遍录音,跟读整体感知对话内容。(3分钟)6.学生A扮演Michael,学生B扮演他的朋友,两人仿照1d的对话形式练习对话,给Michael提出建议。参考案例A:What do you think I should do?Can you give me some advice?B:I think you should go to college.A:But if I go to college,I'll never become a great soccer player.小结训练。(2分钟)(C)1.Tom,if you ________ so many mistakes again,you'll lose your job.A.will B.madeC.make D.can make(C)2.If it ________ sunny tomorrow,I ________ fishing in South Lake.A.is;go B.will be;goC.is;will go D.will be;will go(B)3.If he ________ harder,he will catch up with us soon.A.study B.studiesC.will study D.studied(C)4.________ she can't find her lost bike.A.I hope B.I thinkC.I'm afraid D.He said环节说明:通过本环节的练习使学生掌握了if引导的条件状语从句及一般将来时态的用法,有效地巩固了前几个课时所学的知识点。Step 3 问题探究( )Mum,today is Mother's Day,Mike and I want to invite you to have dinner ________ us at Shanghai Restaurant,which is famous ________ its sea food.A.with;of B.with;forC.for;to D.to;for答案选择B,“和某人一起”用介词with;“上海饭店因为海鲜而出名”be famous for“因为……而出名”,因此正确答案为B选项。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(2a-2e)1.重点单词:expert,else,teenager,normal,unless,certainly,wallet,worried,mile,angry,understanding,careless,mistake,himself,careful,advise,solve,step,trust,experience,halfway2.重点短语:worry about,get advice,keep…to oneself,a lot of worries,make mistakes,in the end,in half,a lot of experience3.重点句式:If people have problems,they should keep them to themselves.Some people believe the worst thing is to do nothing.Unless we talk to someone,we'll certainly feel worse.She was afraid to tell her parents about it.They got her a new wallet and asked her to be more careful.Robert Hunt advises students about common problems.It is best not to run away from our problems.He thinks the first step is to find someone you trust to talk to.Sharing a problem is like cutting it in half.You are halfway to solving a problem just by talking to someone about it.1.重点短语和句型2.在遇到困难时要寻求正确的解决方法重点短语和句型一、预习课本P77-78新单词并背诵,完成下面的汉译英。1.专家__expert__ 2.别的__else__3.青少年__teenager__ 4.正常的__normal__5.除非__unless__ 6.当然__certainly__7.钱包__wallet__ 8.担心的__worried__9.英里__mile__ 10.愤怒的__angry__11.粗心的careless12.善解人意的understanding13.错误__mistake__ 14.他自己__himself__15.细致的__careful__ 16.劝告__advise__17.解决__solve__ 18.步骤__step__19.信任__trust__ 20.经验__experience__21.在中途__halfway__二、认真预习2a-2e内容,找出下列短语和句型。1.担心……__worry__about__2.获得建议__set__advice__3.保守秘密__keep...to__oneself__4.很多的烦恼__a__lot__of__worries__5.犯错__make__mistake__6.最后__in__the__end__7.分成两半__in__half__8.许多经验__a__lot__of__experience__9.如果人们遇到问题了,他们要自己保守秘密。__If__people__have__problems,they__should__keep__them__to__themselves.__10.一些人认为最糟的事情就是什么也不做。__Some__people__believe__the__worst__thing__is__to__do__nothing.__11.如果我们不和别人交流,我们一定感觉更糟。__Unless__we__talk__to__someone,we'll__certainly__feel__worse.__12.她害怕告诉父母这件事情。__She__was__afraid__to__tell__her__parents__about__it.13.他们给她买了新的钱包并且告诉她要多加小心。__They__got__her__a__new__wallet__and__asked__her__to__be__more__careful.__14.Robert Hunt就普通的问题给学生提出建议。__Robert__Hunt__advises__students__about__common__problems.__15.最好不要逃避我们的问题。__It__is__best__not__to__run__away__from__our__problems.__16.他认为第一步就是找到你信任的人和他来交流。__He__thinks__the__first__step__is__to__find__someone__you__trust__to__talk__to.__17.共享一个问题就像是把它分成两半。__Sharing__a__problem__is__like__cutting__it__in__half.18.通过和人交流你的问题,你就解决了这个问题的一半。__You__are__halfway__to__solving__a__problem__just__by__talking__to__someone__about__it.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Do you have any problems in your life?What should you do if you have any problems?Do you talk to other people or keep them to yourself?Which is the best way to solve problems?Do you know other ways to solve problems?Today we will learn a passage about how to solve problems we have.环节说明:由一系列的问题入手,让学生带着问题来学习新的内容,目标明确,重点突出。Step 2 完成教材2a-2c的任务1.小组内互相交流各自在生活中遇到的问题以及遇到问题后经常找谁来帮助解决问题。(3分钟)2.快速阅读2b短文,了解短文大意,从所给出的a,b,c三个选项中选出一个能概括这篇文章的中心意思的选项。(3分钟)3.认真阅读短文,回答2c中的四个问题,完成后请学生说出答案,教师点拨答案。(5分钟)4.再次细心阅读短文,理解每一句话的意思,小组合作解决遇到的问题。(5分钟)5.教师点拨短文中出现的重点和难点。(5分钟)6.熟读短文,识记背诵知识要点。(5分钟)小结训练。(5分钟)(A)1.This letter is about how ________ English well.A.to learn B.learnC.learning D.learned(D)2.Don't ________ jeans to school,________ you teacher won't let you in.A.put;and B.put on;orC.wear;and D.wear;or(D)3.If you work hard,you ________ pass the exam.A.are able to B.will are able toC.be able to D.will be able to(C)4.He was ________ tired ________ he couldn't go on working.A.too;to B.such;thatC.so;that D.too;that环节说明:通过本环节的学习不仅锻炼了学生的阅读能力,而且通过小结训练让学生对重要知识点进行了巩固练习。Step 3 完成教材2d-2e的任务1.认真阅读2d的短文,然后用所给的短语来补全短文,完成后集体核对答案,并大声朗读短文。(5分钟)2.两人一组互相提问2e中的问题,然后根据问题的答案将其整理成一篇短文,完成后小组内互相交流短文。(5分钟)环节说明:通过2d环节锻炼了学生对文章的总结概括能力,同时对2b短文有了更深刻的理解;2e环节锻炼了学生的口语表达能力和书面表达能力。Step 4 问题探究( )1.The girl is new in the school.She has some problems ________ her subjects.A.to B.in C.at D.with答案选择D,have a problem with sth.在……方面有问题或困难。with后面的宾语可以是名词也可以是代词;如果强调在做某事方面有困难要用have a problem doing,意为“做……有困难”,强调动作。2.worry的用法(1)这个母亲有很多烦恼。The__mother__has__lots__of__worries.(2)他很担心他丢失的儿子。He__is__very__worried__about__his__lost__son.或He__worries__about__his__lost__son__very__much.worry作为名词时,意为“烦恼,忧虑”,作为动词时意为“担心”,它的形容词是worried。为某人担心worry__about或be__worried__about。( )3.You will miss the bus ________ you hurry up.A.if B.or C.unless D.so答案选择C,根据句意“你如果不快点,你就会错过早班车”。连词unless意为“除非……;如果不……除了……”;引导条件状语从句。unless引导条件句时主句用一般将来时态、祈使句或谓语中含有情态动词的句子,从句用一般现在时态。4.experience的用法(1)经验是最好的老师。Experience__is__the__best__teacher.(2)他有很多有趣的经历。He__has__a__lot__of__interesting__experiences.(3)这位老师有很丰富的教学经验。The__teacher__has__lots__of__experience__in__teaching.experience用作名词,表示“经验,体验”,是不可数名词;而表示“经历,感受”,通常是可数名词。表示做某事的经验,其后通常不接不定式,而接in/of doing sth.。5.advise的用法(1)他建议早点动身。He__advised__leaving__early.(2)他建议我买台电脑。He__advised__me__to__buy__a__computer.(3)他劝她晚上不要出去。He__advised__her__against__going__out__at__night.advise意为“建议”,动词。经常用到的句型:(1)advise__doing__sth.建议做某事;(2)advise__sb.to__do__sth.建议某人做某事;(3)advise__sb.not__to__do__sth.或advise__sb.__against__doing__sth.劝告某人不要做某事。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。Section B(3a)-Self Check1.重点单词:old people's home visit,school clean-up,take part in2.重点句式:If my family travel to a new country this summer,I'll send you a letter about my apartment.I got into a fight with my parents.You should just say sorry to your parents.1.熟记本单元的重点单词、短语及句型2.熟练掌握if引导的条件状语从句的用法熟练掌握if引导的条件状语从句的用法预习课本3a-Self Check,找出下列短语和句型。1.参观敬老院__old__people's__home__visit__2.学校大扫除__school__cleanup__3.参加__take__part__in__4.如果今年夏天我们家去一个新的国家旅行,我将给你写封信,告诉你我的公寓的情况。__If__my__family__travel__to__a__new__country__this__summer,__I'll__send__you__a__letter__about__my__apartment.__5.我与我的父母吵架了。__I__got__into__a__fight__with__my__parents.__6.你应该跟你的父母道歉。__You__should__just__say__sorry__to__your__parents.__Step 1 情景导入Teacher:Hello,everyone.Now I will give you a task.Please tell your partner one problem that you have solved and the way you solved it.环节说明:这个环节的学习让学生学会了找到解决问题的最佳方式,同时也锻炼了学生的语言表达能力和语言组织能力。Step 2 完成教材3a-4的任务1.和你的搭档交流生活或学习中遇到的问题,找出他(她)最大的担忧,然后尽力想一些解决问题的方法,把它们写下来,完成后小组内互相交流。(5分钟)2.根据3b给出的结构安排,来完成你的写作计划。(3分钟)3.针对你朋友遇到的某个问题给出你的建议,写成一篇短文,完成后小组内互相交流纠错,借鉴好词好句,教师抽查,点拨。(7分钟)参考案例Dear Mary,I know that you don't want your friend to wear the same clothes as you do.It's not really important.Everyone has her own feature.Maybe she wants to be the same all the time.In fact,friends shouldn't be the same all the time.If you don't want her to wear the same clothes,you should tell her to get different clothes.If you can't change her,then change yourself.Please remember to talk more to her,and you will find the reason of it.Then choose the best way to solve it.Yours,Tara4.你的学校的学生正在参加“我能帮忙”的活动,根据要求在方框中填写更多的项目,然后和你的搭档仿照4的对话形式来编练新的对话,并邀请学生展示新对话。(5分钟)参考案例A:What will you do if you visit an old people's home?B:If I do that,I'll bring the old people some flowers.环节说明:通过3a-3c教学环节提高了学生解决问题的能力,同时练习了本单元的写作并锻炼了学生的写作能力;4环节让学生再次巩固了if引导的条件状语从句的用法。Step 3 完成教材Self Check的任务1.认真阅读1中的四个句子,然后用左侧方框中的单词补全句子,集体核对答案,并大声地朗读句子。(2分钟)2.认真阅读2中的对话,用所给的单词来补全对话,单词可以重复使用,完成后集体核对答案,然后两人一组来练习对话。(4分钟)3.发挥你的想象,如果出现了3中的情况你会怎么办?把你的答案写在横线上,邀请几位学生到黑板上板演答案,教师点评。(5分钟)环节说明:本环节的学习让学生掌握了本单元重要的语法知识——if引导的条件状语从句。Step 4 问题探究( )If you have ________ questions,please hands up.A.some B.anyC.much D.a答案选择B,在if引导的条件状语从句中,表示“一些”时,要用any而不用some。请学生们做前面课时训练部分。
相关资料
更多